PROJECT MANUAL
UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO
AT COLORADO SPRINGS
COLORADO SPRINGS, COLORADO
ENGINEERING CENTER PROCESS
FLUID COOLER REPLACEMENT
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
January 25, 2013
Prepared By:
SCHENDT ENGINEERING CORP.
2912 Beacon Street
Colorado Springs, CO 80907-9207
(719) 637-8850 Voice
(719) 632-0300 FAX
E-Mail: sec@secengr.com
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO AT COLORADO SPRINGS
EGINEERING CENTER PROCESS FLUID COOLER REPLACEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division 0 – Special Sections
Section Title
Advertisement for Bids
Information for Bidders – SBP-6.12 Revised 7/10
Certification and Affidavit Regarding Unauthorized Immigrants – UI-1 Revised 7/08
Bid – SBP-6.13 Revised 7/10
Bid Alternates Form – SBP-6.131 Revised 7/10
Bid Bond – SBP-6.14 Revised 10/06
Notice of Award – SBP-6.15 Revised 7/10
Contractors Agreement (Design/Bid/Build) – SC-6.21 Revised 7/12
Performance Bond – SC-6.22 Revised 9/06
Labor and Material Payment Bond – SC-6.221 Revised 9/08
Notice To Proceed – SBP-6.26 Revised 7/10
General Conditions of the Contract – SC-6.23 Revised 7/12
Notice of Substantial Completion – SBP-07 Revised 7/12
Notice Of Final Acceptance – SBP-6.27 Revised 9/06
Notice of Contractor’s Settlement – SBP-7.3 Revised 7/10
Division 1 - General Requirements
Section No.
Section Title
01 10 00
Summary
01 31 00
Project Management and Coordination
01 33 00
Submittal Procedures
01 40 00
Quality Requirements
01 42 00
References
01 60 00
Product Requirements
01 73 10
Cutting and Patching
01 73 20
Selective Demolition
01 77 00
Closeout Procedures
Division 23 - Mechanical
Section No.
Section Title
23 00 00
Mechanical General Provisions
23 01 00
Mechanical Submittals
23 03 00
Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work and Mechanical Provisions of Electrical
Work
23 05 00
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
23 05 19
Meters and Gages
23 05 23
General Duty Valves
23 05 29
Hangers and Supports
23 05 93
Testing, Adjusting & Balancing
23 07 00
Mechanical Insulation
23 09 00
Electric Control System
23 10 00
Variable Frequency Drives
23 21 13
Hydronic Piping
23 21 23
Hydronic Pumps
23 25 00
Water Treatment System
23 31 13
Metal Ducts
23 33 00
Duct Accessories
23 65 50
Closed Circuit Fluid Coolers
INDEX
(12116)
i
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
Division 16 - Electrical Requirements
Section No.
Section Title
26 05 00
Common Work Results for Electridal
26 05 03
Equipment Wiring Connections
26 05 26
Grounding
26 05 29
Hangers/Supports for Electrical Systems
26 05 53
Identification of Electrical Systems
INDEX
(12116)
ii
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
Institution or Agency:
Project No./Name:
1.
BID FORM: Bidders are required to use the Bid form attached to the bidding documents. Each bidder is
required to bid on all alternates and indicate the time from the date of the Notice to Proceed to Substantial
Completion in calendar days, and in addition, the bidder is required to indicate the period of time to finally
complete the project from Substantial Completion to Final Acceptance, also in calendar days. Bids indicating
times for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance in excess of the number of days indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids for completion of the entire Project may be found non-responsive and may be rejected.
The bid shall not be modified or conditioned in any manner. Bids shall be submitted in sealed envelopes
bearing the address and information shown below. If a bid is submitted by mail, this aforementioned sealed
envelope should be enclosed in an outer envelope and sent to the following addressee:
INSERT NAME OF AGENCY AND ADDRESS WHERE BID SHOULD BE DELIVERED
The outside of the sealed inner envelope should bear the following information:
Project #
Project Name
Name and Address of Bidder
Date of Opening
Time of Opening
2.
INCONSISTENCIES AND OMISSIONS: Bidders may request clarification of any seeming inconsistencies, or
matters seeming to require explanation, in the bidding documents at least three (3) business days prior to the
time set for the opening of Bids. Decisions of major importance on such matters will be issued in the form of
addendum.
3.
APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS: The bidder’s attention is called to the fact that all work under this
Contract shall comply with the provisions of all state and local laws, approved state building codes, ordinances
and regulations which might in any manner affect the work to be done or those to be employed in or about the
work. Attention is also called to the fact that the use of labor for work shall be governed by the provisions of
Colorado law which are hereinafter set forth in Articles 27 and 52E of the GENERAL CONDITIONS.
4.
UNAUTHORIZED IMMIGRANTS: Note that the Special Provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract
includes the following language: PUBLIC CONTRACTS FOR SERVICES - CRS 8-17.5-101 and PUBLIC
CONTRACTS WITH NATURAL PERSONS - 24-76.5-101. The Contractor certifies that the Contractor shall
comply with the provisions of CRS 8-17.5-101 et seq. The Contractor shall not knowingly employ or contract
with an illegal alien to perform work under this contract or enter into a contract with a subcontractor that fails to
certify to the Contractor that the subcontractor shall not knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien to
perform work under this contract. The Contractor represents, warrants, and agrees that it (i) has verified that it
does not employ any illegal aliens, through participation in the Basic Pilot Employment Verification Program
administered by the Social Security Administration and Department of Homeland Security, and (ii) otherwise
will comply with the requirements of CRS 8-17.5-102(2)(b). The Contractor shall comply with all reasonable
requests made in the course of an investigation under CRS 8-17.5-102 by the Colorado Department of Labor
and Employment. If the Contractor fails to comply with any requirement of this provision or CRS 8-17.5-101 et
seq., the State may terminate this contract for breach and the Contractor shall be liable for actual and
consequential damages to the State.
A Contractor that operates as a sole proprietor hereby swears or affirms under penalty of perjury that the
Contractor (i) is a citizen of the United States or otherwise lawfully present in the United States pursuant to
federal law, (ii) shall comply with the provisions of CRS 24-76.5-101 et seq, and (iii) shall produce one of the
State Form SBP-6.12
Rev. 7/2010
Page 1 of 2
forms of identification required by CRS 24-76.5-103 prior to the effective date of this Contract. Except where
exempted by federal law and except as provided in CRS 24-76.5-103(3), a Contractor that receives federal or
state funds under this contract must confirm that any individual natural person eighteen years of age or older is
lawfully present in the United States pursuant to CRS 24-76.5-103(4) if such individual applies for public
benefits provided under this contract.
5.
TAXES: The bidder’s attention is called to the fact that the Bid submitted shall exclude all applicable federal
excise or manufacturers’ taxes and all state sales and use taxes as hereinafter set forth in Article 9C of the
GENERAL CONDITIONS.
6.
OR EQUAL: The words “OR EQUAL” are applicable to all specifications and drawings relating to materials or
equipment specified. Any material or equipment that will fully perform the duties specified, will be considered
“equal”, provided the bid submits proof that such material or equipment is of equivalent substance and function
and is approved, in writing. Requests for the approval of “or equal” shall be made in writing at least five (5)
business days prior to bid opening. During the bidding period, all approvals shall be issued by the
Architect/Engineer in the form of addenda at least two (2) business days prior to the bid opening date.
7.
ADDENDA: Owner/architect initiated addenda shall not be issued later than two (2) business days prior to bid
opening date. All addenda shall become part of the Contract Documents and receipt must be acknowledged
on the Bid form.
8.
METHOD OF AWARD - LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER: If the bidding documents for this project require
alternate prices, additive and/or deductible alternates shall be listed on the alternates bid form provided by the
Principal Representative. Bidders should note the Method of Award is applicable to this Bid as stated below.
A.
DEDUCTIBLE ALTERNATES: The lowest responsible Bid, taking into account the Colorado resident
bidder preference provision of Colorado law, will be determined by and the contract will be awarded on the
base bid combined with deductible alternates, deducted in numerical order in which they are listed in the
alternates bid form provided by the Principal Representative. The subtraction of alternates shall result in a
sum total within available funds. If this bid exceeds such amount, the right is reserved to reject all bids.
An equal number of alternates shall be subtracted from the base bid of each bidder within funds available
for purposes of determining the lowest responsible bidder.
B.
ADDITIVE ALTERNATES: The lowest responsible Bid, taking into account the Colorado resident bidder
preference provision of Colorado law, will be determined by and the contract will be awarded on the base
bid plus all additive alternates added in the numerical order in which they are listed in the alternates bid
form provided by the Principal Representative. The addition of alternates shall result in a sum total within
available funds. If this bid exceeds such amount, the right is reserved to reject all bids. An equal number
of alternates shall be added to the base bid of each bidder within funds available for purposes of
determining the lowest responsible bidder.
C. DEDUCTIBLE AND ADDITIVE ALTERNATES: Additive alternates will not be used if deductible alternates
are used and deductible alternates will not be used if additive alternates are used.
9.
NOTICE OF CONTRACTOR’S SETTLEMENT – Agencies/institutions must indicate in the initial Solicitation
(Advertisement for Bids, Documented Quotes, or Requests for Proposals) whether settlement will be
advertised in newspapers or electronic media.
The Advertisement for Bids can be located at the web site: www.colorado.gov/dpa/dfp/sbrep/constructdesign.htm
(Click on the link below the second paragraph Colorado Construction and Design Notices)
State Form SBP-6.12
Rev. 7/2010
Page 2 of 2
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
CERTIFICATION AND AFFIDAVIT REGARDING UNAUTHORIZED IMMIGRANTS
Institution/Agency:
Project No./Name:
A. CERTIFICATION STATEMENT
CRS 8-17.5-101 & 102 (HB 06-1343, SB 08-193)
The Vendor, whose name and signature appear below, certifies and agrees as follows:
1. The Vendor shall comply with the provisions of CRS 8-17.5-101 et seq. The Vendor shall not knowingly
employ or contract with an unauthorized immigrant to perform work for the State or enter into a contract with a
subcontractor that knowingly employs or contracts with an unauthorized immigrant.
2. The Vendor certifies that it does not now knowing employ or contract with and unauthorized immigrant who
will perform work under this contract, and that it will participate in either (i) the “E-Verify Program”, jointly
administered by the United States Department of Homeland Security and the Social Security Administration,
or (ii) the “Department Program” administered by the Colorado Department of Labor and Employment in order
to confirm the employment eligibility of all employees who are newly hired to perform work under this contract.
3. The Vendor shall comply with all reasonable requests made in the course of an investigation under CRS 817.5-102 by the Colorado Department of Labor and Employment. If the Vendor fails to comply with any
requirement of this provision or CRS 8-17.5-101 et seq., the State may terminate work for breach and the
Vendor shall be liable for damages to the State.
B. AFFIDAVIT CRS 24-76.5-101 (HB 06S-1023)
4. If the Vendor is a sole proprietor, the undersigned hereby swears or affirms under penalty of perjury under the
laws of the State of Colorado that (check one):
I am a United States citizen, or
I am a Permanent Resident of the United States, or
I am lawfully present in the United States pursuant to Federal law.
I understand that this sworn statement is required by law because I am a sole proprietor entering into a
contract to perform work for the State of Colorado. I understand that state law requires me to provide
proof that I am lawfully present in the United States prior to starting work for the State. I further
acknowledge that I will comply with the requirements of CRS 24-76.5-101 et seq. and will produce the
required form of identification prior to starting work. I acknowledge that making a false, fictitious, or
fraudulent statement or representation in this sworn affidavit is punishable under the criminal laws of
Colorado as perjury in the second degree under CRS 18-8-503 and it shall constitute a separate criminal
offense each time a public benefit is fraudulently received.
CERTIFIED and AGREED to this _
____ day of ___
___, _20
VENDOR:
Vendor Full Legal Name
BY:
Signature of Authorized Representative
State Form UI-1
Page 1 of 1
Issued 7/2008
Title
__.
State Form UI-1
Issued 7/2008
Page 2 of 1
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
BID
Institution/Agency:
Project No./Name:
Bidder Acknowledges Receipt of Addenda Numbers:
$
Base Bid
(Refer to Bid Alternate Form SC-6.13.1 Attached, If Applicable)
Bidder’s Time of Completion
a. Time Period from Notice to Proceed to Substantial Completion:
b. Time Period from Substantial Completion to Final Acceptance:
c. Total Time of Completion of Entire Project (a + b):
1. BID: Pursuant to the advertisement by the State of Colorado dated
the undersigned bidder hereby proposes to furnish all the
labor and materials and to perform all the work required for the complete and prompt execution of everything described or shown in or reasonably
implied from the Bidding Documents, including the Drawings and Specifications, for the work and for the base bid indicated above. Bidders should
include all taxes that are applicable.
2. EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE: The bidder has carefully examined the Bidding Documents, including the Drawings and
Specifications, and has examined the site of the Work, so as to make certain of the conditions at the site and to gain a clear understanding of the
work to be done.
3. PARTIES INTERESTED IN BID: The bidder hereby certifies that the only persons or parties interested in this Bid are those named herein, and that
no other bidder or prospective bidder has given any information concerning this Bid.
4. BID GUARANTEE: This Bid is accompanied by the required Bid Guarantee. You are authorized to hold said Bid Guarantee for a period of not
more than thirty (30) days after the opening of the Bids for the work above indicated, unless the undersigned bidder is awarded the Contract, within
said period, in which event the Director, State Buildings Programs, may retain said Bid Guarantee, until the undersigned bidder has executed the
required Agreement and furnished the required Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bond, Insurance Policy and Certificates of
Insurance and Affidavit Regarding Unauthorized Immigrants.
5. TIME OF COMPLETION: The bidder agrees to achieve Substantial Completion of the Project from the date of the Notice to Proceed within
the number of calendar days entered above, and in addition, further agrees that the period between Substantial Completion and Final
Acceptance of the Project will not exceed the number of calendar days noted above. If awarded the Work, the bidder agrees to begin
performance within ten (10) days from the date of the Notice to Proceed subject to Article 46, Time of Completion and Liquidated Damages of The
General Conditions of the Contract, and agrees to prosecute the Work with due diligence to completion. The bidder represents that Article 54D has
been reviewed to determine the type and amount of any liquidated damages that may be specified for this contract.
6. EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS: The bidder understands that if this Bid is accepted, bidder must execute the required Agreement and furnish the
required Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bond, Insurance Policy and Certificates of Insurance and Affidavit Regarding
Unauthorized Immigrants within ten (10) days from the date of the Notice of Award, and that the bidder will be required to sign to acknowledge and
accept the Contract Documents, including the Drawings and Specifications.
7. ALTERNATES: Refer to the Information for Bidders (SC-6.12) for Method of Award for Alternates and use State Form SBP-6.13.1 Bid Alternates
form to be submitted with this bid form if alternates are requested by the institution/agency in the solicitation documents.
8. Submit wage rates (direct labor costs) for prime contractor and subcontractor as requested by the institution/agency in the solicitation documents.
9. The right is reserved to waive informalities and to reject any and all Bids.
Dated this
Day of
,
20
THE BIDDER:
Company Name
Address (including city, state and zip)
Phone number:
Signature
Name (Print) and Title
SIGNATURES:
If the Bid is being submitted by a Corporation, the Bid should be signed by an officer, i.e., President or Vice-President. If a sole
proprietorship or a partnership is submitting the Bid, the Bid shall so indicate and be properly signed.
State Form SBP-6.13
Rev. 7/2010
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
BID ALTERNATES FORM
Institution/Agency:
Project No./Name:
Additive alternates will not be used if deductible alternates are used and deductible alternates will not be
used if additive alternates are used.
Additive Alternates (If Applicable)
Refer to specification section
for descriptions of add alternates. If the add alternates are
accepted, the base bid would be modified by the amount entered by the bidder.
A.A. No. 1
A.A. No. 2
A.A. No. 3
A.A. No. 4
A.A. No. 5
A.A. No. 6
A.A. No. 7
A.A. No. 8
A.A. No. 9
A.A. No. 10
Add $
Add $
Add $
Add $
Add $
Add $
Add $
Add $
Add $
Add $
Deductive Alternates (If Applicable)
Refer to specification section
for descriptions of the deductive alternates. If the deductive
alternates are accepted, the base bid would be modified by the amount entered by the bidder.
D.A. No. 1
D.A. No. 2
D.A. No. 3
D.A. No. 4
D.A. No. 5
D.A. No. 6
D.A. No. 7
D.A. No. 8
D.A. No. 9
D.A. No. 10
Deduct $
Deduct $
Deduct $
Deduct $
Deduct $
Deduct $
Deduct $
Deduct $
Deduct $
Deduct $
THE BIDDER:
Company Name
Signature
State Form SBP –6.131
Issued 4/2010
Date
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
BID BOND
Institution/Agency:
Project No./Name:
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
WHEREAS,
hereinafter called the “PRINCIPAL”, is submitting a
PROPOSAL for the above described project, to the STATE OF COLORADO, hereinafter called the “OBLIGEE”.
WHEREAS, the Advertisement for Bids has required as a condition of receiving the Proposals that the Principal submit with the
PROPOSAL GUARANTY in an amount not less than five per cent (5%) of the Proposal, which sum it is specifically agreed is to be
forfeited as Liquidated Damages in the event that the Principal defaults in his obligation as hereinafter specified, and, in pursuance
of which Requirement, this Bid is made, executed and delivered.
a corporation of the State of
NOW THEREFORE, the Principal and
, duly authorized to transact business in Colorado, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Obligee, in the
sum of five per cent (5%) of the Principal’s total bid price, lawful money of the United States for the payment of which sum, well and
truly to be made to the Obligee, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and
severally, firmly by these presents.
FURTHER THAT, a condition of the obligation that the Principal shall maintain his Proposal in full force and effect for thirty (30)
days after the opening of the proposals for the project, or, if the Principal’s Proposal is accepted, the Principal shall, within the
prescribed time, execute the required Agreement, furnish the required Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bond,
Insurance Policy, Certificates of Insurance and Certification and Affidavit Regarding Illegal Aliens, then this obligation shall be null
and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, and subject to forfeiture upon demand as Liquidated Damages.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF said Principal and Surety have executed this Bond, this
(Corporate Seal)
day of
, A.D., 20
.
THE PRINCIPAL
Company Name
ATTEST
Secretary
Address (including city, state and zip)
Phone number:
Name (Print)
Signature
Name (Print) and Title
SIGNATURES
If the “Principal” is doing business as a Corporation, the Bid Bond shall be signed by an officer, i.e., President
or Vice President. The signature of the officer shall be attested to by the Secretary and properly sealed.
If the “Principal” is an individual or a partnership, the Bid Bond shall so indicate and be properly signed.
(Corporate Seal)
THE SURETY
_____________________________________________
Secretary
By __________________________________________
Attorney-in-Fact
THIS BOND MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY POWER OF ATTORNEY, EFFECTIVELY DATED.
FAILURE TO PROVIDE A PROPERLY EXECUTED BID BOND WITH A PROPERLY EXECUTED POWER OF
ATTORNEY WILL RESULT IN THE BIDDER’S PROPOSAL BEING DEEMED NON-RESPONSIVE.
State Form SBP-6.14
Rev. 9/2006
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
NOTICE OF AWARD
Date of Notice:
Date to be inserted by the Principal Representative
Institution/Agency:
Project No./Name:
TO:
The State of Colorado, represented by the undersigned, has considered the Proposals submitted for the above
described work.
Your Proposal, deemed to be in the best interest of the State of Colorado, in the amount of
DOLLARS AND NO/100* ($
*) is hereby accepted, pending final execution of the Agreement.
You are required to execute the approved Agreement and to furnish the Performance Bond, Labor and Material
Payment Bond, Insurance Policy and Certificates of Insurance within ten (10) days from the date of this Notice.
If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bond,
Insurance Policy and Certificates of Insurance, and Certification and Affidavit Regarding Unauthorized Immigrants
within ten (10) days from the date of this Notice, the State Controller is entitled to retain the amount of the Proposal
Guaranty submitted with your Proposal as Liquidated Damages. In this event, the right is reserved to consider all of
your rights arising out of the acceptance of your Proposal as abandoned and to award the work covered by your
Proposal to another, or to re-advertise the Project, or otherwise dispose thereof.
By ________________________________________
State Buildings Programs
Date
(of Authorized Delegate)
By ________________________________________
Principal Representative
(Institution or Agency)
Date
When completely executed, this form is to be sent by certified mail to the Contractor by the Principal Representative or by any
other means to which the parties agree.
State Form SBP-6.15
Rev. 9/2006
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT
DESIGN/BID/BUILD
(STATE FORM SC-6.21)
CONTRACT ID NUMBER:
AGENCY IDENTIFICATION NUMBER:
PROJECT NUMBER:
PROJECT NAME:
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.21
STATE OF COLORADO
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT DESIGN/BID/BUILD
(STATE FORM SC-6.21)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page(s)
RECITALS
1
ARTICLE 1.
Performance of the Work
1
ARTICLE 2.
Provisions of the Contract Documents
1
ARTICLE 3.
Time of Completion
1
ARTICLE 4.
Essential Condition
1
ARTICLE 5.
Contract Sum
1
ARTICLE 6.
Contract Documents
1
ARTICLE 7.
Optional Provisions and Elections
2
SIGNATURE APPROVALS
Exhibits:
A
B
C
D
E
F
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.21
3
Contractor's Bid (Form SC-6.13)
Performance Bond (Form SC-6.22)
Labor and Material Payment Bond (Form SC-6.221)
Insurance Certificates
Certification and Affidavit Regarding Unauthorized Immigrants (required at contract signing
prior to commencing work)
Contract Management Information Construction Contractor
1 of 1
STATE OF COLORADO
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT DESIGN/BID/BUILD
(STATE FORM SC-6.21)
Agency I.D. No.:
Contract ID No.:
Project No.
1. PARTIES. THIS AGREEMENT is entered into by and between the STATE OF COLORADO, acting by and
through the (agency)
, hereinafter referred to as the Principal Representative, and (vendor name)
having its offices at (vendor address)
hereinafter referred to as the Contractor.
2. EFFECTIVE DATE AND NOTICE OF NONLIABILITY. This Agreement shall not be effective or enforceable until it is
approved and signed by the State Controller or its designee (hereinafter called the “Effective Date”), but shall be
effective and enforceable thereafter in accordance with its provisions. The State shall not be liable to pay or reimburse
Contractor for any performance hereunder or be bound by any provision hereof prior to the Effective Date.
WHEREAS, the Principal Representative intends to
called the Project; and
.
Hereinafter
WHEREAS, authority exists in Law and Funds have been budgeted, appropriated, and otherwise made available,
and a sufficient unencumbered balance thereof remains available for payment in Fund Number
, Account
Number
, Contract Encumbrance Number
, and
WHEREAS, this is a phase one waived contract, waiver number 156 Contractors Agreement for Capital
Construction Form SC6.21.
WITNESSETH, that the State of Colorado and the Contractor agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1. PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall perform all of the Work required for the complete and prompt execution of everything
described or shown in, or reasonably implied from the Contract Documents for the above referenced Project.
ARTICLE 2. PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contractor agrees to perform the Work to the highest industry standards and to the satisfaction of the State of
Colorado and its Architect/Engineer in strict accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 3. TIME OF COMPLETION
The Contractor agrees to Substantially Complete the Project within
calendar days from the date of the Notice
to Proceed, in addition, the Contractor agrees to finally complete the Project from Substantial Completion to Final
Acceptance within
calendar days for a total time of completion of the entire Project of
calendar days.
The Contractor shall perform the Work with due diligence to completion.
ARTICLE 4. ESSENTIAL CONDITION
Timely completion of the Project is an essential condition of this Agreement. The Contractor shall be subject to any
liquidated damages described in Article 54D of The General Conditions of the Construction Contract SC-6.23 for
failure to satisfactorily complete the Work within the time periods in Article 3 above.
ARTICLE 5. CONTRACT SUM
The Contractor shall be paid for the performance of this Agreement, subject to any additions and deductions as
provided for in Articles 32, 34 and 35 of The General Conditions of the Construction Contract SC-6.23, the sum of
DOLLARS AND NO/100* ($
*).
ARTICLE 6. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents, as enumerated in Article 1 of The General Conditions of the Construction Contract Sc6.23, are all essential parts of this Agreement and are fully incorporated herein.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.21
Page 1 of 3
ARTICLE 7. OPTIONAL PROVISIONS AND ELECTIONS
The provisions of this Article 7 alter the Articles (General Conditions SC-6.23) or enlarge upon them as indicated:
The Principal Representative and or the State Buildings Programs shall mark boxes and initial where applicable.
A. MODIFICATION OF ARTICLE 45. GUARANTEE INSPECTIONS AFTER COMPLETION
If the box below is marked the six month guarantee inspection is not required.
______ Principal Representative initial
B. MODIFICATION OF ARTICLE 27. LABOR AND WAGES
If the box is marked the Federal Davis-Bacon Act shall be applicable to the Project. The minimum wage rates to
be paid on the Project shall be furnished by the Principal Representative and included in the Contract
Documents.
______ Principal Representative initial
C. MODIFICATION OF ARTICLE 39. NON-BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION –
FACILITATED NEGOTIATIONS
If the box is marked, and initialed by the State as noted, the requirement to participate in facilitated negotiations
shall be deleted from this Contract. Article 39, Non-Binding Dispute Resolution – Facilitated Negotiations, shall
be deleted in its entirety and all references to the right to the same where ever they appear in the contract shall
be similarly deleted.
The box may be marked only for projects with an estimated value of less than $500,000.
______ Principal Representative initial
D. MODIFICATION OF ARTICLE 46. TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
If an amount is indicated immediately below, liquidated damages shall be applicable to this Project as, and to,
the extent shown below. Where an amount is indicated below, liquidated damages shall be assessed in
accordance with and pursuant to the terms of Article 46, Time of Completion And Liquidated Damages, in the
amounts and as here indicated. The election of liquidated damages shall limit and control the parties right to
damages only to the extent noted.
1.
For the inability to use the Project, for each day after the number of calendar days specified in the
Contractor’s bid for the Project and the Agreement for achievement of Substantial Completion, until the day
that the Project has achieved Substantial Completion and the Notice of Substantial Completion is issued,
the Contractor agrees that an amount equal to _____________________________ ($
) shall be
assessed against Contractor from amounts due and payable to the Contractor under the Contract, or the
Contractor and the Contractor’s Surety shall pay to the Principal Representative such sum for any
deficiency, if amounts on account thereof are deducted from remaining amounts due, but amounts
remaining are insufficient to cover the entire assessment.
2.
For damages related to or arising from additional administrative, technical, supervisory and
professional expenses related to and arising from the extended closeout period, for each day in excess of
the number of calendar days specified in the Contractor’s bid for the Project and the Agreement to finally
complete the Project as defined by the issuance of the Notice of Final Acceptance) after the issuance of the
final Notice of Substantial Completion, the Contractor agrees that an amount equal to
____________________________________ ($
) shall be assessed against Contractor from
amounts due and payable to the Contractor under the Contract, or the Contractor and the Contractor’s
Surety shall pay to the Principal Representative such sum for any deficiency, if amounts on account thereof
are deducted from remaining amounts due but amounts remaining are insufficient to cover the entire
assessment.
E. NOTICE IDENTIFICATION
All Notices pertaining to General Conditions or otherwise required to be given shall be transmitted in writing, to
the individuals at the addresses listed below, and shall be deemed duly given when received by the parties at
their addresses below or any subsequent persons or addresses provided to the other party in writing.
Notice to Principal Representative:
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.21
Page 2 of 3
With copies to (State Buildings Programs (or Delegate) State of Colorado):
Notice to Contractor:
With copies to:
SIGNATURE APPROVALS:
THE PARTIES HERETO HAVE EXECUTED THIS CONTRACT
*Persons signing for Contractor hereby swear and affirm that they are authorized to act on Contractor’s behalf and
acknowledge that the State is relying on their representations to that effect. Principal is not a recognized title
and will not be accepted
Project Name/Number:
Contract ID No.:
STATE OF COLORADO, acting by and through:
(Insert Name & Title of Agency or IHE)
THE CONTRACTOR
By:
Legal Name of Contracting Entity
(Insert Name & Title of Person Signing for
Agency or IHE)
Date:
*Signature
APPROVED
DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL & ADMINISTRATION
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
State Architect (or authorized Delegate)
By
Name (print)
Title
Date:
By:
(Insert Name of Authorized Individual)
Date:
ALL CONTRACTS MUST BE APPROVED BY THE STATE CONTROLLER:
CRS §24-30-202 requires the State Controller to approve all State Contracts. This Contract is not valid until signed and dated below by the
State Controller or delegate. Contractor is not authorized to begin performance until such time. If Contractor begins performing prior thereto,
the State of Colorado is not obligated to pay Contactor for such performance or for any goods and/or services provided hereunder.
APPROVED:
STATE OF COLORADO
STATE CONTROLLER'S OFFICE
State Controller (or authorized Delegate)
By:
(Insert Name & Title of Authorized Individual)
Date:
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.21
Page 3 of 3
STATE OF COLORADO
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT DESIGN/BID/BUILD
(STATE FORM SC-6.21)
EXHIBIT A
CONTRACTOR’S BID (Form SBP-6.13)
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.21
STATE OF COLORADO
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT DESIGN/BID/BUILD
(STATE FORM SC-6.21)
EXHIBIT B
PERFORMANCE BOND (Form SC-6.22)
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.21
STATE OF COLORADO
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT DESIGN/BID/BUILD
(STATE FORM SC-6.21)
EXHIBIT C
LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND (Form SC-6.221)
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.21
STATE OF COLORADO
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT DESIGN/BID/BUILD
(STATE FORM SC-6.21)
EXHIBIT D
INSURANCE CERTIFICATE(S) (attached)
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.21
STATE OF COLORADO
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT DESIGN/BID/BUILD
(STATE FORM SC-6.21)
EXHIBIT E
Certification and Affidavit Regarding Unauthorized Immigrants (required at contract signing prior to
commencing work) (UI-1, attached)
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.21
STATE OF COLORADO
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT DESIGN/BID/BUILD
(STATE FORM SC-6.21)
EXHIBIT F
Contract Management Information Construction Contractor – Performance Evaluation Report
(Form SB-228 C. v1) (if applicable, attached)
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.21
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
PERFORMANCE BOND
Institution/Agency:
Project No./Name:
BONDING COMPANY: DO NOT MAKE ANY CHANGES TO THE LANGUAGE IN THIS BOND.
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS:
That the Contractor
as Principal and hereinafter called “Principal,”
and
as Surety and hereinafter called “Surety,” a corporation organized and existing under the laws of
are held and firmly bound unto the STATE OF COLORADO
acting by and through
(AGENCY OR INSTITUTION)
hereinafter called the “Principal Representative”, in the sum of
Dollars ($
)
for the payment whereof the Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly, by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal and the State of Colorado acting by and through the Principal Representative
have entered into a certain Contract, hereinafter called “Contract,” dated
, 20
, for the construction of a PROJECT described as
which Contract is hereby by reference made a part hereof;
State Form SC-6.22
(Rev. 9/2006)
Page 1 of 2
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION, is such that, if the Principal shall
promptly, fully and faithfully perform all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements
of said Contract during the original term of said Contract any extensions thereof that may be granted
by the Principal Representative with or without notice to the Surety, and during the life of any guaranty
required under the Contract, and shall also well and truly perform and fulfill all undertakings,
covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of any and all duly authorized modifications of said
Contract that may hereafter be made, notice of which modifications to the Surety being hereby waived,
then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
AND THE SAID SURETY, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that whenever the Principal
shall be, and declared by the Principal Representative to be in default under said Contract, the State of
Colorado having performed its obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default or
shall promptly (1) Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, or (2) Obtain a
bid or bids for submittal to the Principal Representative for completing the Contract in accordance with
its terms and conditions, and upon determination by the Principal Representative and Surety of the
lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and the State of Colorado acting
by and through the Principal Representative and make available as work progresses (even though
there should be a default or a succession of defaults under the contract or contracts of completion
arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the
contract price but not exceeding, including other costs and damages for which the Surety may be liable
hereunder, the amount hereinbefore set forth. The term “balance of the contract price” as herein used
shall mean the total amount payable to the Principal under the Contract and any amendments thereto,
less the amount properly paid by the State of Colorado to the Contractor.
No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the
State of Colorado.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF said Principal and Surety have executed this Bond, this
A.D.,
20
.
(Corporate Seal)
day of ,
THE PRINCIPAL
ATTEST:
By:
Title:
Secretary
(Corporate Seal)
SURETY
By:
Attorney-in-fact
THIS BOND MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY POWER OF ATTORNEY, EFFECTIVELY DATED
Note:
State Form SC-6.22
(Rev. 9/2006)
This bond is issued simultaneously with another bond
conditioned for the full and faithful payment for all labor
and material of the contract.
Page 2 of 2
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND
Institution/Agency:
Project No./Name:
BONDING COMPANY: DO NOT MAKE ANY CHANGES TO THE LANGUAGE IN THIS BOND.
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS:
That the Contractor
as Principal and hereinafter called "Principal,"
and
as Surety and hereinafter called "Surety," a corporation organized and existing under the laws of
are held and firmly bound unto the STATE OF COLORADO
acting by and through
(agency or institution)
hereinafter called "Principal Representative," and to all subcontractors and any others who have supplied
or furnished or shall supply or furnish materials, rental machinery, tools, or equipment actually used in the
performance of the hereinafter identified Contract, or who have performed or shall perform labor in the
performance of or in connection with said Contract, hereinafter called "Obligees" in the sum of
Dollars ($
)
together with interest at the rate of eight per cent (8%) per annum on all payments becoming due in
accordance with said Contract, from the time such payments shall become due until such payment shall
be made, for the payment of which, well and truly made to the Obligees, the Principal and the Surety bind
themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly, by
these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal and the State of Colorado acting by and through the Principal Representative
have entered into a certain Contract, hereinafter called "Contract," dated _______________, 20
for the
construction of a PROJECT described as
which Contract is hereby by reference made a part hereof;
State Form SC-6.221
(Rev. 9/2006)
Page 1 of 2
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the Principal and the
Surety shall fully indemnify and save harmless the State of Colorado and the Principal Representative
from and against any and all costs and damages, including patent infringements, which either may suffer
by reason of any failure or failures of the Principal promptly and faithfully to perform all terms and
conditions of said Contract and shall fully reimburse and repay the State of Colorado and the Principal
Representative all outlay and expense which the State of Colorado and the Principal Representative may
incur in making good any such failure or failures, and further, if the Principal and his subcontractors shall
duly and promptly pay for any and all labor, materials, team hire, sustenance, provisions, provender, rental
machinery, tools, or equipment and other supplies which have been or shall be used or consumed by said
Principal or his subcontractors in the performance of the work of said Contract , and it said Principal shall
duly and promptly pay all his subcontractors the sums due them for any and all materials, rental
machinery, tools, or equipment and labor that have been or shall be furnished, supplied, performed or
used in connection with performance of said Contract, and shall also fully indemnify and save harmless
the State of Colorado and the Principal Representative to the extent of any and all expenditures which
either or both of them may be required to make by reason of any failures or defaults by the Principal or
any subcontractor in connection with such payments; then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise
it shall remain in full force and effect.
It is expressly understood and agreed that any alterations which may be made in the terms of said
Contract or in the work to be done under said Contract, or any extension(s) of time for the performance of
the Contract, or any forebearance on the part of either the State of Colorado or the Principal to any of the
others, shall not in any way release the Principal and the Surety, or either of them, their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors or assigns from their liability hereunder, notice to the Surety of any such
alteration, extension or forbearance being hereby waived.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have executed this Bond, this
, A.D., 20
.
(Corporate Seal)
day of
THE PRINCIPAL
ATTEST:
By:
Title:
Secretary
(Corporate Seal)
SURETY
By:
Attorney-in-fact
THIS BOND MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY POWER OF ATTORNEY, EFFECTIVELY DATED
Note:
State Form SC-6.221
(Rev. 9/2006)
This bond is issued simultaneously with another bond
conditioned for the full and faithful performance of the
contract.
Page 2 of 2
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
NOTICE TO PROCEED (DESIGN/BID/BUILD CONTRACT)
Date of Notice:
Date to be inserted by the Principal Representative
Date/Description of Contract Documents:
Institution/Agency:
Project No./Name:
Attach Notice of Code Compliance from Code Review Agent/Building Official for Documents Listed Above
To:
This is to advise you that your Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bond, Insurance Policy and
Certificates of Insurance, and Affidavit Regarding Unauthorized Immigrants have been received. Our issuance
of this Notice does not relieve you of responsibility to assure that the bond and insurance requirements of the
Contract Documents are met for the duration of the Agreement. The Agreement dated
covering the
above described work has been fully executed.
You are hereby authorized and directed to proceed within ten (10) days from date of this Notice as required in
the Agreement. Any liquidated damages for failure to achieve Substantial Completion by the date agreed that
may be applicable to this Contract will be calculated using the date of this Notice for the date of the
commencement of the Work.
The completion date of the Project is
(M/D/YYYY).
By ________________________________________
State Buildings Programs
Date
(or Authorized Delegate)
By ________________________________________
Principal Representative
Date
(Institution or Agency)
When completely executed, this form is to be sent by certified mail to the Contractor by the Principal Representative; or by any other
means to which the parties agree.
State Form SBP-6.26
Rev. 7/2010
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
THE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
DESIGN/BID/BUILD
(STATE FORM SC-6.23)
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
TABLE OF CONTENTS
THE CONTRACT
ARTICLE 1.
DEFINITIONS
.
..
.
..
.
A.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
.
.
.
B.
DEFINITIONS OF WORDS AND TERMS USED
.
ARTICLE 2.
EXECUTION, CORRELATIONS, INTENT OF DOCUMENTS, COMMUNICATIONS AND
COOPERATION .
.
..
A.
EXECUTION
. .
..
B.
CORRELATION
.
..
C.
INTENT OF DOCUMENTS
.
.
D.
PARTNERING, COMMUNICATIONS AND COOPERATION
.
ARTICLE 3.
COPIES FURNISHED
.
..
ARTICLE 4.
OWNERSHIP OF DRAWINGS
. ..
THE ARCHITECT
ARTICLE 5.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER’S STATUS
.
ARTICLE 6.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER DECISIONS AND JUDGMENTS
A.
DECISIONS
.
B.
JUDGMENTS
..
C.
ACCESS TO WORK
.
D.
INSPECTION
..
THE CONTRACTOR
ARTICLE 7.
CONTRACTOR’S SUPERINTENDENCE AND SUPERVISION .
ARTICLE 8.
MATERIALS AND EMPLOYEES .
ARTICLE 9.
SURVEYS, PERMITS, LAWS, TAXES AND REGULATIONS
A.
SURVEYS
..
B.
PERMITS AND LICENSES
..
C.
TAXES
.
D.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS
.
.
ARTICLE 10.
PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
..
A.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
.
B.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
.
.
C.
EMERGENCIES
..
ARTICLE 11. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ON THE WORK
..
ARTICLE 12. REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION AND SCHEDULES
..
A.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
..
B.
SCHEDULES
.
ARTICLE 13. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
..
A.
SUBMITTAL PROCESS
..
B.
FABRICATION AND ORDERING
..
C.
DEVIATIONS FROM DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS
..
D.
CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATIONS
.
ARTICLE 14 SAMPLES AND TESTING
A.
SAMPLES
B.
TESTING – GENERAL
.
..
C.
TESTING – CONCRETE AND SOILS
.
D.
TESTING – OTHER
.
..
ARTICLE 15. SUBCONTRACTS
.
ARTICLE 16. RELATIONS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR
ARTICLE 17. MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS .
ARTICLE 18. SEPARATE CONTRACTS
..
ARTICLE 19. USE OF PREMISES
..
ARTICLE 20. CUTTING, FITTING OR PATCHING
..
ARTICLE 21. UTILITIES
.
..
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
i
..
..
..
.
..
..
...
.. ..4
..4
..4
....4
. .5
....5
.....6
.. ..6
..6
. .6
. .6
....6
. ..6
....7
..8
...8
.
....8
.. ..8
....8
.....9
....9
.. ..9
..9
1. 0
... 10
.10
... 10
.. ..10
.
...
12
.. 12
.. 13
...13
.. 13
..13
..
.. 13
...14
1. 4
. 14
.
. 14
... 15
...15
....15
..16
..16
.. 16
..
. .
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
..1
.....1
. 2
.
.
.. ..
..
..
..
.
A.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
..
.
16
B.
PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES
..
.. 16
C.
CROSSING OF UTILITIES
..
. .16
ARTICLE 22. UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS
..
.. 16
ARTICLE 23. TEMPORARY FACILITIES
..
..17
A.
OFFICE FACILITIES
..
.. ..17
B.
TEMPORARY HEAT
..
.
.. .17
C.
WEATHER PROTECTION
. 17
D.
DUST PARTITIONS
..
.
.17
E.
BENCH MARKS
..
.
...17
F.
SIGN
..
.
..17
G. SANITARY PROVISION
.
..
.
1. 7
ARTICLE 24. CLEANING UP
..
.
..
... 17
ARTICLE 25. INSURANCE
..
..
.
... 17
A.
GENERAL
.
.
.......................................................................................... 17
B.
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE (CGL)
.
.
..18
C.
AUTOMOBILITY INSURANCE
.18
D.
WORKERS COMPENSATIONS INSURANCE
..
..
.
.. . 18
E.
UMBRELLA LIABILITY INSURANCE
..19
F.
BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE
19
.
G. POLLUTION LIABILITY INSURANCE
.20
H.
ADDITIONAL MISCELLANEOUS INSURANCE PROVISIONS
...20
ARTICLE 26. CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS
..
.
.
..20
ARTICLE 27. LABOR AND WAGES
.
..
.
..
..21
ARTICLE 28. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
..
..
21
ARTICLE 29. ASSIGNMENT
..
21
ARTICLE 30. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE ACCEPTANCE
..
...
. 21
PAYMENT AND COMPENSATION
ARTICLE 31. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENTS
.
..
A.
CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTALS
..
B.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER CERTIFICATION
.
C.
RETAINAGE WITHHELD
..
D.
RELEASE OF RETAINAGE
ARTICLE 32. CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENTS
..
..
.
ARTICLE 33. PAYMENTS WITHHELD
ARTICLE 34. DEDUCTIONS FOR UNCORRECTED WORK
..
ARTICLE 35. CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
THE VALUE OF CHANGED WORK
.
B.
DETAILED BREAKDOWN
..
C.
EMERGENCY FIELD CHANGE ORDERED WORK
.
D.
APPROPRIATION LIMITATIONS – § 24-91-103.6, C.R.S., as amended
ARTICLE 36. CLAIMS
..
..
ARTICLE 37. DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS
..
A.
NOTICE IN WRITING
..
B.
LIMITATIONS
. .
ARTICLE 38. DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
.
.
ARTICLE 39. NON-BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION – FACILITATED NEGOTIATIONS
COMPLETION
ARTICLE 40. RIGHT OF OCCUPANCY .
..
..
ARTICLE 41. COMPLETION, FINAL INSPECTION, ACCEPTANCE AND SETTLEMENT
A.
NOTICE OF COMPLETION
B.
FINAL INSPECTION
.
C.
NOTICE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
D.
NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE
.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
ii
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
.
.
.. .
.
.. ...
..
.. 22
..22
..23
.23
.23
.. .24
...24
... 25
.25
.. .25
.. 26
...27
...28
.. 28
. 30
...30
. 31
...31
..32
.33
..34
.. 34
..
34
34
.
.35
E.
SETTLEMENT
..
. ..36
ARTICLE 42. GENERAL WARRANTY AND CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER ACCEPTANCE
. .
.37
ARTICLE 43. LIENS
...
.. 37
ARTICLE 44. ONE-YEAR GUARANTEE AND SPECIAL GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
..
... 37
A.
ONE-YEAR GUARANTEE OF THE WORK
..
.. 37
B.
SPECIAL GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
..
..
.38
ARTICLE 45. GUARANTEE INSPECTIONS AFTER COMPLETION
..
.
.. 38
ARTICLE 46. TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
..
.
. 38
ARTICLE 47. DAMAGES
..
.
.. 40
ARTICLE 48. STATE’S RIGHT TO DO THE WORK; TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK; DELAY
40
DAMAGES
..
..
A.
STATE’S RIGHT TO DO THE WORK
..
...40
B.
TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK
...40
C.
DELAY DAMAGES
..
...41
ARTICLE 49. STATE’S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT
. .
. .. ..41
A.
GENERAL
41
B.
CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES
..
.. 42
C.
ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS
..
42
ARTICLE 50.
TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF STATE
.
.. 42
A.
NOTICE OF TERMINATION
..
...42
B.
PROCEDURES
..
.. 43
ARTICLE 51. CONTRACTOR’S RIGHT TO STOP WORK AND/OR TERMINATE CONTRACT
.
.
... 44
ARTICLE 52. SPECIAL PROVISIONS
.
.
...44
A.
CONTROLLER’S APPROVAL
..
. .. 44
B.
FUND AVAILABILITY
..
44
C.
GOVERNMENTAL IMMUNITY
.44
D.
INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
..
44
E.
COMPLIANCE WITH LAW
..
.
.45
F.
CHOICE OF LAW
.
.. 45
G. BINDING ARBITRATION PROHIBITED
. 45
H.
SOFTWARE PIRACY PROHIBITION
..
.
. 45
I.
EMPLOYEE FINANCIAL INTEREST/CONFLICT OF INTEREST
. 45
J.
VENDOR OFFSET
..
.. 45
K.
PUBLIC CONTRACTS FOR SERVICES..
. 45
L.
PUBLIC CONTRACTS WITH NATURAL PERSONS
.. 46
ARTICLE 53. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
.
.
..46
A.
CONSTRUCTION OF LANGUAGE
..
46
B.
SEVERABILITY
..
.
46
C.
SECTION HEADINGS
.
.. 46
D.
AUTHORITY
.
...46
E.
INTEGRATION OF UNDERSTANDING
.
.47
F.
VENUE
.
.47
G. NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES
..
4
.7
H.
WAIVER
..
.. 47
I.
INDEMNIFICATION
47
J
STATEWIDE CONTRACT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
. 47
K
CORA DISCLOSURE
.48
Note: The sections of the General Conditions indicated in italics (Articles 35 General and 35A, 35B, 37, 38, 46,
48B, 49 and 50) are regulatory and cannot be modified except through appropriate rule making procedures
through the Division of Finance and Procurement, Department of Personnel & Administration.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
iii
General Conditions of Contract
ARTICLE 1.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of the following some of which are procedural documents used in the
administration and performance of the Agreement:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Agreement; (SC-6.21);
Performance Bond (SC-6.22) and Labor and Material Payment Bond (SC-6.221);
General Conditions of the Construction Contract (SC- 6.23) and if applicable, Supplementary
General Conditions;
Detailed Specification Requirements, including all addenda issued prior to the opening of the
bids; and,
Drawings, including all addenda issued prior to the opening of the bids.
Change Orders (SC-6.31) and Amendments (SC-6.0), if any, when properly executed.
Authorization to Bid (SBP-6.10)
Information for Bidders (SBP-6.12);
Bid (SBP-6.13);
Bid Bond (SBP-6.14);
Notice of Award (SBP-6.15);
Builder’s risk insurance certificates of insurance (ACORD 25-S);
Liability and workers’ compensation certificates of insurance;
Notice to Proceed (Design/Bid/Build) (SBP-6.26);
Notice of Approval of Occupancy/Use (SBP-01);
Notice of Partial Substantial Completion (SBP-071);
Notice of Substantial Completion (SBP-07);
Notice of Partial Final Acceptance (SC-6.27);
Notice of Final Acceptance (SBP-6.271);
Notice of Partial Contractor's Settlement (SC-7.3);
Notice of Contractor’s Settlement (SBP-7.31);
Application and Certificate for Contractor’s Payment (SBP-7.2);
Other procedural and reporting documents or forms referred to in the General Conditions, the
Supplementary General Conditions, the Specifications or required by the State Buildings
Programs or the Principal Representative, including but not necessarily limited to PreAcceptance Check List (SBP-05) and the Building Inspection Record (SBP-BIR). A list of the
current standard State Buildings Programs forms applicable to this Contract may be obtained
from the Principal Representative on request.
B.
DEFINITIONS OF WORDS AND TERMS USED
1.
AGREEMENT. The term “Agreement” shall mean the written agreement entered into by the
State of Colorado acting by and through the Principal Representative and the Contractor for the
performance of the Work and payment therefore, on State Form SC-6.21. The term
Agreement when used without reference to State Form SC-6.21 may also refer to the entirety
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
of the parties’ agreement to perform the Work described in the Contract Documents or
reasonably inferable there from. The term “Contract” shall be interchangeable with this latter
meaning of the term Agreement
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. The term “Architect/Engineer” shall mean either the architect of
record or the engineer of record under contract to the State of Colorado for the Project
identified in the Contract Documents.
OCCUPANCY. The term “Occupancy” means occupancy taken by the State as Owner after the
Date of Substantial Completion at a time when a building or other discrete physical portion of the
Project is used for the purpose intended. The Date of Occupancy shall be the date of such first
use, but shall not be prior to the date of execution of the Notice of Approval of Occupancy/Use.
Prior to the date of execution of a Notice of Approval of Occupancy/Use, the state shall have no
right to occupy and the project may not be considered safe for occupancy for the intended use.
CHANGE ORDER. The term “Change Order” means a written order, signed by a Procurement
Officer, directing the Contractor to make changes in the Work, in accordance with Article 35A,
The Value of Changed Work.
COLORADO LABOR. The term “Colorado labor” shall be defined, as provided in § 8-17-101,
C.R.S., as any person who is a resident of the state of Colorado, at the time of employment,
without discrimination as to race, color, creed, sex, age, or religion except when sex or age is a
bona fide occupational qualification, or shall have such other meaning as the term may
otherwise be given in § 8-17-101, C.R.S., as amended.
CONTRACTOR. The word “Contractor” shall mean the person, company, firm, corporation or
other legal entity entering into a contract with the State of Colorado acting by and through the
Principal Representative
DAYS. The term “days” whether singular or plural shall mean calendar days unless expressly
stated otherwise. Where the term “business days” is used it shall mean business days of the
State of Colorado.
DRAWINGS. The term “Drawings” shall mean all drawings approved by appropriate State
officials which have been prepared by the Architect/Engineer showing the work to be done,
except that where a list of drawings is specifically enumerated in the Supplementary General
Conditions or division 1 of the Specifications, the term shall mean the drawings so enumerated,
including all addenda drawings.
EMERGENCY FIELD CHANGE ORDER. The term “Emergency Field Change Order” shall
mean a written change order for extra work or a change in the work necessitated by an
emergency as defined in Article 35C executed on State form SC 6.31 and identified as an
Emergency Field Change Order. The use of such orders is limited to emergencies and to the
amounts shown in Article 35C.
FINAL ACCEPTANCE. The terms “final acceptance” or “finally complete” mean the stage in
the progress of the work, after substantial completion, when all remaining items of work have
been completed, all requirements of the Contract Documents are satisfied and the Notice of
Acceptance can be issued. Discrete physical portions of the Project may be separately and
partially deemed finally complete at the discretion of the Principal Representative when that
portion of the Project reaches such stage of completion and a partial Notice of Acceptance can
be issued.
NOTICE. The term “Notice” shall mean any communication in writing from either contracting
party to the other by such means of delivery that receipt cannot properly be denied. Notice
shall be provided to the person identified to receive it in Article 7E (Contractor’s Agreement SC6.21), Notice Identification, or to such other person as either party identifies in writing to receive
Notice. Notice by facsimile transmission where proper transmission is evidence shall be
adequate where facsimile numbers are included in Article 7E (Contractor’s Agreement SC6.21). Notwithstanding an email delivery or return receipt, email Notice shall not be adequate.
Acknowledgment of receipt of a voice message shall not be deemed to waive the requirement
that Notice, where required, shall be in writing.
2
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
OWNER. The term “Owner” shall mean the Principal Representative.
PRINCIPAL REPRESENTATIVE. The term “Principal Representative ” shall be defined, as
provided in § 24-30-1301(11), C.R.S., as the governing board of a state department, institution,
or agency; or if there is no governing board, then the executive head of a state department,
institution, or agency, as designated by the governor or the general assembly and as
specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or shall have such other meaning as the term
may otherwise be given in § 24-30-1301(11), C.R.S., as amended.
The Principal
Representative may delegate authority. The Contractor shall have the right to inquire
regarding the delegated authority of any of the Principal Representative’s representatives on
the project and shall be provided with a response in writing when requested.
PROCUREMENT OFFICER. The term “Procurement Officer ” means any person duly
authorized to enter into and administer contracts and make written determinations with respect
thereto.
“Procurement Officer” includes an authorized representative of the Principal
Representative acting within the limits of his or her authority.
PRODUCT DATA. The term “Product Data ” shall mean all submittals in the form of printed
manufacturer’s literature, manufacturer’s specifications, and catalog cuts.
REASONABLY INFERABLE: The phrase “reasonably inferable” means that if an item or
system is either shown or specified, all material and equipment normally furnished with such
items or systems and needed to make a complete installation shall be provided whether
mentioned or not, omitting only such parts as are specifically excepted, and shall include only
components which the Contractor could reasonably anticipate based on his or her skill and
knowledge using an objective, industry standard, not a subjective standard. This term takes
into consideration the normal understanding that not every detail is to be given on the Drawings
and Specifications. The phrase shall not, however, be construed to make the Contractor,
rather than the Architect/Engineer, responsible for producing the Drawings and Specifications
SAMPLES. The term “Samples” shall mean examples of materials or work provided to
establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
SC. The term "SC" means "State Contract" which is used in connection with labeling
applicable State form documents (e.g. "SC 6.23" is the State form number for these General
Conditions of the Contract).
SBP. The term "SBP" means "State Buildings", which is used in connection with labeling
applicable State form documents (e.g., "SBP-01" is the form number for Notice of Approval of
Occupancy/Use).
SHOP DRAWINGS. The term “Shop Drawings” shall mean any and all detailed drawings
prepared and submitted by Contractor, Subcontractor at any tier, vendors or manufacturers
providing the products and equipment specified on the Drawings or called for in the
Specifications.
SPECIFICATIONS. The term “Specifications” shall mean the requirements of the CSI divisions
of the project manual prepared by the Architect/Engineer describing the work to be
accomplished.
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS. Shall refer to the Office of the State Architect within the
Department of Personnel & Administration of Colorado State government responsible for
project administration, review, approval and coordination of plans, construction procurement
policy, contractual procedures, and code compliance and inspection of all buildings, public
works and improvements erected for state purposes; except public roads and highways and
projects under the supervision of the division of wildlife and the division of parks and outdoor
recreation as provided in § 24-30-1301, et seq, C.R.S. The term State Buildings Programs
shall also mean that individual within a State Department agency or institution, including
institutions of higher education, who has signed an agreement accepting delegation to perform
all or part of the responsibilities and functions of State Buildings Programs.
SUBMITTALS. The term “submittals” means drawings, lists, tables, documents and samples
prepared by the Contractor to facilitate the progress of the work as required by these General
Conditions or the Drawings and Specifications. They consist of Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples, and various administrative support documents including but not limited to lists of
subcontractors, construction progress schedules, schedules of values, applications for
payment, inspection and test results, requests for information, various document logs, and as3
24.
25.
26.
built drawings. Submittals are required by the Contract Documents, but except to the extent
expressly specified otherwise are not themselves a part of the Contract Documents.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. The terms “substantial completion ” or “substantially complete
” mean the stage in the progress of the work when the construction is sufficiently complete, in
accordance with the Contract Documents as modified by any Change Orders, so that the Work,
or at the discretion of the Principal Representative, any designated portion thereof, is available
for its intended use by the Principal Representative and a Notice of Substantial Completion can
be issued. Portions of the Project may, at the discretion of the Principal Representative, be
designated as substantially complete.
SURETY. The term “Surety ” shall mean the company providing the labor and material
payment and performance bonds for the Contractor as obligor.
WORK. The term “Work ” shall mean all or part of the labor, materials, equipment, and other
services required by the Contract Documents or otherwise required to be provided by the
Contractor to meet the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract.
ARTICLE 2.
A.
EXECUTION, CORRELATION, INTENT OF DOCUMENTS, COMMUNICATION AND
COOPERATION
EXECUTION
The Contractor, within ten (10) days from the date of Notice of Award, will be required to:
1.
Execute the Agreement, State Form SC-6.21;
2.
Furnish fully executed Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds on State Form s
SC-6.22 and SC-6.221; and
3.
Furnish certificates of insurance evidencing all required insurance on standard Acord forms
designed for such purpose.
4.
Furnish certified copies of any insurance policies requested by the Principal Representative.
B.
CORRELATION
By execution of the Agreement the Contractor represents that the Contractor has visited the site, has
become familiar with local conditions and local requirements under which the Work is to be performed,
including the building code programs of the State Buildings Program as implemented by the Principal
Representative, and has correlated personal observations with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
C.
INTENT OF DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one document shall be as
binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labor, materials,
equipment and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the Work. Words describing
materials or work which have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such
recognized standards.
In any event, if any error exists, or appears to exist, in the requirements of the Drawings or
Specifications, or if any disagreement exists as to such requirements, the Contractor shall have the
same explained or adjusted by the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with the work in question. In
the event of the Contractor’s failure to give prior written Notice of any such errors or disagreements of
which the Contractor or the Subcontractors at any tier are aware, the Contractor shall, at no additional
cost to the Principal Representative, make good any damage to, or defect in, work which is caused by
such omission.
Where a conflict occurs between or within standards, Specifications or Drawings, which is not resolved
by reference to the precedence between the Contract Documents, the more stringent or higher quality
requirements shall apply so long as such more stringent or higher quality requirements are reasonably
inferable. The Architect/Engineer shall decide which requirements will provide the best installation.
With the exception noted in the following paragraph, the precedence of the Contract Documents is in
the following sequence:
1.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
The Agreement (SC-6.21);
4
2.
3.
4.
The Supplementary General Conditions, if any;
The General Conditions (SC-6.23); and
Drawings and Specifications, all as modified by any addenda.
Change Orders and Amendments, if any, to the Contract Documents take precedence over the original
Contract Documents.
Notwithstanding the foregoing order of precedence, the Special Provisions of Article 52 of the General
Conditions, Special Provisions, shall take precedence, rule and control over all other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
Unless the context otherwise requires, form numbers in this document are for convenience only. In the
event of any conflict between the form required by name or context and the form required by number,
the form required by name or context shall control. The Contractor may obtain State forms from the
Principal Representative upon request.
D.
PARTNERING, COMMUNICATIONS AND COOPERATION
In recognition of the fact that conflicts, disagreements and disputes often arise during the performance
of construction contracts, the Contractor and the Principal Representative aspire to encourage a
relationship of open communication and cooperation between the employees and personnel of both, in
which the objectives of the Contract may be better achieved and issues resolved in a more fully
informed atmosphere.
The Contractor and the Principal Representative each agree to assign an individual who shall be fully
authorized to negotiate and implement a voluntary partnering plan for the purpose of facilitating open
communications between them. Within thirty days (30) of the Notice to Proceed, the assigned
individuals shall meet to discuss development of an informal agreement to accomplish these goals.
The assigned individuals shall endeavor to reach an informal agreement, but shall have no such
obligation. Any plans these parties voluntarily agree to implement shall result in no change to the
contract amount, and no costs associated with such plan or its development shall be recoverable
under any contract clause. In addition, no plan developed to facilitate open communication and
cooperation shall alter, amend or waive any of the rights or duties of either party under the Contract
unless and except by written Amendment to the Contract, nor shall anything in this clause or any
subsequently developed partnering plan be deemed to create fiduciary duties between the parties
unless expressly agreed in a written Amendment to the Contract. It is also recognized that projects
with relatively low contract values may not justify the expense or special efforts required. In the case
of small projects with an initial Contract value under $500,000, the requirements of the preceding
paragraph shall not apply.
ARTICLE 3.
COPIES FURNISHED
The Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, the number of copies of Drawings and Specifications as
specified in the Contract Documents, or if no number is specified, all copies reasonably necessary for the
execution of the work.
ARTICLE 4.
OWNERSHIP OF DRAWINGS
Drawings or Specifications, or copies of either, furnished by the Architect/Engineer, are not to be used on
any other work. At the completion of the Work, at the written request of the Architect/Engineer, the
Contractor shall endeavor to return all Drawings and Specifications.
The Contractor may retain the Contractor’s Contract Document set, copies of Drawings and Specifications
used to contract with others for any portion of the Work and a marked up set of as-built drawings.
ARTICLE 5.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER’S STATUS
The Architect/Engineer is the representative of the Principal Representative for purposes of administration of
the Contract, as provided in the Contract Documents and the Agreement. In case of termination of
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
5
employment or the death of the Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative will appoint a capable
Architect/Engineer against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the
Contract shall be the same as that of the former Architect/Engineer.
ARTICLE 6.
A.
B.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER DECISIONS AND JUDGMENTS,
ACCESS TO WORK AND INSPECTION
DECISIONS
The Architect/Engineer shall, within a reasonable time, make decisions on all matters relating to the
execution and progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents, and in the
exercise of due diligence shall be reasonably available to the Contractor to timely interpret and make
decisions with respect to questions relating to the design or concerning the Contract Documents.
JUDGMENTS
The Architect/Engineer is, in the first instance, the judge of the performance required by the Contract
Documents as it relates to compliance with the Drawings and Specifications and quality of
workmanship and materials.
The Architect/Engineer shall make judgments regarding whether directed work is extra or outside the
scope of Work required by the Contract Documents at the time such direction is first given. If, in the
Contractor’s judgment, any performance directed by the Architect/Engineer is not required by the
Contract Documents or if the Architect/Engineer does not make the judgment required, it shall be a
condition precedent to the filing of any claim for additional cost related to such directed work that the
Contractor, before performing such work, shall first obtain in writing, the Architect/Engineer’s written
decision that such directed work is included in the performance required by the Contract Documents.
If the Architect/Engineer’s direction to perform the work does not state that the work is within the
performance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, in writing, request the
Architect/Engineer to advise in writing whether the directed work will be considered extra work or work
included in the performance required by the Contract Documents.
The Architect/Engineer shall respond to any such written request for such a decision within three (3)
business days and if no response is provided, or if the Architect/Engineer’s written decision is to the
effect that the work is included in the performance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor
may file with the Principal Representative and the Architect/Engineer a Notice of claim in accordance
with Article 36, Claims. Whether or not a Notice of claim is filed, the Contractor shall proceed with the
ordered work. Disagreement with the decision of the Architect/Engineer shall not be grounds for the
Contractor to refuse to perform the work directed or to suspend or terminate performance.
C.
ACCESS TO WORK
The Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative and representatives of State Buildings Programs
shall at all times have access to the work. The Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such
access and for their observations or inspection of the work.
D.
INSPECTION
The Architect/Engineer has agreed to make, or that structural, mechanical, electrical engineers or
other consultants will make, periodic visits to the site to generally observe the progress and quality of
the Work to determine in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Observation may extend to all or any part of the Work and to the preparation, fabrication
or manufacture of materials.
Without in any way meaning to be exclusive or to limit the responsibilities of the Architect/Engineer or
the Contractor, the Architect/Engineer has agreed to observe, among other aspects of the Work, the
following for compliance with the Contract Documents:
1.
2.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
Bearing surfaces of excavations before concrete is placed based upon the findings and
recommendations of the Principal Representative’s soils engineering consultant;
Reinforcing steel after installation and before concrete is poured;
6
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Structural concrete;
Laboratory reports on all concrete testing based upon the findings and recommendations of the
Principal Representative’s testing consultant;
Structural steel during and after erection and prior to its being covered or enclosed;
Steel welding; Principal Representative will furnish steel welding inspection consultant/agency
if required or necessary for the project;
Mechanical and plumbing work following its installation and prior to its being covered or
enclosed;
Electrical work following its installation and prior to its being covered or enclosed;
Compaction testing reports based upon the findings and recommendations of the Principal
Representative’s testing consultant; and
Any special or quality control testing required in the Contract Documents provided by the
Principal Representative’s testing consultant.
If the Specifications, the Architect/Engineer’s instructions, laws, ordinances of any public authority
require any work to be specifically tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Architect/Engineer
timely notice of its readiness for observation by the Architect/Engineer or inspection by another
authority, and if the inspection is by another authority, of the date fixed for such inspection, required
certificates of inspection being secured by the Contractor. The Contractor shall give all required
Notices to the Principal Representative or his or her designee for inspections required for the building
inspection program. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the Notice required by
the State pursuant to Building Inspection Record for the Project, according to State form SBP-B.I.R., or
the equivalent form required by the Principal Representative as approved by the State Buildings
Program. If any such work is covered up without approval or consent of the Architect/Engineer or prior
to any building code inspection, it must, if required by the Architect/Engineer, the Principal
Representative or the State Buildings Programs, be uncovered for examination, at the Contractor’s
expense. If such work is found to be not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall pay such costs, unless he or she shall show that the defect in the work was caused by another
contractor engaged by the Principal Representative. In that event, the Principal Representative shall
pay such cost. In addition, examination of questioned work may be ordered, and if so ordered, the
work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall be reimbursed the cost of examination and replacement.
ARTICLE 7.
CONTRACTOR’S SUPERINTENDENCE AND SUPERVISION
The Contractor shall employ, and keep present on the Project during its progress, a competent
superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and the Principal
Representative. The superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Architect/Engineer
and the Principal Representative, unless the superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor
and ceases to be in his or her employ. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his or her
absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
Directions received by the superintendent shall be documented by the superintendent and confirmed in
writing with the Contractor.
The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the Work, using his or her best skill and attention. He or she
shall carefully study and compare all Drawings, Specifications and other written instructions and shall
without delay report any error, inconsistency or omission which he or she may discover in writing to the
Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Principal Representative for damage to the
extent it results from errors or deficiencies in the Contract Documents or other instructions by the
Architect/Engineer, unless the Contractor knew or had reason to know, that damage would result by
proceeding and the Contractor fails to so advise the Architect/Engineer.
The superintendent shall see that the Work is carried out in accordance with the Contract Documents and in
a uniform, thorough and first-class manner in every respect. The Contractor’s superintendent shall establish
all lines, levels, and marks necessary to facilitate the operations of all concerned in the Contractor’s Work.
The Contractor shall lay out all work in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer, making permanent
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
7
records of all lines and levels required for excavation, grading, foundations, and for all other parts of the
Work.
ARTICLE 8.
MATERIALS AND EMPLOYEES
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools,
equipment, light, power, transportation and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the
Work.
Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be first
class and of uniform quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind
and quality of materials.
The Contractor is fully responsible for all acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees and shall at all
times enforce strict discipline and good order among employees on the site. The Contractor shall not
employ on the Work any person reasonably deemed unfit by the Principal Representative or anyone not
skilled in the work assigned to him.
ARTICLE 9.
SURVEYS, PERMITS, LAWS, TAXES AND REGULATIONS
A.
SURVEYS
The Principal Representative shall furnish all surveys, property lines and bench marks deemed
necessary by the Architect/Engineer, unless otherwise specified.
B.
PERMITS AND LICENSES
Permits and licenses necessary for the prosecution of the Work shall be secured and paid for by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise specified in the Specifications, no local municipal or county building
permit shall be required. However, State Buildings Programs requires each Principal Representative
to administer a building code inspection program, the implementation of which may vary at each
agency or institution of the State. The Contractors’ employees shall become personally familiar with
these local conditions and requirements and shall fully comply with such requirements. State electrical
and plumbing permits are required, unless the requirement to obtain such permits is altered by State
Building’s Programs. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for such permits.
Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and
paid for by the Principal Representative, unless otherwise specified.
C.
TAXES
1.
REFUND OF SALES AND USE TAXES
The Contractor shall pay all local taxes required to be paid, including but not necessarily limited
to all sales and use taxes. If requested by the Principal Representative prior to issuance of the
Notice to Proceed or directed in the Supplementary General Conditions or the Specifications,
the Contractor shall maintain records of such payments in respect to the Work, which shall be
separate and distinct from all other records maintained by the Contractor, and the Contractor
shall furnish such data as may be necessary to enable the State of Colorado, acting by and
through the Principal Representative, to obtain any refunds of such taxes which may be
available under the laws, ordinances, rules or regulations applicable to such taxes. When so
requested or directed, the Contractor shall require Subcontractors at all tiers to pay all local
sales and use taxes required to be paid and to maintain records and furnish the Contractor with
such data as may be necessary to obtain refunds of the taxes paid by such Subcontractors. No
State sales and use taxes are to be paid on material to be used in this Project. On application
by the purchaser or seller, the Department of Revenue shall issue to a Contractor or to a
Subcontractor at any tier, a certificate or certificates of exemption per § 39-26-114(1)(d),
C.R.S., and § 39-26-203, C.R.S.
2.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
FEDERAL TAXES
8
The Contractor shall exclude the amount of any applicable federal excise or manufacturers’
taxes from the proposal. The Principal Representative will furnish the Contractor, on request
exemption certificates.
D.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS
The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations
bearing on the conduct of the Work as drawn or specified. If the Contractor observes that the
Drawings or Specifications require work which is at variance therewith, the Contractor shall without
delay notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided
in Article 35, Changes In The Work.
The Contractor shall bear all costs arising from the performance of work required by the Drawings or
Specifications that the Contractor knows to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules or regulations,
if such work is performed without giving Notice to the Architect/Engineer.
ARTICLE 10.
PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all work and materials, protect the
property from injury or loss arising in connection with this Contract and adequately protect adjacent
property as provided by law and the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall make good any
damage, injury or loss, except to the extent:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Directly due to errors in the Contract Documents;
Caused by agents or employees of the Principal Representative; and,
Due to causes beyond the Contractor ’s control and not to fault or negligence; provided such
damage, injury or loss would not be covered by the insurance required to be carried by the
Contractor;
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the Project, and
shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, State and municipal safety laws and building
codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about or adjacent to the premises where the Work
is being performed. He or she shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by the
conditions and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of workers and the
public and shall post danger signs warning against the hazards created by such features of
construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, elevator hatchways, scaffolding, window openings,
stairways and falling materials; and he or she shall designate a responsible member of his or her
organization on the Project, whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. The name and position
of any person so designated shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary bracing, shoring and tying of all structures, decks and
framing to prevent any structural failure of any material which could result in damage to property or the
injury or death of persons; take all precautions to insure that no part of any structure of any description
is loaded beyond its carrying capacity with anything that will endanger its safety at any time during the
execution of this Contract; and provide for the adequacy and safety of all scaffolding and hoisting
equipment. The Contractor shall not permit open fires within the building enclosure. The Contractor
shall construct and maintain all necessary temporary drainage and do all pumping necessary to keep
excavations and floors, pits and trenches free of water. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for
all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, and for coordinating all
portions of the Work, except as otherwise noted.
The Contractor shall take due precautions when obstructing sidewalks, streets or other public ways in
any manner, and shall provide, erect and maintain barricades, temporary walkways, roadways, trench
covers, colored lights or danger signals and any other devices necessary or required to assure the
safe passage of pedestrians and automobiles.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
9
C.
EMERGENCIES
In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the Work or of adjoining property, the Contractor
without special instruction or authorization from the Architect/Engineer or Principal Representative, is
hereby permitted to act, at his or her discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury; and he or
she shall so act, without appeal, if so authorized or instructed. Provided the Contractor has no
responsibilities for the emergency, if the Contractor incurs additional cost not otherwise recoverable
from insurance or others on account of any such emergency work, the Contract sum shall be equitably
adjusted in accordance with Article 35, Changes In The Work.
ARTICLE 11.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ON THE WORK
The Contractor shall keep on the job site one copy of the Contract Documents in good order, including
current copies of all Drawings and Specifications for the Work, and any approved Shop Drawings, Product
Data or Samples, and as-built drawings. As-built drawings shall be updated weekly by the Contractor and
Subcontractors to reflect actual constructed conditions including dimensioned locations of underground work
and the Contractor's failure to maintain such updates may be grounds to withhold portions of payments
otherwise due in accordance with Article 33, Payments Withheld. All such documents shall be available to
the Architect/Engineer and representatives of the State. In addition, the Contractor shall keep on the job site
one copy of all approved addenda, Change Orders and requests for information issued for the Work.
The Contractor shall develop procedures to insure the currency and accuracy of as-built drawings and shall
maintain on a current basis a log of requests for information and responses thereto, a Shop Drawing and
Product Data submittal log, and a Sample submittal log to record the status of all necessary and required
submittals.
ARTICLE 12.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION AND SCHEDULES
A.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
The Architect/Engineer shall furnish additional instructions with reasonable promptness, by means of
drawings or otherwise, necessary for the proper execution of the Work. All such drawings and
instructions shall be consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable there from. The
Architect/Engineer shall determine what additional instructions or drawings are necessary for the
proper execution of the Work.
The Work shall be executed in conformity with such instructions and the Contractor shall do no work
without proper drawings, specifications or instructions.
If the Contractor believes additional
instructions, specifications or drawings are needed for the performance of any portion of the Work, the
Contractor shall give Notice of such need in writing through a request for information furnished to the
Architect/Engineer sufficiently in advance of the need for such additional instructions, specifications or
drawings to avoid delay and to allow the Architect/Engineer a reasonable time to respond. The
Contractor shall maintain a log of the requests for information and the responses provided.
B.
SCHEDULES
1.
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULES
Prior to filing the Contractor ’s first application for payment, a schedule shall be prepared which
may be preliminary to the extent required, fixing the dates for the submission and initial review
of required Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples for the beginning of manufacture and
installation of materials, and for the completion of the various parts of the Work. It shall be
prepared so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor. The
schedule shall be subject to change from time to time in accordance with the progress of the
Work, and it shall be subject to the review and approval by the Architect/Engineer. It shall fix
the dates at which the various Shop Drawings Product Data and Samples will be required from
the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer, after review and agreement as to the time
provided for initial review, shall review and comment on the Shop Drawings, Product Data and
Samples in accordance with that schedule. The schedule shall be finalized, prepared and
submitted with respect to each of the elements of the Work in time to avoid delay, considering
reasonable periods for review, manufacture or installation.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
10
At the time the schedule is prepared, the Contractor, the Architect/Engineer and Principal
Representative shall jointly identify the Shop Drawing, Product Data and Samples, if any, which
the Principal Representative shall receive simultaneously with the Architect/Engineer for the
purposes of owner coordination with existing facility standards and systems. The Contractor
shall furnish a copy for the Principal Representative when so requested. Transmittal of Shop
Drawings and Product Data copies to the Principal Representative shall be solely for the
convenience of the Principal Representative and shall neither create nor imply responsibility or
duty of review by the Principal Representative.
The Contractor may also, or at the direction of the Principal Representative at any time shall,
prepare and maintain a schedule, which may also be preliminary and subject to change to the
extent required, fixing the dates for the initial responses to requests for information or for detail
drawings which will be required from the Architect/Engineer to allow the beginning of
manufacture, installation of materials and for the completion of the various parts of the Work.
The schedule shall be subject to review and approval by the Architect/Engineer. The
Architect/Engineer shall, after review and agreement, furnish responses and detail drawings in
accordance with that schedule. Any such schedule shall be prepared and approved in time to
avoid delay, considering reasonable periods for review, manufacture or installation, but so long
as the request for information schedule is being maintained, it shall not be deemed to transfer
responsibility to the Contractor for errors or omissions in the Contract Documents where
circumstances make timely review and performance impossible.
The Architect/Engineer shall not unreasonably withhold approval of the Contractor’s schedules
and shall inform the Contractor and the Principal Representative of the basis of any refusal to
agree to the Contractor’s schedules. The Principal Representative shall attempt to resolve any
disagreements.
2.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Within twenty-one (21) calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor
shall submit to the Architect/Engineer and Principal Representative, for approval, and to the
State Buildings Programs when specifically requested, a complete itemized schedule of the
values of the various parts of the Work, as estimated by the Contractor, aggregating the total
price. The schedule of values shall be in such detail as the Architect/Engineer or the Principal
Representative shall require, prepared on forms acceptable to the Principal Representative. It
shall, at a minimum, identify on a separate line each division of the Specifications including the
general conditions costs to be charged to the Project. The Contractor shall revise and resubmit
the schedule of values for approval when, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or the
Principal Representative, such resubmittal is required due to changes or modifications to the
Contract Documents or the Contract sum.
The total cost of each line item so separately identified shall, when requested by the
Architect/Engineer or the Principal Representative, be broken down into reasonable estimates
of the value of:
a.
Material, which shall include the cost of material actually built into the Project plus any
local sales or use tax paid thereon; and,
b.
Labor and other costs.
The cost of subcontracts shall be incorporated in the Contractor’s schedule of values, and
when requested by the Architect/Engineer or the Principal Representative, shall be separately
shown as line items.
The Architect/Engineer shall review the proposed schedules and approve it after consultation
with the Principal Representative, or advise the Contractor of any required revisions within ten
(10) days of its receipt. In the event no action is taken on the submittal within ten days, the
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
11
Contractor may utilize the schedule of values as its submittal for payment until it is approved or
until revisions are requested.
When the Architect/Engineer deems it appropriate to facilitate certification of the amounts due
to the Contractor, further breakdown of subcontracts, including breakdown by labor and
materials, may be directed.
This schedule of values, when approved, will be used in preparing Contractor’s applications for
payment on State Form SC-7.2, Application for Payment.
3.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
Within twenty-one (21) calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor
shall submit to the Architect/Engineer and the Principal Representative, and to the State
Buildings Programs when specifically requested, on a form acceptable to them, an overall
timetable of the construction schedule for the Project. Unless the Supplementary General
Conditions or the Specifications allow scheduling with bar charts or other less sophisticated
scheduling tools, the Contractor’s schedule shall be a critical-path method (CPM) construction
schedule. The CPM schedule shall start with the date of the Notice to Proceed and include
submittals activities, the various construction activities, change order work (when applicable),
close-out, testing, demonstration of equipment operation when called for in the Specifications,
and acceptance. The CPM shall at a minimum correlate to the schedule of values line items
and shall be cost loaded if requested by the Architect/Engineer or Principal Representative.
The completion time shall be the time specified in the Agreement and all Project scheduling
shall allocate float utilizing the full period available for construction as specified in the
Agreement on State Form SC 6.13, without indication of early completion, unless such earlier
completion is approved in writing by the Principal Representative and State Building Programs.
The time shown between the starting and completion dates of the various elements within the
construction schedule shall represent one hundred per cent (100%) completion of each
element.
All other elements of the CPM schedule shall be as required by the Specifications. In addition,
the Contractor shall submit monthly updates of the construction schedule. These updates shall
reflect the Contractor’s “work in place” progress.
When requested by the Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative or the State Buildings
Programs, the Contractor shall revise the construction schedule to reflect changes in the
schedule of values.
When the testing of materials is required by the Specifications, the Contractor shall also
prepare and submit to the Architect/Engineer and the Principal Representative a schedule for
testing in accordance with Article 14, Samples and Testing.
ARTICLE 13.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
A.
SUBMITTAL PROCESS
The Contractor shall check and field verify all dimensions. The Contractor shall check, approve and
submit to the Architect/Engineer in accordance with the schedule described in Article 12, Requests for
Information and Schedules, all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by the
specifications or required by the Contractor for the work of the various trades. All Drawings and
Product Data shall contain identifying nomenclature and each submittal shall be accompanied by a
letter of transmittal identifying in detail all enclosures. The number of copies of Shop Drawings and
Product Data to be submitted shall be as specified in the Specifications and if no number is specified
then three copies shall be submitted.
The Architect/Engineer shall review and comment on the Shop Drawings and Product Data within the
time provided in the agreed upon schedule for conformance with information given and the design
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
12
concept expressed in, or reasonably inferred from, the Contract Documents. The nature of all
corrections to be made to the Shop Drawings and Product Data, if any, shall be clearly noted, and the
submittals shall be returned to the Contractor for such corrections. If a change in the scope of the
Work is intended by revisions requested to any Shop Drawings and Product Data, the Contractor shall
be requested to prepare a change proposal in accordance with Article 35, Changes In The Work. On
resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, the Contractor shall direct specific attention in
writing on the transmittal cover to revisions other than those corrections requested by the
Architect/Engineer on any previously checked submittal. The Architect/Engineer shall promptly review
and comment on, and return, the resubmitted items.
The Contractor shall thereafter furnish such other copies in the form approved by the
Architect/Engineer as may be needed for the prosecution of the work.
B.
FABRICATION AND ORDERING
Fabrication shall be started by the Contractor only after receiving approved Shop Drawings from the
Architect/Engineer. Materials shall be ordered in accordance with approved Product Data. Work
which is improperly fabricated, whether through incorrect Shop Drawings, faulty workmanship or
materials, will not be acceptable.
C.
DEVIATIONS FROM DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS
The review and comments of the Architect/Engineer of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples shall
not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Drawings or Specifications, unless
he or she has in writing called the attention of the Architect/Engineer to such deviations at the time of
submission, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in Shop
Drawings or Product Data. Review and comments on Shop Drawings or Product Data containing
identified deviations from the Contract Documents shall not be the basis for a Change Order or a claim
based on a change in the scope of the Work unless Notice is given to the Architect/Engineer and
Principal Representative of all additional costs, time and other impacts of the identified deviation by
bring it to their attention in writing at the time the submittals are made, and any subsequent change in
the Contract sum or the Contract time shall be limited to cost, time and impacts so identified.
D.
CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATIONS
By preparing, approving, and/or submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, the Contractor
represents that the Contractor has determined and verified all materials, field measurements, and field
construction criteria related thereto, and has checked and co-ordinated the information contained
within each submittal with the requirements of the Work, the Project and the Contract Documents and
prior reviews and approvals.
ARTICLE 14.
SAMPLES AND TESTING
A.
SAMPLES
The Contractor shall furnish for approval, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his or her work
or in that of any other Contractor, all Samples as directed by the Architect/Engineer. The
Architect/Engineer shall check and approve such Samples, with reasonable promptness, but only for
conformance with the design intent of the Contract Documents and the Project, and for compliance
with any submission requirements given in the Contract Documents.
B.
TESTING - GENERAL
The Contractor shall provide such equipment and facilities as the Architect/Engineer may require for
conducting field tests and for collecting and forwarding samples to be tested. Samples themselves
shall not be incorporated into the Work after approval without the permission of the Architect/Engineer.
All materials or equipment proposed to be used may be tested at any time during their preparation or
use. The Contractor shall furnish the required samples without charge and shall give sufficient Notice
of the placing of orders to permit the testing thereof. Products may be sampled either prior to
shipment or after being received at the site of the Work.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
13
Tests shall be made by an accredited testing laboratory. Except as otherwise provided in the
Specifications, sampling and testing of all materials, and the laboratory methods and testing
equipment, shall be in accordance with the latest standards and tentative methods of the American
Society of Testing Materials (ASTM). The cost of testing which is in addition to the requirements of
the Specifications shall be paid by the Contractor if so directed by the Architect/Engineer, and the
Contract sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order ; provided however, that whenever
testing shows portions of the Work to be deficient, all costs of testing including that required to verify
the adequacy of repair or replacement work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
C.
TESTING - CONCRETE AND SOILS
Unless otherwise specified or provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Principal
Representative will contract for and pay for the testing of concrete and for soils compaction testing
through an independent laboratory or laboratories selected and approved by the Principal
Representative. The Contractor shall assume the responsibility of arranging, scheduling and
coordinating the concrete sample collection efforts and soils compaction efforts. Testing shall be
performed in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications, and if no requirements are
specified, the Contractor shall request instructions and testing shall be as directed by the
Architect/Engineer or the soils engineer, as applicable, and in accordance with standard industry
practices.
The Principal Representative and the Architect/Engineer shall be given reasonable advance notice of
each concrete pour and reserve the right to either increase or decrease the number of cylinders or the
frequency of tests.
Soil compaction testing shall be at random locations selected by the soils engineer. In general, soils
compaction testing shall be as directed by the soils engineer and shall include all substrate prior to
backfill or construction.
D.
TESTING - OTHER
Additional testing required by the Specifications will be accomplished and paid for by the Principal
Representative in a manner similar to that for concrete and soils unless noted otherwise in the
Specifications. In any case, the Contractor will be responsible for arranging, scheduling and
coordinating additional tests. Where the additional testing will be contracted and paid for by the
Principal Representative the Contractor shall give the Principal Representative not less than one
month advance written Notice of the date the first such test will be required.
ARTICLE 15.
SUBCONTRACTS
The Contractor shall, within twenty one (21) days after the date of the Notice of Award, submit to the
Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative and State Buildings Programs a preliminary list of
Subcontractors. It shall be as complete as possible at the time, showing all known Subcontractors planned
for the work. The list shall be supplemented as other Subcontractors are determined by the Contractor and
any such supplemental list shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative and
State Buildings Programs not less than ten (10) days before the Subcontractor commences work.
The Contractor’s list shall include those Subcontractors, if any, which the Contractor indicated in its bid
would be employed for specific portions of the Work if such indication was requested in the bid documents
issued by the State. The substitution of any Subcontractor listed in the Contractor’s bid shall be justified in
writing not less than ten (10) days after the date of the Notice of Award, and shall be subject to the approval
of the Principal Representative. For reasons such as the Subcontractor’s refusal to perform as agreed,
subsequent unavailability or later discovered bid errors, or other similar reasons, but not including the
availability of a lower Subcontract price, such substitution may be approved. The Contractor shall bear any
additional cost incurred by such substitutions.
The Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor that the Architect/Engineer, within seven (7) days after
the date of receipt of the Contractor’s list of Subcontractors or any supplemental list, objects to in writing as
being unacceptable to either the Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative or State Buildings
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
14
Programs. If a Subcontractor is deemed unacceptable, the Contractor shall propose a substitute
Subcontractor and the Contract sum shall be adjusted by any demonstrated difference between the
Subcontractor’s bids, except where the Subcontractor has been debarred by the State or fails to meet
qualifications of the Contract Documents to perform the work proposed.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the Principal Representative for the acts and omissions of
Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them. All instructions or orders in
respect to work to be done by Subcontractors shall be given to the Contractor.
ARTICLE 16.
RELATIONS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR
The Contractor agrees to bind each Subcontractor to the terms of these General Conditions and to the
requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, and any Addenda thereto, and also all the other Contract
Documents, so far as applicable to the work of such Subcontractor. The Contractor further agrees to bind
each Subcontractor to those terms of the General Conditions which expressly require that Subcontractors
also be bound, including without limitation, requirements that Subcontractors waive all rights of subrogation,
provide adequate general commercial liability and property insurance, automobile insurance and workers’
compensation insurance as provided in Article 25, Insurance.
Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be deemed to create any contractual relationship
whatsoever between any Subcontractor and the State of Colorado acting by and through its Principal
Representative.
ARTICLE 17.
MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS
Should the Contractor cause damage to any separate contractor on the work, the Contractor agrees, upon
due Notice, to settle with such contractor by agreement, if he or she will so settle. If such separate
contractor sues the Principal Representative on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained,
the Principal Representative shall notify the Contractor, who shall defend such proceedings if requested to
do so by Principal Representative. If any judgment against the Principal Representative arises there from,
the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and pay all costs and reasonable attorney fees incurred by the Principal
Representative, in accordance with Article 52C, Indemnification, provided the Contractor was given due
Notice of an opportunity to settle.
ARTICLE 18.
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
The Principal Representative reserves the right to enter into other contracts in connection with the Project or
the Contract. The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and
storage of their materials and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his or
her work with theirs. If any part of the Contractor’s work depends, for proper execution or results, upon the
work of any other contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Architect/Engineer any
defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the
Contractor to so inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and
proper for the reception of work, except as to defects which may develop in the other Contractor’s work after
the execution of the Contractor's work.
To insure the proper execution of subsequent work, the Contractor shall measure work already in place and
shall at once report to the Architect/Engineer any discrepancy between the executed work and the
Drawings.
ARTICLE 19.
USE OF PREMISES
The Contractor shall confine apparatus, the storage of materials and the operations of workmen to limits
indicated by law, ordinances, permits and any limits lines shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not
unreasonably encumber the premises with materials.
The Contractor shall enforce all of the Architect/Engineer’s instructions and prohibitions regarding, without
limitation, such matters as signs, advertisements, fires and smoking.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
15
ARTICLE 20.
CUTTING, FITTING OR PATCHING
The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of work that may be required to make its several parts
come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by work of other Contractors shown upon, or
reasonably inferred from, the Drawings and Specifications for the complete structure, and shall provide for
such finishes to patched or fitted work as the Architect/Engineer may direct. The Contractor shall not
endanger any work by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering the work and shall not cut or alter the work of
any other Contractor save with the consent of the Architect/Engineer.
ARTICLE 21.
UTILITIES
A.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Unless otherwise specifically stated in the Specifications or on the Drawings, the Principal
Representative shall be responsible for the locations of all utilities as shown on the Drawings or
indicated elsewhere in the Specifications, subject to the Contractor's compliance with all statutory or
regulatory requirements to call for utility locates. When actual conditions deviate from those shown the
Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Article 37, Differing Site Conditions. The Contractor
shall provide and pay for the installation of all temporary utilities required to supply all the power, light
and water needed by him and other Contractors for their Work and shall install and maintain all such
utilities in such manner as to protect the public and workmen and conform with any applicable laws
and regulations. Upon completion of the work, he or she shall remove all such temporary utilities from
the site. The Contractor shall pay for all consumption of power, light and water used by him or her and
the other Contractors, without regard to whether such items are metered by temporary or permanent
meters. The Superintendent shall have full authority over all trades and Subcontractors at any tier to
prevent waste. The cut-off date on permanent meters shall be either the agreed date of the date of the
Notice of Substantial Completion or the Notice of Approval of Occupancy/Use of the Project.
B.
PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES
Where existing utilities, such as water mains, sanitary sewers, storm sewers and electrical conduits,
are shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for the protection thereof, without
regard to whether any such utilities are to be relocated or removed as a part of the Work. If any
utilities are to be moved, the moving must be conducted in such manner as not to cause undue
interruption or delay in the operation of the same.
C.
CROSSING OF UTILITIES
When new construction crosses highways, railroads, streets, or utilities under the jurisdiction of State,
city or other public agency, public utility or private entity, the Contractor shall secure proper written
permission before executing such new construction. The Contractor will be required to furnish a
proper release before final acceptance of the Work.
ARTICLE 22.
UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall not work at any time, or permit any work to be done, under any conditions contrary to
those recommended by manufacturers or industry standards which are otherwise proper, unsuited for proper
execution, safety and performance. Any cost caused by ill-timed work shall be borne by the Contractor
unless the timing of such work shall have been directed by the Architect/Engineer or the Principal
Representative, after the award of the Contract, and the Contractor provided Notice of any additional cost.
ARTICLE 23.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
OFFICE FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide and maintain without additional expense for the duration of the Project
temporary office facilities, as required and as specified, for his or her own use and the use of the
Architect/Engineer, representatives of the Principal Representative and State Buildings Programs.
B.
TEMPORARY HEAT
The Contractor shall furnish and pay for all the labor, facilities, equipment, fuel and power necessary to
supply temporary heating, ventilating and air conditioning, except to the extent otherwise specified,
and shall be responsible for the installation, operation, maintenance and removal of such facilities and
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
16
equipment. Unless otherwise specified, the permanent HVAC system shall not be used for temporary
heat in whole or in part. If the Contractor desires to put the permanent system into use, in whole or in
part, the Contractor shall set it into operation and furnish the necessary fuel and manpower to safely
operate, protect and maintain that HVAC system. Any operation of all or any part of the permanent
HVAC system including operation for testing purposes shall not constitute acceptance of the system,
nor shall it relieve the Contractor of his or her one-year guarantee of the system from the date of the
Notice of Substantial Completion of the entire Project, and if necessary due to prior operation, the
Contractor shall provide manufacturers’ extended warranties from the date of the Contractor’s use
prior to the date of the Notice of Substantial Completion.
C.
WEATHER PROTECTION
The Contractor shall, at all times, provide protection against weather, so as to maintain all work,
materials, apparatus and fixtures free from injury or damages.
D.
DUST PARTITIONS
If the Work involves work in an occupied existing building, the Contractor shall erect and maintain
during the progress of the work, suitable dust-proof temporary partitions, or more permanent partitions
as specified, to protect such building and the occupants thereof.
E.
BENCH MARKS
The Contractor shall maintain any site bench marks provided by the Principal Representative and shall
establish any additional benchmarks specified by the Architect/Engineer as necessary for the
Contractor to layout the work and ascertain all grades and levels as needed.
F.
SIGN
The Contractor shall erect and permit one 4’ x 8’ sign only at the site to identify the Project as specified
or directed by the Architect/Engineer which shall be maintained in good condition during the life of the
Project.
G.
SANITARY PROVISION
The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable, clean, temporary sanitary toilet facilities for any
and all workmen engaged on the Work, for the entire construction period, in strict compliance with the
requirement of all applicable codes, regulations, laws and ordinances, and no other facilities, new or
existing, may be used by any person on the Project. When the Project is complete the Contractor shall
promptly remove them from the site, disinfect, and clean or treat the areas as required. If any new
construction surfaces in the Project other than the toilet facilities provided for herein are soiled at any
time, the entire areas so soiled shall be completely removed from the Project and rebuilt. In no event
may present toilet facilities of any existing building at the site of the work be used by employees of any
contractor.
ARTICLE 24.
CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall keep the building and premises free from all surplus material, waste material, dirt and
rubbish caused by employees or work, and at the completion of the Work shall remove all such surplus
material, waste material, dirt, and rubbish, as well as all tools, equipment and scaffolding, and shall wash
and clean all window glass and plumbing fixtures, perform cleanup and cleaning required by the
Specifications and leave all of the work clean unless more exact requirements are specified.
ARTICLE 25.
INSURANCE
A.
GENERAL
The Contractor shall procure and maintain all insurance requirements and limits as set forth below, at
his or her own expense, for the length of time set forth in Contract requirements. The Contractor shall
continue to provide evidence of such coverage to State of Colorado on an annual basis during the
aforementioned period including all of the terms of the insurance and indemnification requirements of
this agreement. All below insurance policies shall include a provision preventing cancellation without
thirty (30) days’ prior notice by certified mail. A completed Certificate of Insurance shall be filed with
the Principal Representative and State Buildings Programs within ten (10) days after the date of the
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
17
Notice of Award, said Certificate to specifically state the inclusion of the coverages and provisions set
forth herein and shall state whether the coverage is “claims made” or “per occurrence”.
B.
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE (CGL)
This insurance must protect the Contractor from all claims for bodily injury, including death and all
claims for destruction of or damage to property (other than the Work itself), arising out of or in
connection with any operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by the Contractor or
by any Subcontractor under him or anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor or by a
Subcontractor. All such insurance shall be written with limits and coverages as specified below and
shall be written on an occurrence form.
General Aggregate
Products – Completed Operations Aggregate
Each Occurrence
Personal Injury
$2,000,000
$2,000,000
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
The following coverages shall be included in the CGL:
1. Per project general aggregate (CG 25 03 or similar)
2. Additional Insured status in favor of the State of Colorado and any other parties as outlined in
The Contract and must include both ONGOING Operations AND COMPLETED Operations
per CG2010 10/01 and CG 2037 10/01 or equivalent as permitted by law.
3. The policy shall be endorsed to be primary and non-contributory with any insurance
maintained by Additional Insureds.
4. A waiver of Subrogation in favor of all Additional Insured parties.
5. Personal Injury Liability
6. Contractual Liability coverage to support indemnification obligation per Article 53.I
7. Explosion, collapse and underground (xcu)
The following exclusionary endorsements are prohibited in the CGL policy:
1. Damage to Work performed by Subcontract/Vendor (CG 22-94 or similar)
2. Contractual Liability Coverage Exclusion modifying or deleting the definition of an “insured
contract” from the unaltered SO CG 0001 1001 policy from (CG 24 26 or similar)
3. If applicable to the Work to be performed: Residential or multi-family
4. If applicable to the Work to be performed :Exterior insulation finish systems
5. If applicable to the Work to be performed: Subsidence or Earth Movement
The Contractor shall maintain general liability coverage including Products and Completed
Operations insurance, and the Additional Insured with primary and non-contributory coverage as
specified in this Contract for three (3) years after completion of the project.
C.
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE and business auto liability covering liability arising out of any
auto (including owned, hired and non-owned autos).
Combined Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability
(Combined Single Limit):
$1,000,000 each accident
Coverages:
Specific waiver of subrogation
D.
WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE
The Contractor shall procure and maintain Workers' Compensation Insurance at his or her own
expense during the life of this Contract, including occupational disease provisions for all employees
per statutory requirements. Policy shall contain a waiver of subrogation in favor of the State of
Colorado.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
18
The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor to furnish Workers' Compensation Insurance,
including occupational disease provisions for all of the latter’s employees, and to the extent not
furnished, the Contractor accepts full liability and responsibility for Subcontractor’s employees.
In cases where any class of employees engaged in hazardous work under this Contract at the site of
the Project is not protected under the Workers’ Compensation statute, the Contractor shall provide,
and shall cause each Subcontractor to provide, adequate and suitable insurance for the protection of
employees not otherwise protected.
E.
UMBRELLA LIABILITY INSURANCE (for construction projects exceeding $10,000,000, provide the
following coverage):
The Contractor shall maintain umbrella/excess liability insurance on an occurrence basis in excess of
the underlying insurance described in Section B-D above. Coverage shall follow the terms of the
underlying insurance, included the additional insured and waiver of subrogation provisions. The
amounts of insurance required in Sections above may be satisfied by the Contractor purchasing
coverage for the limits specified or by any combination of underlying and umbrella limits, so long as
the total amount of insurance is not less than the limits specified in each section previously mentioned.
Each occurrence
Aggregate
F.
$5,000,000
$5,000,000
BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE
Unless otherwise expressly stated in the Supplementary General Conditions (e.g. where the State
elects to provide for projects with a completed value of less than $1,000,000), the Contractor shall
purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the
jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s risk “all-risk” or
equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract
Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire
Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance
shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in
writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has
been made or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property,
or the Date of Notice specified on the Notice of Acceptance, State Form SBP-6.27 or whichever is
later.
This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors in the Project as named insureds.
All associated deductibles shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
deductible clause but not to exceed ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00).
Such policy may have a
Property insurance shall be on an “all risk” or equivalent policy form and shall include, without
limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage
including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake,
flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including
demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover
reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services and expenses required as a result
of such insured loss.
Contractor shall maintain Builders Risk coverage including partial use by Owner.
The Contractor shall waive all rights of subrogation as regards the State of Colorado and the Principal
Representative, its officials, its officers, its agents and its employees, all while acting within the scope
and course of their employment For damages caused by fire or thoer causes of loss to the extent
covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section or other property insurance applicable
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
19
to the Work. The Contractor shall require all Subcontractors at any tier to similarly waive all such
rights of subrogation and shall expressly include such a waiver in all subcontracts.
Upon request, the amount of such insurance shall be increased to include the cost of any additional
work to be done on the Project, or materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Project, under
other independent contracts let or to be let. In such event, the Contractor shall be reimbursed for this
cost as his or her share of the insurance in the same ratio as the ratio of the insurance represented by
such independent contracts let or to be let to the total insurance carried.
The Principal Representative, with approval of the State Controller, shall have the power to adjust and
settle any loss. Unless it is agreed otherwise, all monies received shall be applied first on rebuilding or
repairing the destroyed or injured work.
G.
POLLUTION LIABILITY INSURANCE
If Contractor is providing directly or indirectly work with pollution/environmental hazards, the
Contractor must provide or cause those conducting the work to provide Pollution Liability Insurance
coverage. Pollution Liability policy must include contractual liability coverage. State of Colorado must
be included as additional insureds on the policy. The policy limits shall be in the amount of
$1,000,000 with maximum deductible of $25,000 to be paid by the Subcontractor/Vendor.
H.
ADDITIONAL MISCELLANEOUS INSURANCE PROVISIONS
Certificates of Insurance and/or insurance policies required under this Contract shall be subject to the
following stipulations and additional requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Any and all deductibles or self-insured retentions contained in any Insurance policy shall be
assumed by and at the sole risk of the Contractor;
If any of the said policies shall fail at any time to meet the requirements of the Contract
Documents as to form or substance, or if a company issuing any such policy shall be or at any
time cease to be approved by the Division of Insurance of the State of Colorado, or be or cease
to be in compliance with any stricter requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall promptly obtain a new policy, submit the same to the Principal Representative and State
Building Programs for approval if requested, and submit a Certificate of Insurance as
hereinbefore provided. Upon failure of the Contractor to furnish, deliver and maintain such
insurance as provided herein, this Contract, in the sole discretion of the State of Colorado, may
be immediately declared suspended, discontinued, or terminated. Failure of the Contractor in
obtaining and/or maintaining any required insurance shall not relieve the Contractor from any
liability under the Contract, nor shall the insurance requirements be construed to conflict with
the obligations of the Contractor concerning indemnification;
All requisite insurance shall be obtained from financially responsible insurance companies,
authorized to do business in the State of Colorado and acceptable to the Principal
Representative;
Receipt, review or acceptance by the Principal Representative of any insurance policies or
certificates of insurance required by this Contract shall not be construed as a waiver or relieve
the Contractor from its obligation to meet the insurance requirements contained in these
General Conditions.
ARTICLE 26.
CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS
The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond on State Forms
SC-6.22, Performance Bond, and SC-6.221, Labor and Material Payment Bond, or such other forms as
State Buildings Programs may approve for the Project, executed by a corporate Surety authorized to do
business in the State of Colorado and in the full amount of the Contract sum. The expense of these bonds
shall be borne by the Contractor and the bonds shall be filed with State Buildings Programs.
If, at any time, a Surety on such a bond is found to be, or ceases to be in strict compliance with any
qualification requirements of the Contract Documents or the bid documents, or loses its right to do business
in the State of Colorado, another Surety will be required, which the Contractor shall furnish to State
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
20
Buildings Programs within ten (10) days after receipt of Notice from the State or after the Contractor
otherwise becomes aware of such conditions.
ARTICLE 27.
LABOR AND WAGES
In accordance with laws of Colorado, C.R.S. § 8-17-101, et. seq., as amended, Colorado labor shall be
employed to perform the work to the extent of not less than eighty percent (80%) of each type or class of
labor in the several classifications of skilled and common labor employed on the Project. If the Federal
Davis-Bacon Act shall be applicable to the Project, as indicated in Article 7B (Contractor’s Agreement 6.21),
Modification of Article 27, the minimum wage rates to be paid on the Project will be specified in the Contract
Documents.
ARTICLE 28.
ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that all rights to use of products and systems have been
properly arranged and shall take such action as may be necessary to avoid delay, at no additional charge to
the Principal Representative, where such right is challenged during the course of the work. The Contractor
shall pay all royalties and license fees required to be paid and shall defend all suits or claims for
infringement of any patent rights and shall save the State of Colorado harmless from loss on account
thereof, in accordance with Article 52C, Indemnification; provided, however, the Contractor shall not be
responsible for such loss or defense for any copyright violations contained in the Contract Documents
prepared by the Architect/Engineer or the Principal Representative of which the Contractor is unaware, or for
any patent violations based on specified processes that the Contractor is unaware are patented or that the
Contractor should not have had reason to believe were patented.
ARTICLE 29.
ASSIGNMENT
Except as otherwise provided hereafter the Contractor shall not assign the whole or any part of this Contract
without the written consent of the Principal Representative. This provision shall not be construed to prohibit
assignments of the right to payment to the extent permitted by C.R.S. § 4-9-406, et. seq., as amended,
provided that written Notice of assignment adequate to identify the rights assigned is received by the
Principal Representative and the controller for the agency, department, or institution executing this Contract
(as distinguished from the State Controller). Such assignment of the right to payment shall not be deemed
valid until receipt by the Principal Representative and such controller and the Contractor assumes the risk
that such written Notice of assignment is received by the Principal Representative and the controller for the
agency, department, or institution involved. In case the Contractor assigns all or part of any moneys due or
to become due under this Contract, the instrument of assignment shall contain a clause substantially to the
effect that it is agreed that the right of the assignee in and to any moneys due or to become due to the
Contractor shall be subject to all claims of all persons, firms, and corporations for services rendered or
materials supplied for the performance of the work called for in this Contract, whether said service or
materials were supplied prior to or after the assignment. Nothing in this Article shall be deemed a waiver of
any other defenses available to the State against the Contractor or the assignee.
ARTICLE 30.
CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE ACCEPTANCE
The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all work or materials condemned or declared
irreparably defective as failing to conform to the Contract Documents on receipt of written Notice from the
Architect/Engineer or the Principal Representative, whether incorporated in the Work or not. If such
materials shall have been incorporated in the Work, or if any unsatisfactory work is discovered, the
Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute his or her work in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents without expense to the Principal Representative, and shall also bear the expense of
making good all work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by the removal or replacement of such
defective material or work.
If the Contractor does not remove such condemned or irreparably defective work or material within a
reasonable time, the Principal Representative may, after giving a second seven (7) day advance Notice to
the Contractor and the Surety, remove them and may store the material at the Contractor’s expense. The
Principal Representative may accomplish the removal and replacement with its own forces or with another
Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of such removal and pay all storage charges within
ten (10) days thereafter, the Principal Representative may, upon ten (10) days’ written Notice, sell such
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
21
material at auction or at private sale and account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all costs and
expenses which should have been borne by the Contractor. If the Contractor shall commence and diligently
pursue such removal and replacement before the expiration of the seven day period, or if the Contractor
shall show good cause in conjunction with submittal of a revised CPM schedule showing when the work will
be performed and why such removal of condemned work should be scheduled for a later date, the Principal
Representative shall not proceed to remove or replace the condemned work.
Should any defective work or material be discovered during the process of construction, or should
reasonable doubt arise as to whether certain material or work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,
the value of such defective or questionable material or work shall not be included in any application for
payment, or if previously included, shall be deducted by the Architect/Engineer from the next application
submitted by the Contractor.
If the Contractor does not perform repair, correction and replacement of defective work, in lieu of proceeding
by issuance of a Notice of intent to remove condemned work as outlined above, the Principal Representative
may, not less than seven (7) days after giving the original written Notice of the need to repair, correct, or
replace defective work, deduct all costs and expenses of replacement or correction as instructed by the
Architect/Engineer from the Contractor’s next application for payment in addition to the value of the defective
work or material. The Principal Representative may also make an equitable deduction from the Contract
sum by unilateral Change Order, in accordance with Article 33, Payments Withheld and Article 35, Changes
In The Work.
If the Contractor disagrees with the Notice to remove work or materials condemned or declared irreparably
defective, the Contractor may request facilitated negotiation of the issue and the Principal Representative’s
right to proceed with removal and to deduct costs and expenses of repair shall be suspended and tolled until
such time as the parties meet and negotiate the issue
During construction, whenever the Architect/Engineer has advised the Contractor in writing, in the
Specifications, by reference to Article 6, Architect/Engineer Decisions And Judgments, of these General
Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract Documents of a need to observe materials in place prior to their
being permanently covered up, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to notify the Architect/Engineer at
least forty-eight (48) hours in advance of such covering operation. If the Contractor fails to provide such
notification, Contractor shall, at his or her expense, uncover such portions of the work as required by the
Architect/Engineer for observation, and reinstall such covering after observation. When a covering operation
is continued from day to day, notification of the commencement of a single continuing covering operation
shall suffice for the activity specified so long as it proceeds regularly and without interruption from day to
day, in which event the Contractor shall coordinate with the Architect/Engineer regarding the continuing
covering operation.
ARTICLE 31.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENTS
A.
CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTALS
On or before the first day of each month and no more than five days prior thereto, the Contractor may
submit applications for payment for the work performed during such month covering the portion of the
Work completed as of the date indicated, and payments on account of this Contract shall be due within
thirty (30) days after the last day of the period for which payment is requested. The Contractor shall
submit the application for payment to the Architect/Engineer on State forms SBP-7.2, Certificate for
Contractor's Payment, or such other format as the State Buildings Programs shall approve, in an
itemized format in accordance with the schedule of values or a cost loaded CPM when required,
supported to the extent reasonably required by the Architect/Engineer or the Principal Representative
by receipts or other vouchers, showing payments for materials and labor, prior payments and
payments to be made to Subcontractors and such other evidence of the Contractor’s right to payments
as the Architect/Engineer or Principal Representative may direct.
If payments are made on account of materials not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably
stored at the site, or at some other location agreed upon in writing, such payments shall be conditioned
upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedure as will establish the
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
22
Principal Representative’s title to such material or otherwise adequately protect the Principal
Representative’s interests, and shall provide proof of insurance whenever requested by the Principal
Representative or the Architect/Engineer, and shall be subject to the right to inspect the materials at
the request of either the Architect/Engineer or the Principal Representative.
All applications for payment, except the final application, and the payments there under, shall be
subject to correction in the next application rendered following the discovery of any error.
B.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER CERTIFICATION
In accordance with the Architect/Engineer’s agreement with the Principal Representative, the
Architect/Engineer after appropriate observation of the progress of the work shall certify to the
Principal Representative the amount that the Contractor is entitled to, and forward the application to
the Principal Representative. If the Architect/Engineer certifies an amount different from the amount
requested or otherwise alters the Contractor’s application for payment, a copy shall be forwarded to
the Contractor.
If the Architect/Engineer is unable to certify all or portions of the amount requested due to the absence
or lack of required supporting evidence, the Architect/Engineer shall advise the Contractor of the
deficiency. If the deficiency is not corrected at the end of ten (10) days, the Architect/Engineer may
either certify the remaining amounts properly supported to which the Contractor is entitled, or return
the application for payment to the Contractor for revision with a written explanation as to why it could
not be certified.
C.
RETAINAGE WITHHELD
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary General Conditions, an amount equivalent to five
percent (5%) of the amount shown to be due the Contractor on each application for payment shall be
withheld until the work required by the Contract has been performed. The withheld percentage of the
contract price of any such work, improvement, or construction shall be administered according to § 2491-101, et seq., C.R.S., as amended, and except as provided in § 24-91-103, C.R.S., as amended,
and Article 31D, shall be retained until the Work or discrete portions of the Work, have been completed
satisfactorily, finally or partially accepted, and advertised for final settlement as further provided in
Article 41.
D.
RELEASE OF RETAINAGE
The Contractor may, for satisfactory and substantial reasons shown to the Principal Representative’s
satisfaction, make a written request to the Principal Representative and the Architect/Engineer for
release of part or all of the withheld percentage applicable to the work of a Subcontractor which has
completed the subcontracted work in a manner finally acceptable to the Architect/Engineer, the
Contractor, and the Principal Representative. Any such request shall be supported by a written
approval from the Surety furnishing the Contractor’s bonds and any surety that has provided a bond for
the Subcontractor. The release of any such withheld percentage shall be further supported by such
other evidence as the Architect/Engineer or the Principal Representative may require, including but not
limited to, evidence of prior payments made to the Subcontractor, copies of the Subcontractor’s
contract with the Contractor, any applicable warranties, as-built information, maintenance manuals and
other customary close-out documentation. Neither the Principal Representative nor the Architect
Engineer shall be obligated to review such documentation nor shall they be deemed to assume any
obligations to third parties by any review undertaken.
The Contractor’s obligation under these General Conditions to guarantee work for one year from the
date of the Notice of Substantial Completion or the date of any Notice of Partial Substantial
Completion of the applicable portion or phase of the Project, shall be unaffected by such partial
release; unless a Notice of Partial Substantial Completion is issued for the work subject to the release
of retainage.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
23
Any rights of the Principal Representative which might be terminated by or from the date of any final
acceptance of the Work, whether at common law or by the terms of this Contract, shall not be affected
by such partial release of retainage prior to any final acceptance of the entire Project.
The Contractor remains fully responsible for the Subcontractor’s work and assumes any risk that might
arise by virtue of the partial release to the Subcontractor of the withheld percentage, including the risk
that the Subcontractor may not have fully paid for all materials, labor and equipment furnished to the
Project.
If the Principal Representative considers the Contractor’s request for such release satisfactory and
supported by substantial reasons, the Architect/Engineer shall make a “final inspection” of the
applicable portion of the Project to determine whether the Subcontractor ’s work has been completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents. A final punch list shall be made for the Subcontractor’s
work and the procedures of Article 41, Completion, Final Inspection, Acceptance and Settlement, shall
be followed for that portion of the work, except that advertisement of the intent to make final payment
to the Subcontractor shall be required only if the Principal Representative has reason to believe that a
supplier or Subcontractor to the Subcontractor for which the request is made, may not have been fully
paid for all labor and materials furnished to the Project.
ARTICLE 32.
CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENTS
State Form SBP-7.2, Certificate For Contractor's Payment, and its continuation detail sheets, when
submitted, shall constitute the Certificate of Contractor ’s Application for Payment, and shall be a
representation by the Contractor to the Principal Representative that the Work has progressed to the point
indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and materials for which
payment is requested have been incorporated into the Project except as noted in the application. If
requested by the Principal Representative the Certificate of Contractor’s Application for Payment shall be
sworn under oath and notarized.
ARTICLE 33.
PAYMENTS WITHHELD
The Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative or State Buildings Programs may withhold, or on
account of subsequently discovered evidence nullify, the whole or any part of any application on account of,
but not limited to any of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Defective work not remedied;
Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims;
Failure of the Contractor to make payments to Subcontractors for material or labor;
A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the contract price then
unpaid;
Damage or injury to another contractor or any other person, persons or property except to the extent of
coverage by a policy of insurance;
Failure to obtain necessary permits or licenses or to comply with applicable laws, ordinances, codes,
rules or regulations or the directions of the Architect/Engineer;
Failure to submit a monthly construction schedule;
Failure of the Contractor to keep work progressing in accordance with the time schedule;
Failure to keep a superintendent on the work;
Failure to maintain as built drawings of the work in progress;
Unauthorized deviations by the Contractor from the Contract Documents; or
On account of liquidated damages.
In addition, the Architect Engineer, Principal Representative or State Buildings Programs may withhold or
nullify the whole or any part of any application for any reason noted elsewhere in these General Conditions
of the Contract. Nullification shall mean reduction of amounts shown as previously paid on the application.
The amount withheld or nullified may be in such amount as the Architect/Engineer or the Principal
Representative estimates to be required to allow the State to accomplish the Work, cure the failure and
cover any damages or injuries, including an allowance for attorneys fees and costs where appropriate.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
24
When the grounds for such withholding or nullifying are removed, payment shall be made for the amounts
thus withheld or nullified on such grounds.
.
ARTICLE 34.
DEDUCTIONS FOR UNCORRECTED WORK
If the Architect/Engineer and the Principal Representative deem it inexpedient to correct work injured or not
performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Principal Representative may, after consultation
with the Architect/Engineer and ten (10) days’ Notice to the Contractor of intent to do so, make reasonable
reductions from the amounts otherwise due the Contractor on the next application for payment. Notice shall
specify the amount or terms of any contemplated reduction. The Contractor may during this period elect to
correct or perform the work. If the Contractor does not elect to correct or perform the work, an equitable
deduction from the Contract sum shall be made by Change Order, in accordance with Article 35, Changes In
The Work, unilaterally if necessary. If either party elects facilitation of this issue after Notice is given, the
ten-day notice period shall be extended and tolled until facilitation has occurred.
ARTICLE 35.
CHANGES IN THE WORK
The Principal Representative, or such other Procurement Officer as the Principal Representative may
designate, without invalidating the Agreement, and with the approval of State Buildings Programs and the
State Controller, may order extra work or make changes with or without the consent of the Contractor as
hereafter provided, by altering, adding to or deducting from the Work, the Contract sum being adjusted
accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be within the general scope of and be executed under the
conditions of the Contract, except that any claim for extension of time made necessary due to the change or
any claim of other delay or other impacts caused by or resulting from the change in the Work shall be
presented by the Contractor and adjusted by Change Order to the extent known at the time such change is
ordered and before proceeding with the extra or changed work. Any claims for extension of time or of delay
or other impacts, and any costs associated with extension of time, delay or other impacts, which are not
presented before proceeding with the change in the Work, and which are not adjusted by Change Order to
the extent known, shall be waived.
The Architect/Engineer shall have authority to make minor changes in the Work, not involving extra cost, and
not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents, but otherwise, except in an emergency
endangering life or property, no extra work or change in the Contract Documents shall be made unless by 1)
a written Change Order, approved by the Principal Representative, State Buildings Programs, and the State
Controller prior to proceeding with the changed work; or 2) by an Emergency Field Change Order approved
by the Principal Representative and State Buildings Programs as hereafter provided in Article 35C,
Emergency Field Ordered Changed Work; or 3) by an allocation in writing of any allowance already provided
in the encumbered contract amount, the Contract sum being later adjusted to decrease the Contract sum by
any unallocated or unexpended amounts remaining in such allowance. No change to the Contract sum shall
be valid unless so ordered.
A.
THE VALUE OF CHANGED WORK
1.
The value of any extra work or changes in the Work shall be determined by agreement in one
or more of the following ways:
a. By estimate and acceptance of a lump-sum amount;
b. By unit prices specified in the Agreement, or subsequently agreed upon, that are extended
by specific quantities;
c.
2.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
By actual cost plus a fixed fee in a lump sum amount for profit, overhead and all indirect
and off-site home office costs, the latter amount agreed upon in writing prior to starting the
extra or changed work.
Where the Contractor and the Principal Representative cannot agree on the value of extra
work, the Principal Representative may order the Contractor to perform the changes in the
Work and a Change Order may be unilaterally issued based on an estimate of the change in
the Work prepared by the Architect/Engineer. The value of the change in the Work shall be the
Principal Representative’s determination of the amount of equitable adjustment attributable to
the extra work or change. The Principal Representative’s determination shall be subject to
25
appeal by the Contractor pursuant to the claims process in Article 36, Claims. The Principal
Representative is the Procurement Officer for purposes of all of the remedies provisions of the
Contract.
3.
B.
Except as otherwise provided in Article 35B, Detailed Breakdown, below, the Cost Principles of
the Colorado Procurement Rules in effect on the date of this Contract, pursuant to § 24-107101, C.R.S., as amended, shall govern all Contract changes.
DETAILED BREAKDOWN
In all cases where the value of the extra or changed work is not known based on unit prices in the
Contractor ’s bid or the Agreement, a detailed change proposal shall be submitted by the Contractor
on a Change Order Proposal (SC-6.312), or in such other format as the State Buildings Program
approves, with which the Principal Representative may require an itemized list of materials, equipment
and labor, indicating quantities, time and cost for completion of the changed work.
Such detailed change proposals shall be stated in lump sum amounts and shall be supported by a
separate breakdown, which shall include estimates of all or part of the following when requested by the
Architect/Engineer or the Principal Representative:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
Materials, indicating quantities and unit prices including taxes and delivery costs if any
(separated where appropriate into general, mechanical and electrical and/or other
Subcontractors’ work; and the Principal Representative may require in its discretion any
significant subcontract costs to be similarly and separately broken down).
Labor costs, indicating hourly rates and time and labor burden to include Social Security and
other payroll taxes such as unemployment, benefits and other customary burdens.
Costs of project management time and superintendence time of personnel stationed at the site,
and other field supervision time, but only where a time extension, other than a weather delay, is
approved as part of the Change Order, and only where such project management time and
superintendence time is directly attributable to and required by the change; provided however
that additional cost of on-site superintendence shall be allowable whenever in the opinion of
the Architect/Engineer the impact of multiple change requests to be concurrently performed will
result in inadequate levels of supervision to assure a proper result unless additional
superintendence is provided.
Construction equipment (including small tools). Expenses for equipment and fuel shall be
based on customary commercially reasonable rental rates and schedules. Equipment and
hand tool costs shall not include the cost of items customarily owned by workers.
Workers’ compensation costs, if not included in labor burden.
The cost of commercial general liability and property damage insurance premiums but only to
the extent charged the Contractor as a result of the changed work.
Overhead and profit, as hereafter specified.
Builder’s risk insurance premium costs.
Bond premium costs.
Testing costs not otherwise excluded by these General Conditions.
Subcontract costs.
26
Unless modified in the Supplementary General Conditions, overhead and profit shall not exceed the
percentages set forth in the table below.
OVERHEAD
To the Contractor or to Subcontractors
for the portion of work performed
with their own forces:
10%
To the Contractor or to Subcontractors
for work performed by others at a tier
immediately below either of them:
5%
PROFIT
COMMISSION
5%
5%
Overhead shall include: a) insurance premium for policies not purchased for the Project and itemized
above, b) home office costs for office management, administrative and supervisory personnel and
assistants, c) estimating and change order preparation costs, d) incidental job burdens, e) legal costs,
f) data processing costs, g) interest costs on capital, h) general office expenses except those
attributable to increased rental expenses for temporary facilities, and all other indirect costs, but shall
not include the Social Security tax and other direct labor burdens. The term “work” as used in the
proceeding table shall include labor, materials and equipment and the "Commission" shall include all
costs and profit for carrying the subcontracted work at the tiers below except direct costs as listed in
items 1 through 11 above if any.
On proposals for work involving both additions and credits in the amount of the Contract sum, the
overhead and profit will be allowed on the net increase only. On proposals resulting in a net deduct to
the amount of the Contract sum, profit on the deducted amount shall be returned to the Principal
Representative at fifty percent (50%) of the rate specified. The inadequacy of the profit specified shall
not be a basis for refusal to submit a proposal.
Except in the case of Change Orders or Emergency Field Change Orders agreed to on the basis of a
lump sum amount or unit prices as described in paragraphs 35A1 and 35A2 above, The Value of
Changed Work, the Contractor shall keep and present a correct and fully auditable account of the
several items of cost, together with vouchers, receipts, time cards and other proof of costs incurred,
summarized on a Change Order form (SC-6.31) using such format for supporting documentation as
the Principal Representative and State Buildings Programs approve. This requirement applies equally
to work done by Subcontractors. Only auditable costs shall be reimbursable on Change Orders where
the value is determined on the basis of actual cost plus a fixed fee pursuant to paragraph 35A3 above,
or where unilaterally determined by the Principal Representative on the basis of an equitable
adjustment in accordance with the Procurement Rules, as described above in Article 35A, The Value
Of Changed Work.
Except for proposals for work involving both additions and credits, changed work shall be adjusted and
considered separately for work either added or omitted. The amount of adjustment for work omitted
shall be estimated at the time it is directed to be omitted, and when reasonable to do so, the agreed
adjustment shall be reflected on the schedule of values used for the next Contractor ’s application for
payment.
The Principal Representative reserves the right to contract with any person or firm other than the
Contractor for any or all extra work; however, unless specifically required in the Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall have no responsibility without additional compensation to supervise or coordinate
the work of persons or firms separately contracted by the Principal Representative.
C.
EMERGENCY FIELD CHANGE ORDERED WORK
The Principal Representative, without invalidating the Agreement, and with the approval of State
Buildings Programs and without the approval of the State Controller, may order extra work or make
changes in the case of an emergency that is a threat to life or property or where the likelihood of
delays in processing a normal Change Order will result in substantial delays and or significant cost
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
27
increases for the Project. Emergency Field Orders are not to be used solely to expedite normal
Change Order processing absent a clear showing of a high potential for significant and substantial cost
or delay. Such changes in the Work may be directed through issuance of an Emergency Field Change
Order signed by the Contractor, the Principal Representative (or by a designee specifically appointed
to do so in writing), and approved by the Director of State Buildings Program or his or her delegate.
The change shall be directed using an Emergency Field Change Order form (SC-6.31E).
If the amount of the adjustment of the Contract price and time for completion can be determined at the
time of issuance of the Emergency Field Change Order, those adjustments shall be reflected on the
face of the Emergency Field Change Order. Otherwise, the Emergency Field Change Order shall
reflect a not to exceed (NTE) amount for any schedule adjustment (increasing or decreasing the time
for completion) and an NTE amount for any adjustment to Contract sum, which NTE amount shall
represent the maximum amount of adjustment to which the Contractor will be entitled, including direct
and indirect costs of changed work, as well as any direct or indirect costs attributable to delays,
inefficiencies or other impacts arising out of the change. Emergency Field Change Orders directed in
accordance with this provision need not bear the approval signatures of the State Controller.
On Emergency Field Change Orders where the price and schedule have not been finally determined,
the Contractor shall submit final costs for adjustment as soon as practicable. No later than seven (7)
days after issuance, except as otherwise permitted, and every seven days thereafter, the Contractor
shall report all costs to the Principal Representative and the Architect/Engineer. The final adjustment
of the Emergency Field Change Order amount and the adjustment to the Project time for completion
shall be prepared on a normal Change Order from (SC-6.31) in accordance with the procedures
described in Article 35A, The Value of Changed Work, and B, Detailed Breakdown, above. Unless
otherwise provided in writing signed by the Director of State Buildings Programs to the Principal
Representative and the Contractor, describing the extent and limits of any greater authority, individual
Emergency Field Change Orders shall not be issued for more than $25,000, nor shall the cumulative
value of Emergency Field Change Orders exceed an amount of $100,000.
D.
APPROPRIATION LIMITATIONS - § 24-91-103.6, C.R.S., as amended
The amount of money appropriated, as shown on the Agreement (SC 6.21), is equal to or in excess of
the Contract amount. No Change Order, Emergency Field Change Order, or other type of order or
directive shall be issued by the Principal Representative, or any agent acting on his or her behalf,
which directs additional compensable work to be performed, which work causes the aggregate amount
payable under the Contract to exceed the amount appropriated for the original Contract, as shown on
the Agreement (SC-6.21), unless one of the following occurs: (1) the Contractor is provided written
assurance from the Principal Representative that sufficient additional lawful appropriations exist to
cover the cost of the additional work; or (2) the work is covered by a contractor remedy provision
under the Contract, such as a claim for extra cost. By way of example only, no assurance is required
for any order, directive or instruction by the Architect/Engineer or the Principal Representative to
perform work which is determined to be within the performance required by the Contract Documents;
the Contractor’s remedy shall be as described elsewhere in these General Conditions.
Written assurance shall be in the form of an Amendment to the Contract reciting the source and
amount of such appropriation available for the Project. No remedy granting provision of this Contract
shall obligate the Principal Representative to seek appropriations to cover costs in excess of the
amounts recited as available to pay for the work to be performed.
ARTICLE 36.
CLAIMS
It is the intent of these General Conditions to provide procedures for speedy and timely resolution of
disagreements and disputes at the lowest level possible. In the spirit of on the job resolution of job site
issues, the parties are encouraged to use the partnering processes of Article 2D, Partnering,
Communications and Cooperation, before turning to the more formal claims processes described in this
Article 36, Claims. The use of non-binding dispute resolution, whether through the formal processes
described in Article 39, Non-Binding Dispute Resolution – Facilitated Negotiations, or through less formal
alternative processes developed as part of a partnering plan, are also encouraged. Where such process
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
28
cannot resolve the issues in dispute, the claims process that follows is intended to cause the issues to be
presented, decided and where necessary, documented in close proximity to the events from which the
issues arise. To that end, and in summary of the remedy granting process that follows commencing with the
next paragraph of this Article 36, Claims, the Contractor shall 1) first, seek a decision by the
Architect/Engineer, and 2) shall second, informally present the claim to Principal Representative as
described hereafter, and 3) failing resolution in the field, give Notice of intent to exercise statutory rights of
review of a formal contract controversy, and 4) seek resolution outside the Contract as provided by the
Procurement Code.
If the Contractor claims that any instructions, by detailed drawings, or otherwise, or any other act or omission
of the Architect/Engineer or Principal Representative affecting the scope of the Contractor’s work, involve
extra cost, extra time or changes in the scope of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall have the
right to assert a claim for such costs or time, provided that before either proceeding to execute such work
(except in an emergency endangering life or property), or filing a Notice of claim, the Contractor shall have
obtained or requested a written decision of the Architect/Engineer following the procedures as provided in
Article 6A and B, Architect/Engineer Decisions and Judgments, respectively; provided, however, that in the
case of a directed change in the Work pursuant to Article 36A4, no written judgment or decision of the
Architect/Engineer is required. If the Contractor is delayed by the lack of a response to a request for a
decision by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall give Notice in accordance with Article 38, Delays
And Extensions Of Time.
Unless it is the Architect/Engineer’s judgment and determination that the work is not included in the
performance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall proceed with the work as originally
directed. Where the Contractor’s claim involves a dispute concerning the value of work unilaterally directed
pursuant to Article 35A3 the Contractor shall also proceed with the work as originally directed while his or
her claim is being considered.
The Contractor shall give the Principal Representative and the Architect/Engineer Notice of any claim
promptly after the receipt of the Architect/Engineer’s decision, but in no case later than three (3) business
days after receipt of the Architect/Engineer’s decision (or no later than ten (10) days from the date of the
Contractor's request for a decision when the Architect/Engineer fails to decide as provided in Article 6). The
Notice of claim shall state the grounds for the claim and the amount of the claim to the extent known in
accordance with the procedures of Article 35, Changes In The Work. The period in which Notice must be
given may be extended by the Principal Representative if requested in writing by the Contractor with good
cause shown, but any such extension to be effective shall be in writing.
The Principal Representative shall respond in writing, with a copy to the Architect/Engineer, within a
reasonable time, and except where a request for facilitation of negotiation has been made as hereafter
provided, in no case later than seven (7) business days (or at such other time as the Contractor and
Principal Representative agree) after receipt of the Contractor’s Notice of claim regarding such instructions
or alleged act or omission. If no response to the Contractor’s claim is received within seven (7) business
days of Contractor's Notice (or at such other time as the Contractor and Principal Representative agree) and
the instructions have not been retracted, it shall be deemed that the Principal Representative has denied the
claim.
The Principal Representative may grant or deny the claim in whole or in part, and a Change Order shall be
issued if the claim is granted. To the extent any portion of claim is granted where costs are not clearly
shown, the Principal Representative may direct that the value of that portion of the work be determined by
any method allowed in Article 35A, The Value of Changed Work. Except in the case of a deemed denial, the
Principal Representative shall provide a written explanation regarding any portion of the Contractor's claim
that is denied.
If the Contractor disagrees with the Principal Representative’s judgment and determination on the claim and
seeks an equitable adjustment of the Contract sum or time for performance, he or she shall give Notice of
intent to exercise his or her statutory right to seek a decision on the contract controversy within ten (10) days
of receipt of the Principal Representative’s decision denying the claim. A “contract controversy," as such
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
29
term is used in the Colorado Procurement Code, § 24-109-106, C.R.S., shall not arise until the initial claim
process described above in this Article 36 has been properly exhausted by the Contractor. The Contractor's
failure to proceed with work directed by the Architect/Engineer or to exhaust the claim process provided
above in this Article 36, shall constitute an abandonment of the claim by the Contractor and a waiver of the
right to contest the decision in any forum.
At the time of filing the Notice of intent to exercise his or her statutory right to seek a decision on the contract
controversy, the Contractor may request that the Principal Representative defer a decision on the contract
controversy until a later date or until the end of the Project. If the Principal Representative agrees, he or she
shall so advise the Contractor in writing. If no such request is made, or if the Principal Representative does
not agree to such a request, the Principal Representative shall render a written decision within twenty (20)
business days and advise the Contractor of the reasons for any denial. Unless the claim has been decided
by the Principal Representative (as opposed to delegates of the Principal Representative), the person who
renders the decision on this statutory contract controversy shall not be the same person who decided the
claim. To the extent any portion of the contract controversy is granted where costs are not clearly shown,
the Principal Representative may direct that the value of that portion of the work be determined by any
method allowed in Article 35A, The Value of Changed Work. In the event of a denial the Principal
Representative shall give Notice to the Contractor of his or her right to administrative and judicial reviews as
provided in the Colorado Procurement Code, § 24-109-201 et seq, C.R.S., as amended. If no decision
regarding the contract controversy is issued within twenty (20) business days of the Contractor's giving
Notice (or such other date as the Contractor and Principal Representative have agreed), and the instructions
have not been retracted or the alleged act or omission have not been corrected, it shall be deemed that the
Principal Representative has ruled by denial on the contract controversy. Except in the case of a deemed
denial, the Principal Representative shall provide an explanation regarding any portion of the contract
controversy that involves denial of the Contractor’s claim.
Either the Contractor or the Principal Representative may request facilitation of negotiations concerning the
claim or the contract controversy, and if requested, the parties shall consult and negotiate before the
Principal Representative decides the issue. Any request for facilitation by the Contractor shall be made at
the time of the giving of Notice of the claim or Notice of the contract controversy. Facilitation shall extend
the time for the Principal Representative to respond by commencing the applicable period at the completion
of the facilitated negotiation, which shall be the last day of the parties’ meeting, unless otherwise agreed in
writing.
Disagreement with the decision of the Architect Engineer, or the decision of the Principal Representative to
deny any claim or denying the contract controversy, shall not be grounds for the Contractor to refuse to
perform the work directed or to suspend or terminate performance. During the period that any claim or
contract controversy decision is pending under this Article 36, Claims, the Contractor shall proceed diligently
with the work directed.
In all cases where the Contractor proceeds with the work and seeks equitable adjustment by filing a claim
and or statutory appeal, the Contractor shall keep a correct account of the extra cost, in accordance with
Article 35B, Detailed Breakdown supported by receipts. The Principal Representative shall be entitled to
reject any claim or contract controversy whenever the foregoing procedures are not followed and such
accounts and receipts are not presented.
The payments to the Contractor in respect of such extra costs shall be limited to reimbursement for the
current additional expenditure by the Contractor made necessary by the change in the work, plus a
reasonable amount for overhead and profit, determined in accordance with Article 35B, Detailed Breakdown,
determined solely with reference to the additional work, if any, required by the change.
ARTICLE 37.
DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS
A.
NOTICE IN WRITING
The Contractor shall promptly, and where possible before conditions are disturbed, give the
Architect/Engineer and the Principal Representative Notice in writing of:
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
30
1.
2.
subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing materially from those indicated in or
reasonably assumed from the information provided in the Contract Documents; and,
unknown physical conditions at the site, of an unusual nature, differing materially from those
ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided
for in the Contract Documents.
The Architect/Engineer shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it is found that such conditions
do materially so differ and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor ’s costs of performance of
any part of the work required by the Contract Documents, whether or not such work is changed as a
result of such conditions, an equitable adjustment shall be made and the Contract sum shall be
modified in accordance with Article 35, Changes In The Work.
If the time required for completion of the work affected by such materially differing conditions will
extend the work on the critical path as indicated on the CPM schedule, the time for completion shall
also be equitably adjusted.
B.
LIMITATIONS
No claim of the Contractor under this clause shall be allowed unless the Contractor has given the Notice
required in Article 37A, Notice In Writing, above. The time prescribed for presentation and adjustment in
Articles 36, Claims and 38, Delays And Extensions Of Time, shall be reasonably extended by the State to
the extent required by the nature of the differing conditions; provided, however, that even when so extended
no claim by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment hereunder shall be allowed if not quantified and
presented prior to the date the Contractor requests a final inspection pursuant to Article 41A, Notice Of
Completion.
ARTICLE 38.
DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the State of
Colorado or the Architect/Engineer, or of any employee or agent of either, or by any separately employed
Contractor or by strikes, lockouts, fire, unusual delay in transportation, unavoidable casualties or any other
causes beyond the Contractor’s control, including weather delays as defined below, the time of Completion
of the Work shall be extended for a period equal to such portion of the period of delays directly affecting the
completion of the Work as the Contractor shall be able to show he or she could not have avoided by the
exercise of due diligence.
The Contractor shall provide Notice in writing to the Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative and
State Buildings Programs within three (3) business days from the beginning of such delay and shall file a
written claim for an extension of time within seven (7) business days after the period of such delay has
ceased, otherwise, any claim for an extension of time is waived.
Provided that the Contractor has submitted reasonable schedules for approval when required by Article 12,
Requests for Information and Schedules, if no schedule is agreed to fixing the dates on which the responses
to requests for information or detail drawings will be needed, or Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples
are to be reviewed as required or allowed by Article 12B, Schedules, no extension of time will be allowed for
the Architect/ Engineer’s failure to furnish such detail drawings as needed, or for the failure to initially review
Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, except in respect of that part of any delay in furnishing detail
drawings or instructions extending beyond a reasonable period after written demand for such detailed
drawings or instructions is received by the Architect/Engineer. In any event, any claim for an extension of
time for such cause will be recognized only to the extent of delay directly caused by failure to furnish detail
drawings or instructions or to review Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples pursuant to schedule, after
such demand.
All claims for extension of time due to a delay claimed to arise or result from ordered changes in the scope
of the Work, or due to instructions claimed to increase the scope of the Work, shall be presented to the
Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative and State Buildings Programs as part of a claim for extra
cost, if any, in accordance with Article 36, Claims, and in accordance with the Change Order procedures
required by Article 35, Changes In The Work.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
31
Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph, no extension of time shall be granted when the Contractor
has failed to utilize a CPM schedule or otherwise identify the Project’s critical path as specified in Article 12,
Requests for Information and Schedules, or has elected not to do so when allowed by the Supplementary
General Conditions or the Specifications to use less sophisticated scheduling tools, or has failed to maintain
such a schedule. Delay directly affecting the completion of the Work shall result in an extension of time only
to the extent that completion of the Work was affected by impacts to the critical path shown on Contractor’s
CPM schedule. Where the circumstances make it indisputable in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer that
the delay affected the completion of the Work so directly that the additional notice of the schedule impact by
reference to a CPM schedule was unnecessary, a reasonable extension of time may be granted.
Extension of the time for completion of the Work will be granted for delays due to weather conditions only
when the Contractor demonstrates that such conditions were more severe and extended than those
reflected by the ten-year average for the month, as evidenced by the Climatological Data, U. S. Department
of Commerce, for the Project area.
Extensions of the time for completion of the Work due to weather will be granted on the basis of one and
three tenths (1.3) calendar days for every day that the Contractor would have worked but was unable to
work, with each separate extension figured to the nearest whole calendar day.
For weather delays and delays caused by events, acts or omissions not within the control of the Principal
Representative or any person acting on the Principal Representative’s behalf, the Contractor shall be
entitled to an extension of time only and shall not be entitled to recovery of additional cost due to or resulting
from such delays. This Article does not, however, preclude the recovery of damages for delay by either
party under other provisions in the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 39.
NON-BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION – FACILITATED NEGOTIATIONS
The Contractor and Principal Representative agree to designate one or more mutually acceptable persons
willing and able to facilitate negotiations and communications for the resolution of conflicts, disagreements
or disputes between them at the specific request of either party with regard to any Project decision of either
of them or any decision of the Architect/Engineer. The designation of such person(s) shall not carry any
obligation to use their services except that each party agrees that if the other party requests the intervention
of such person(s) with respect to any such conflict, dispute or disagreement, the non-requesting party shall
participate in good faith attempts to negotiate a resolution of the issue in dispute. If the parties cannot agree
on a mutually acceptable person to serve in this capacity one shall be so appointed; provided, however, that
either party may request the director of State Buildings Programs to appoint such a person, who, if
appointed, shall be accepted for this purpose by both the Contractor and the Principal Representative.
The cost, if any, of the facilitative services of the person(s) so designated shall be shared if the parties so
agree in any partnering plan; or in the absence of agreement the cost shall be borne by the party requesting
the facilitation of negotiation.
Any dispute, claim, question or disagreement arising from or relating to the Contract or an alleged breach of
the Contract may be subject to a request by either party for facilitated negotiation subject to the limitations
hereafter listed, and the parties shall participate by consultation and negotiation with each other, as guided
by the facilitator and with recognition of their mutual interests, in an attempt to reach an equitable solution
satisfactory to both parties.
The obligation to participate in facilitated negotiations shall be as described above and elsewhere in these
General Conditions, as by way of example in Article 36, Claims, or Article 34, Deductions for Uncorrected
Work, and to the extent not more particularly described or limited elsewhere, each party’s obligations shall
be as follows:
1.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
a party shall not initiate communication with the facilitator regarding the issues in dispute;
except that any request for facilitation shall be made in writing with copies sent, faxed or
delivered to the other party;
32
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
a party shall prepare a brief written description of its position if so requested by the facilitator
(who may elect to first discuss the parties’ positions with each party separately in the interest of
time and expense);
a party shall respond to any reasonable request for copies of documents requested by the
facilitator, but such requests, if voluminous, may consist of an offer to allow the facilitator
access to the parties’ documents;
a party shall review any meeting agenda proposed by a facilitator and endeavor to be informed
on the subjects to be discussed;
a party shall meet with the other party and the facilitator at a mutually acceptable place and
time, or, if none can be agreed to, at the time and place designated by the facilitator for a
period not to exceed four hours unless the parties agree to a longer period;
a party shall endeavor to assure that any facilitation meeting shall be attended by any other
persons in their employ that the facilitator requests be present, if reasonably available,
including the Architect/Engineer;
each party shall participate in such facilitated face-to-face negotiations of the issues in dispute
through persons fully authorized to resolve the issue in dispute;
each party shall be obligated to participate in negotiations requested by the other party and to
perform the specific obligations described in paragraphs (1) through (10) this Article 39,
Facilitated Negotiation, no more than three times during the course of the Project;
neither party shall be under any obligation to resolve any issue by facilitated negotiation, but
each agrees to participate in good faith and the Principal Representative shall direct the
Architect/Engineer to appropriately document any resolution or agreement reached and to
execute any Amendment or Change Order to the Contract necessary to implement their
agreement; and,
any discussions and documents prepared exclusively for use in the negotiations shall be
deemed to be matters pertaining to settlement negotiations and shall not be subsequently
available in further proceedings except to the extent of any documented agreement.
In accordance with State Fiscal Rules and Article 52F, Choice of Law; No Arbitration, nothing in this Article
39 shall be deemed to call for arbitration or otherwise obligate the State to participate in any form of binding
alternative dispute resolution.
A partnering plan developed as described in Article 2D, Communications and Cooperation, may modify or
expand the requirements of this Article but may not reduce the obligation to participate in facilitated
negotiations when applicable. In the case of small projects estimated to be valued under $500,000, the
requirements of this Article may be deleted from this Contract, by modification in Article 7 (Contractor’s
Agreement SC-6.21), Optional Provisions And Elections. When so modified, the references to the parties’
right to elect facilitated negotiation elsewhere in these General Conditions shall be deleted.
ARTICLE 40.
RIGHT OF OCCUPANCY
The Principal Representative shall have the right to take possession of and to use any completed or partially
completed portions of the Work, even if the time for completing the entire Work or portions of the Work has
not expired and even if the Work has not been finally accepted, and the Contractor shall fully cooperate with
the Principal Representative to allow such possession and use. Such possession and use shall not
constitute an acceptance of such portions of the Work.
Prior to any occupancy of the Project, an inspection shall be made by the Principal Representative, State
Buildings Programs and the Contractor. Such inspection shall be made for the purpose of ensuring that the
building is secure, protected by operation safety systems as designed, operable exits, power, lighting and
HVAC systems, and otherwise ready for the occupancy intended and the Notice of Substantial Completion
has been issued for the occupancy intended. The inspection shall also document existing finish conditions
to allow assessment of any damage by occupants. The Contractor shall assist the Principal Representative
in completing and executing State Form SBP-01, Approval of Occupancy/Use, prior to the Principal
Representative’s possession and use. Any and all areas so occupied will be subject to a final inspection
when the Contractor complies with Article 41, Completion, Final Inspection, Acceptance and Settlement.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
33
ARTICLE 41.
COMPLETION, FINAL INSPECTION, ACCEPTANCE AND SETTLEMENT
A.
NOTICE OF COMPLETION
When the Work, or a discrete physical portion of the Work (as hereafter described) which the Principal
Representative has agreed to accept separately, is substantially complete and ready for final
inspection, the Contractor shall file a written Notice with the Architect/Engineer that the Work, or such
discrete physical portion, in the opinion of the Contractor, is substantially complete under the terms of
the Contract. The Contractor shall prepare and submit with such Notice a comprehensive list of items
to be completed or corrected prior to final payment, which shall be subject to review and additions as
the Architect/Engineer or the Principal Representative shall determine after inspection. If the
Architect/Engineer or the Principal Representative believe that any of the items on the list of items
submitted, or any other item of work to be corrected or completed, or the cumulative number of items
of work to be corrected or completed, will prevent a determination that the Work is substantially
complete, those items shall be completed by the Contractor and the Notice shall then be resubmitted.
B.
FINAL INSPECTION
Within ten (10) days after the Contractor files written Notice that the Work is substantially complete, the
Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative, and the Contractor shall make a “final inspection” of
the Project to determine whether the Work is substantially complete and has been completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents. State Buildings Programs shall be notified of the inspection
not less than three (3) business days in advance of the inspection. The Contractor shall provide the
Principal Representative and the Architect/Engineer an updated punch list in sufficient detail to fully
outline the following:
1.
2.
work to be completed, if any; and
work not in compliance with the Drawings or Specifications, if any.
A final punch list shall be made by the Architect/Engineer in sufficient detail to fully outline to the
Contractor:
1.
2.
3.
work to be completed, if any;
work not in compliance with the Drawings or Specifications, if any; and
unsatisfactory work for any reason, if any.
The required number of copies of the final punch list will be countersigned by the authorized
representative of the Principal Representative and will then be transmitted by the Architect/Engineer to
the Contractor, the Principal Representative, and State Buildings Programs. The Architect/Engineer's
final punch list shall control over the Contractor's preliminary punch list.
C.
NOTICE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Notice of Substantial Completion shall establish the date of substantial completion of the Project. The
Contractor acknowledges and agrees that because the departments, agencies and institutions of the
State of Colorado are generally involved with the business of the public at large, greater care must be
taken in establishing the date of substantial completion than might otherwise be the case to ensure
that a project or building or discrete physical portion of the Work is fully usable and safe for public use,
and that such care necessarily raises the standard by which the concept of substantial completion is
applied for a public building.
The Notice of Substantial Completion shall not be issued until the following have been fully
established:
1.
2.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
All required building code inspections have been called for and the appropriate code officials
have affixed their signatures to the Building Inspection Record indicating successful completion
of all required code inspections;
All required corrections noted on the Building Inspection Record shall have been completed
unless the Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative and State Buildings Programs, in
their complete and absolute discretion, all concur that the condition requiring the remaining
34
3.
4.
5.
correction is not in any way life threatening, does not otherwise endanger persons or property,
and does not result in any undue inconvenience or hardship to the Principal Representative or
the public;
The building, structure or Project can be fully and comfortably used by the Principal
Representative and the public without undue interference by the Contractor’s employees and
workers during the completion of the final punch list taking into consideration the nature of the
public uses intended and taking into consideration any stage or level of completion of HVAC
system commissioning or other system testing required by the Specifications to be completed
prior to issuance of the Notice of Substantial Completion;
The Project has been fully cleaned as required by these General Conditions, and as required
by any stricter requirements of the Specifications, and the overall state of completion is
appropriate for presentation to the public; and
The Contractor has provided a schedule for the completion of each and every item identified on
the punch list which specifies the Subcontractor or trade responsible for the work, and the
dates the completion or correction of the item will be commenced and finished; such schedule
will show completion of all remaining final punch list items within the period indicated in the
Contract for final punch list completion prior to Final Acceptance, with the exception of only
those items which are beyond the control of the Contractor despite due diligence. The
schedule shall provide for a reasonable punch list inspection process. Unless liquidated
damages have been specified in Article 7D(2) (Contractor’s Agreement SC-6.21), the cost to
the Principal Representative, if any, for re-inspections due to failure to adhere to the
Contractor’s proposed punch-list completion schedule shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and may be deducted by the Principal Representative from final amounts due to the
Contractor.
Substantial completion of the entire Project shall not be conclusively established by a decision by the
Principal Representative to take possession and use of a portion, or all of the Project, where portions
of the Project cannot meet all the criteria noted above. Notice of Substantial Completion for the entire
Project shall, however, only be withheld for substantial reasons when the Principal Representative has
taken possession and uses all of the Project in accordance with the terms of Article 40, Right Of
Occupancy. Failure to furnish the required completion schedule shall constitute a substantial reason
for withholding the issuance of any Notice of Substantial Completion.
The Contractor shall have the right to request a final inspection of any discrete physical portion of the
Project when in the opinion of the Principal Representative, The Architect/Engineer and State
Buildings Programs a final punch list can be reasonably prepared, without confusion as to which
portions of the Project are referred to in any subsequent Notice of Partial Final Settlement which might
be issued after such portion is finally accepted. Discrete physical portions of the Project may be, but
shall not necessarily be limited to, such portions of the Project as separate buildings where a Project
consists of multiple buildings. Similarly, an addition to an existing building where the Project also calls
for renovation or remodeling of the existing building may constitute a discrete physical portion of the
Project.
In such circumstances, when in the opinion of the Principal Representative, the
Architect/Engineer and State Buildings Programs, the requirements for issuance of a Notice of
Substantial Completion can be satisfied with respect to the discrete portion of the Project, a partial
Notice of Substantial Completion may be issued for such discrete physical portion of the Project.
D.
NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE
The Notice of Acceptance shall establish the completion date of the Project. It shall not be authorized
until the Contractor shall have performed all of the work to allow completion and approval of the PreAcceptance Checklist (SBP-05).
Where partial Notices of Substantial Completion have been issued, partial Notices of Final Acceptance
may be similarly issued when appropriate for that portion of the Work. Partial Notice of Final
Acceptance may also be issued to exclude the work described in Change Orders executed during late
stages of the Project where a later completion date for the Change Ordered work is expressly provided
for in the Contract as amended by the Change Order, provided the work can be adequately described
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
35
to allow partial advertisement of any Notice of Partial Final Settlement to be issued without confusion
as to the work included for which final payment will be made.
E.
SETTLEMENT
Final payment and settlement shall be made on the date fixed and published for such payment except
as hereafter provided. The Principal Representative shall not authorize final payment until all items on
the Pre-Acceptance check list (SBP-05) have been completed, the Notice of Acceptance issued, and
the Notice of Contractors Settlement published. If the work shall be substantially completed, but Final
Acceptance and completion thereof shall be prevented through delay in correction of minor defects, or
unavailability of materials or other causes beyond the control of the Contractor, the Principal
Representative in his or her discretion may release all amounts due to the Contractor except such
amounts as may be in excess of three times the cost of completing the unfinished work or the cost of
correcting the defective work, as estimated by the Architect/Engineer and approved by State Buildings
Programs. Before the Principal Representative may issue the Notice of Contractor’s Settlement and
advertise the Project for final payment, the Contractor shall have corrected all items on the punch list
except those items for which delayed performance is expressly permitted, subject to withholding for the
cost thereof, and shall have:
1.
Delivered to the Architect/Engineer:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
All guarantees and warranties;
All statements to support local sales tax refunds, if any;
Three (3) complete bound sets of required operating maintenance instructions; and,
One (1) set of as-built Contract Documents showing all job changes.
Demonstrated to the operating personnel of the Principal Representative the proper operation
and maintenance of all equipment.
Upon completion of the foregoing the Project shall be advertised in accordance with the Notice of
Contractor’s Settlement by two publications of Notice, the last publication appearing at least ten (10)
days prior to the time of final settlement. Publication and final settlement should not be postponed or
delayed solely by virtue of unresolved claims against the Project or the Contractor from
Subcontractors, suppliers or materialmen based on good faith disputes; the resolution of the question
of payment in such cases being directed by statute.
Except as hereafter provided, on the date of final settlement thus advertised, provided the Contractor
has submitted a written Notice to the Architect/Engineer that no claims have been filed, and further
provided the Principal Representative shall have received no claims, final payments and settlement
shall be made in full. If any unpaid claim for labor, materials, rental machinery, tools, supplies or
equipment is filed before payment in full of all sums due the Contractor, the Principal Representative
and the State Controller shall withhold from the Contractor on the date established for final settlement,
sufficient funds to insure the payment of such claim, until the same shall have been paid or withdrawn,
such payment or withdrawal to be evidenced by filing a receipt in full or an order for withdrawal signed
by the claimant or his or her duly authorized agent or assignee. The amount so withheld may be in the
amount of 125% of the claims or such other amount as the Principal Representative reasonably deems
necessary to cover expected legal expenses. Such withheld amounts shall be in addition to any
amount withheld based on the cost to compete unfinished work or the cost to repair defective work.
However, as provided by statute, such funds shall not be withheld longer than ninety (90) days
following the date fixed for final settlement with the Contractor, as set forth in the published Notice of
Contractor’s Settlement, unless an action at law shall be commenced within that time to enforce such
unpaid claim and a Notice of such action at law shall have been filed with the Principal Representative
and the State Controller. At the expiration of the ninety (90) day period, the Principal Representative
shall authorize the State Controller to release to the Contractor all other money not the subject of such
action at law or withheld based on the cost to compete unfinished work or the cost to repair defective
work.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
36
Notices of Partial Final Settlement may be similarly advertised, provided all conditions precedent have
been satisfied as though that portion of the work affected stood alone, a Notice of Partial Acceptance
has been issued, and the consent of surety to the partial final settlement has been obtained in writing.
Thereafter, partial final payments may be made to the Contractor subject to the same conditions
regarding unpaid claims.
ARTICLE 42.
GENERAL WARRANTY AND CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER ACCEPTANCE
The Contractor warrants that the materials used and the equipment furnished shall be new and of good
quality unless specified to the contrary. The Contractor further warrants that the Work shall in all respects
be free from material defects not permitted by the Specifications and shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Neither the final certificate for payment nor any provision in the
Contract Documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for defects or faulty materials or
workmanship. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Principal Representative for such warranties for
the longest period permitted by any applicable statute of limitations.
In addition to these general warranties, and without limitation of these general warranties, for a period of one
year after the date of any Notice of Substantial Completion, or any Notice of Partial Substantial Completion if
applicable, the Contractor shall remedy defects, and faulty workmanship or materials, and work not in
accordance with the Contract Documents which was not accepted at the time of the Notice of Final
Acceptance, all in accordance with the provisions of Article 44, One-Year Guarantee And Special
Guarantees And Warranties.
ARTICLE 43.
LIENS
Colorado statutes do not provide for any right of lien against public buildings. In lieu thereof, § 38-26-107,
C.R.S., provides adequate relief for any claimant having furnished labor, materials, rental machinery, tools,
equipment, or services toward construction of the particular public work in that final payment may not be
made to a Contractor until all such creditors have been put on Notice by publication in the public press of
such pending payment and given opportunity for a period of up to ninety (90) days to stop payment to the
Contractor in the amount of such claims.
ARTICLE 44.
ONE-YEAR GUARANTEE AND SPECIAL GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A.
ONE-YEAR GUARANTEE OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall guarantee to remedy defects and repair or replace the Work for a period of one
year from the date of the Notice of Substantial Completion or from the dates of any partial Notices of
Substantial Completion issued for discrete physical portions of the Work. The Contractor shall remedy
any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and shall pay for, repair and replace any damage
to other work resulting there from, which shall appear within a period of one year from the date of such
Notice(s) of Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall also remedy any deviation from the
requirements of the Contract Documents which shall later be discovered within a period of one year
from the date of the Notice of Substantial Completion; provided, however, that the Contractor shall not
be required to remedy deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents where such
deviations were obvious, apparent and accepted by the Architect/Engineer or the Principal
Representative at the time of the Notice of Final Acceptance. The Principal Representative shall give
Notice of observed defects or other work requiring correction with reasonable promptness. Such
Notice shall be in writing to the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor.
The one year guarantee of the Contractor’s work may run separately for discrete physical portions of
the Work for which partial Notices of Substantial Completion have been issued, however, it shall run
from the last Notice of Substantial Completion with respect to all or any systems common to the work
to which more than one Notice of Substantial Completion may apply.
This one-year guarantee shall not be construed to limit the Contractor’s general warranty described in
Article 42, General Warranty and Correction of Work After Acceptance, that all materials and
equipment are new and of good quality, unless specified to the contrary, and that the Work shall in all
respects be free from material defects not permitted by the Specifications and in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
37
B.
SPECIAL GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
In case of work performed for which product, manufacturers or other special warranties are required by
the Specifications, the Contractor shall secure the required warranties and deliver copies thereof to the
Principal Representative through the Architect/Engineer upon completion of the work.
These product, manufacturers or other special warranties, as such, do not in any way lessen the
Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract. Whenever guarantees or warranties are required by
the Specifications for a longer period than one year, such longer period shall govern.
ARTICLE 45.
GUARANTEE INSPECTIONS AFTER COMPLETION
The Architect/Engineer, the Principal Representative and the Contractor together shall make at least two (2)
complete inspections of the work after the Work has been determined to be substantially complete and
accepted. One such inspection, the “Six-Month Guarantee Inspection,” shall be made approximately six (6)
months after date of the Notice of Substantial Completion, unless in the case of smaller projects valued
under $500,000 this inspection is declined in Article 7A (Contractor’s Agreement SC-6.21), Modification of
Article 45, in which case the inspection to occur at six months shall not be required. Another such
inspection, the “Eleven-Month Guaranty Inspection” shall be made approximately eleven (11) months after
the date of the Notice of Substantial Completion. The Principal Representative shall schedule and so notify
all parties concerned, including State Buildings Programs, of these inspections. If more than one Notice of
Substantial Completion has been issued at the reasonable discretion of the Principal Representative
separate eleven month inspections may be required where the one year guarantees do not run reasonably
concurrent.
Written punch lists and reports of these inspections shall be made by the Architect/Engineer and forwarded
to the Contractor, the Principal Representative, State Buildings Programs, and all other participants within
ten (10) days after the completion of the inspections. The punch list shall itemize all guarantee items, prior
punch list items still to be corrected or completed and any other requirements of the Contract Documents to
be completed which were not waived by final acceptance because they were not obvious or could not
reasonably have been previously observed. The Contractor shall immediately initiate such remedial work as
may be necessary to correct any deficiencies or defective work shown by this report, and shall promptly
complete all such remedial work in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer, the Principal
Representative and State Buildings Programs.
If the Contractor fails to promptly correct all deficiencies and defects shown by this report, the Principal
Representative may do so, after giving the Contractor ten (10) days written Notice of intention to do so.
The State of Colorado, acting by and through the Principal Representative, shall be entitled to collect from
the Contractor all costs and expenses incurred by it in correcting such deficiencies and defects, as well as all
damages resulting from such deficiencies and defects.
ARTICLE 46.
TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between the parties hereto, that the date of beginning,
rate of progress, and the time for completion of the Work to be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL
CONDITIONS of this Agreement, and it is understood and agreed that the Work embraced in this Contract
shall be commenced at the time specified in the Notice to Proceed (SC-6.26).
It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this Contract, and of any portion
of the Work described on the Drawings or Specifications, wherein a definite and certain length of time is
fixed for the performance of any act whatsoever. The parties further agree that where under the Contract
additional time is allowed for the completion of the Work or any identified portion of the Work, the new time
limit or limits fixed by such extension of the time for completion shall be of the essence of this Agreement.
The Contractor acknowledges that subject to any limitations in the Advertisement for Bids, issued for the
Project, the Contractor’s bid is consistent with and considers the number of days to substantially complete
the Project and the number of days to finally complete the Project to which the parties may have stipulated
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
38
in the Agreement, which stipulation was based on the Contractor’s bid. The Contractor agrees that work
shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will ensure the
Project will be substantially complete, and fully and finally complete, as recognized by the issuance of all
required Notices of Substantial Completion and Notices of Final Acceptance, within any times stipulated and
specified in the Agreement, as the same may be amended by Change Order or other written modification,
and that the Principal Representative will be damaged if the times of completion are delayed.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the parties hereto, that the times for the Substantial
Completion of the Work or for the final acceptance of the Work as may be stipulated in the Agreement, and
as applied here and in Article 7D (Contractor’s Agreement SC-6.21), Modifications of Article 46, are
reasonable times for these stages of completion of the Work, taking into such consideration all factors,
including the average climatic range and usual industrial conditions prevailing in the locality of the building
operations.
If the Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the Work within the times specified in the
Agreement, such failure shall constitute a breach of the terms of the Contract and the State of Colorado,
acting by and through the Principal Representative, shall be entitled to liquidated damages for such neglect,
failure or refusal, as specified in Article 7D (Contractor’s Agreement SC-6.21), Modification of Article 46.
The Contractor and the Contractor’s Surety shall be jointly liable for and shall pay the Principal
Representative, or the Principal Representative may withhold, the sums hereinafter stipulated as liquidated
damages for each calendar day of delay until the entire Project is 1) substantially completed, and the Notice
(or all Notices) of Substantial Completion are issued, 2) finally complete and accepted and the Notice (or all
Notices) of Acceptance are issued, or 3) both. Delay in substantial completion shall be measured from the
Date of the Notice to Proceed and delay in final completion and acceptance shall be measured from the
Date of the Notice of Substantial Completion.
In the first instance, specified in Article 7D(1) (Contractor’s Agreement SC-6.21), Modification of Article 46,
liquidated damages, if any, shall be the amount specified therein, for each calendar day of delay beginning
after the stipulated number of days for Substantial Completion from the date of the Notice to Proceed, until
the date of the Notice of Substantial Completion. Unless otherwise specified in any Supplementary General
Conditions, in the event of any partial Notice of Substantial Completion, liquidated damages shall accrue
until all required Notices of Substantial Completion are issued.
In the second instance, specified in Article 7D(2) (Contractor’s Agreement SC-6.21), Modification of Article
46, liquidated damages, if any, shall be the amount specified in Article 7D (Contractor’s Agreement SC6.21), Modification of Article 46, for each calendar day in excess of the number of calendar days specified in
the Contractor’s bid for the Project and stipulated in the Agreement to finally complete the Project (as
defined by the issuance of the Notice of Acceptance) after the final Notice of Substantial Completion has
been issued.
In the third instance, when so specified in both Articles 7D(1) and (2) (Contractor’s Agreement SC-6.21),
both types of liquidated damages shall be separately assessed where those delays have occurred.
The parties expressly agree that said amounts are a reasonable estimate of the presumed actual damages
that would result from any of the breaches listed, and that any liquidated damages that are assessed have
been agreed to in light of the difficulty of ascertaining the actual damages that would be caused by any of
these breaches at the time this Contract was formed; the liquidated damages in the first instance
representing an estimate of damages due to the inability to use the Project; the liquidated damages in the
second instance representing an estimate of damages due to the additional administrative, technical,
supervisory and professional expenses related to and arising from the extended closeout period including
delivery of any or all guarantees and warranties, the submittals of sales and use tax payment forms, the
calling for the final inspection and the completion of the final punch list.
The parties also agree and understand that the liquidated damages to be assessed in each instance are
separate and distinct, although potentially cumulative, damages for the separate and distinct breaches of
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
39
delayed substantial completion or final acceptance. Such liquidated damages shall not be avoided by virtue
of the fact of concurrent delay caused by the Principal Representative, or anyone acting on behalf of the
Principal Representative, but in such event the period of delay for which liquidated damages are assessed
shall be equitably adjusted in accordance with Article 38, Delays And Extensions Of Time.
ARTICLE 47.
DAMAGES
If either party to this Contract shall suffer damage under this Contract in any manner because of any
wrongful act or neglect of the other party or of anyone employed by either of them, then the party suffering
damage shall be reimbursed by the other party for such damage. Except to the extent of damages
liquidated for the Contractor’s failure to achieve timely completion as set forth in Article 46, Time of
Completion and Liquidated Damages, the Principal Representative shall be responsible for, and at his or her
option may insure against, loss of use of any existing property not included in the Work, due to fire or
otherwise, however caused. Notwithstanding the foregoing, or any other provision of this Contract, to the
contrary, no term or condition of this contract shall be construed or interpreted as a waiver, express or
implied, of any of the immunities, rights, benefits, protection, or other provisions of the Colorado
Governmental Immunity Act, Section 24-10-101, et seq., CRS, as now or hereafter amended. The parties
understand and agree that liability for claims for injuries to persons arising out of negligence of the State of
Colorado, its departments, institutions, agencies, boards, officials and employees is controlled and limited by
the provisions of Section 24-10-101, et seq., CRS, as now or hereafter amended and the risk management
statutes, Section 24-30-1501, et seq., CRS, as now or hereafter amended.
Notice of intent to file a claim under this clause shall be made in writing to the party liable within a
reasonable time of the first observance of such damage and not later than the time of final payment, except
that in the case of claims by the Principal Representative involving warranties against faulty work or
materials Notice shall be required only to the extent stipulated elsewhere in these General Conditions.
Claims made to the Principal Representative involving extra cost or extra time arising by virtue of
instructions to the Contractor to which Article 36, Claims, applies shall be made in accordance with Article
36. Other claims arising under the Contract involving extra cost or extra time which are made to the
Principal Representative under this clause shall also be made in accordance with the procedures of Article
36, whether or not arising by virtue of instructions to the Contractor; provided however that it shall not be
necessary to first obtain or request a written judgment of the Architect/Engineer.
Provided written Notice of intent to file a claim is provided as required in the preceding paragraph, nothing in
this Article shall limit or restrict the rights of either party to bring an action at law or to seek other relief to
which either party may be entitled, including consequential damages, if any, and shall not be construed to
limit the time during which any action might be brought. Nothing in these General Conditions shall be
deemed to limit the period of time during which any action may be brought as a matter of contract, tort,
warranty or otherwise, it being the intent of the parties to allow any and all actions at law or in equity for such
periods as the law permits. All such rights shall, however be subject to the obligation to assert claims and to
appeal denials pursuant to Article 36, Claims, where applicable.
ARTICLE 48.
A.
STATE’S RIGHT TO DO THE WORK; TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK; DELAY
DAMAGES
STATE’S RIGHT TO DO THE WORK
If after receipt of Notice to do so, the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the Work properly or fail
to perform any provision of the Contract, the Principal Representative, after a second seven (7) days’
advance written Notice to the Contractor and the Surety may, without prejudice to any other remedy
the Principal Representative may have, take control of all or a portion of the Work, as the Principal
Representative deems necessary and make good such deficiencies deducting the cost thereof from
the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor, as provided in Article 30, Correction Of Work
Before Acceptance and Article 33, Payments Withheld, provided, however, that the Architect/Engineer
shall approve the amount charged to the Contractor by approval of the Change Order.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
40
B.
TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK
The State, acting for itself or by and through the Architect/Engineer, shall have the authority to
suspend the Work, either wholly or in part, for such period or periods as may be deemed necessary
due to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5:
6.
Unsuitable weather;
Faulty workmanship;
Improper superintendence;
Contractor ’s failure to carry out orders or to perform any provision of the Contract Documents;
Loss of, or restrictions to, appropriations;
Conditions, which may be considered unfavorable for the prosecution of the Work.
If it should become necessary to stop work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store materials
in such manner that they will not become an obstruction or become damaged in any way; and he or
she shall take every precaution to prevent damage to or deterioration of the Work, provide suitable
drainage and erect temporary structures where necessary.
Notice of suspension of work shall be provided to the Contractor in writing stating the reasons
therefore. The Contractor shall again proceed with the work when so notified in writing.
The Contractor understands and agrees that the State of Colorado cannot predict with certainty future
revenues and could ultimately lack the revenue to fund the appropriations applicable to this Contract.
The Contractor further acknowledges and agrees that in such event that State may, upon Notice to the
Contractor, suspend the work in anticipation of a termination of the Contract for the convenience of the
State, pursuant to Article 50, Termination For Convenience of State. If the Contract is not so
terminated the Contract sum and the Contract time shall be equitably adjusted at the time the Principal
Representative directs the work to be recommenced and gives Notice that the revenue to fund the
appropriation is available.
C.
DELAY DAMAGES
The Principal Representative and the State of Colorado shall be liable to the Contractor for the
payment of any claim for extra costs, extra compensation or damages occasioned by hindrances or
delays encountered in the work only when and to the limited extent that such hindrance or delay is
caused by an act or omission within the control of the Principal Representative, the Architect/Engineer
or other persons or entities acting on behalf of the Principal Representative. Further, the Principal
Representative and the State of Colorado shall be liable to the Contractor for the payment of such a
claim only if the Contractor has provided required Notice of the delay or impact, or has presented its
claim for an extension of time or claim of other delay or other impact due to changes ordered in the
work before proceeding with the changed work. Except as otherwise provided, claims for extension of
time shall be Noticed and filed in accordance with Article 38, Delays and Extensions of Time, within
three (3) business days of the beginning of the delay with any claim filed within seven (7) days after
the delay has ceased, or such claim is waived. Claims for extension of time or for other delay or other
impact resulting from changes ordered in the Work shall be presented and adjusted as provided in
Article 35, Changes in the Work.
ARTICLE 49.
STATE’S RIGHTS TO TERMINATE CONTRACT
A. GENERAL
If the Contractor should be adjudged bankrupt, or if he or she should make a general assignment for
the benefit of his or her creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed to take over his affairs, or if he or
she should fail to prosecute his or her work with due diligence and carry the work forward in
accordance with the construction schedule and the time limits set forth in the Contract Documents, or if
he or she should fail to subsequently perform one or more of the provisions of the Contract Documents
to be performed by him, the Principal Representative may serve written Notice on the Contractor and
the Surety on performance and payment bonds, stating his or her intention to exercise one of the
remedies hereinafter set forth and the grounds upon which the Principal Representative bases his or
her right to exercise such remedy.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
41
In such event, unless the matter complained of is satisfactorily cleared within ten (10) days after
delivery of such Notice, the Principal Representative may, without prejudice to any other right or
remedy, exercise one of such remedies at once, having first obtained the concurrence of the
Architect/Engineer in writing that sufficient cause exists to justify such action.
B.
CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES
1.
The Principal Representative may terminate the services of the Contractor, which termination
shall take effect immediately upon service of Notice thereof on the Contractor and his or her
Surety, whereupon the Surety shall have the right to take over and perform the Contract. If the
Surety does not provide Notice to the Principal Representative of its intent to commence
performance of the Contract within ten (10) days after delivery of the Notice of termination, the
Principal Representative may take over the Work, take possession of and use all materials,
tools, equipment and appliances on the premises and prosecute the Work to completion by
such means as he or she shall deem best. In the event of such termination of his or her
service, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any further payment under the Contract until the
Work is completed and accepted. If the Principal Representative takes over the Work and if
the unpaid balance of the contract price exceeds the cost of completing the Work, including
compensation for any damages or expenses incurred by the Principal Representative through
the default of the Contractor, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If, however, the cost,
expenses and damages as certified by the Architect/Engineer exceed such unpaid balance of
the contract price, the Contractor and his or her Surety shall pay the difference to the Principal
Representative.
2.
The Principal Representative may require the Surety on the Contractor ’s bond to take control
of the Work and see to it that all the deficiencies of the Contractor are made good, with due
diligence within ten (10) days of delivery of Notice to the Surety to do so. As between the
Principal Representative and the Surety, the cost of making good such deficiencies shall all be
borne by the Surety. If the Surety takes over the Work, either by election upon termination of
the services of the Contractor pursuant to Section B(1) of this Article 49, State's Right To
Terminate Contract, or upon instructions from the Principal Representative to do so, the
provisions of the Contract Documents shall govern the work to be done by the Surety, the
Surety being substituted for the Contractor as to such provisions, including provisions as to
payment for the Work, the times of completion and provisions of this Article as to the right of
the Principal Representative to do the Work or to take control of all or a portion of the Work.
3.
The Principal Representative may take control of all or a portion of the Work and make good
the deficiencies of the Contractor, or the Surety if the Surety has been substituted for the
Contractor, with or without terminating the Contract, employing such additional help as the
Principal Representative deems advisable in accordance with the provisions of Article 48A,
State's Right To Do The Work; Temporary Suspension Of Work; Delay Damages. In such
event, the Principal Representative shall be entitled to collect from the Contractor and his or
her Surety, or to deduct from any payment then or thereafter due the Contractor, the costs
incurred in having such deficiencies made good and any damages or expenses incurred
through the default of Contractor, provided the Architect/Engineer approves the amount thus
charged to the Contractor.
If the Contract is not terminated, a Change Order to the Contract shall be executed, unilaterally
if necessary, in accordance with the procedures of Article 35, Changes In The Work.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
42
C.
ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS
If any termination by the Principal Representative for cause is later determined to have been improper,
the termination shall be automatically converted to and deemed to be a termination by the Principal
Representative for convenience and the Contractor shall be limited in recovery to the compensation
provided for in Article 50, Termination For Convenience Of State. Termination by the Contractor shall
not be subject to such conversion.
ARTICLE 50.
TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF STATE
A.
NOTICE OF TERMINATION
The performance of Work under this Contract may be terminated, in whole or from time to time in part,
by the State whenever for any reason the Principal Representative shall determine that such
termination is in the best interest of State. Termination of work hereunder shall be effected by delivery
to the Contractor of a Notice of such termination specifying the extent to which the performance of
work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which such termination becomes effective.
B.
PROCEDURES
After receipt of the Notice of termination, the Contractor shall, to the extent appropriate to the
termination, cancel outstanding commitments hereunder covering the procurement of materials,
supplies, equipment and miscellaneous items. In addition, the Contractor shall exercise all reasonable
diligence to accomplish the cancellation or diversion of all applicable outstanding commitments
covering personal performance of any work terminated by the Notice. With respect to such canceled
commitments, the Contractor agrees to:
1.
2.
settle all outstanding liabilities and all claims arising out of such cancellation of commitments,
with approval or ratification of the Principal Representative, to the extent he or she may require,
which approval or ratification shall be final for all purposes of this clause; and,
assign to the State, in the manner, at the time, and to the extent directed by the Principal
Representative, all of the right, title, and interest of the Contractor under the orders and
subcontracts so terminated, in which case the State shall have the right, in its discretion, to settle
or pay any or all claims arising out of the termination of such orders and subcontracts.
The Contractor shall submit his or her termination claim to the Principal Representative promptly after
receipt of a Notice of termination, but in no event later than three (3) months from the effective date
thereof, unless one or more extensions in writing are granted by the Principal Representative upon
written request of the Contractor within such three month period or authorized extension thereof.
Upon failure of the Contractor to submit his or her termination claim within the time allowed, the
Principal Representative may determine, on the basis of information available to him, the amount, if
any, due to the Contractor by reason of the termination and shall thereupon pay to the Contractor the
amount so determined.
Costs claimed, agreed to, or determined pursuant to the preceding and following paragraph shall be in
accordance with the provisions of § 24-107-101, C.R.S., as amended and associated Cost Principles
of the Colorado Procurement Rules as in effect on the date of this Contract.
Subject to the preceding provisions, the Contractor and the Principal Representative may agree upon
the whole or any part of the amount or amounts to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the
termination under this clause, which amount or amounts may include any reasonable cancellation
charges thereby incurred by the Contractor and any reasonable loss upon outstanding commitments
for personal services which he or she is unable to cancel; provided, however, that in connection with
any outstanding commitments for personal services which the Contractor is unable to cancel, the
Contractor shall have exercised reasonable diligence to divert such commitments to other activities
and operations. Any such agreement shall be embodied in an Amendment to this Contract and the
Contractor shall be paid the agreed amount.
The State may from time to time, under such terms and conditions as it may prescribe, make partial
payments against costs incurred by the Contractor in connection with the termination portion of this
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
43
Contract, whenever, in the opinion of the Principal Representative, the aggregate of such payments is
within the amount to which the Contractor will be entitled hereunder.
The Contractor agrees to transfer title and deliver to the State, in the manner, at the time, and to the
extent, if any, directed by the Principal Representative, such information and items which, if the
Contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished to the State, including:
a.
b.
completed or partially completed plans, Drawings and information; and,
materials or equipment produced or in process or acquired in connection with the performance
of the work terminated by the Notice.
Other than the above, any termination inventory resulting from the termination of the Contract may,
with written approval of the Principal Representative, be sold or acquired by the Contractor under the
conditions prescribed by and at a price or prices approved by the Principal Representative. The
proceeds of any such disposition shall be applied in reduction of any payments to be made by the
State to the Contractor under this Contract or shall otherwise be credited to the price or cost of work
covered by this Contract or paid in such other manners as the Principal Representative may direct.
Pending final disposition of property arising from the termination, the Contractor agrees to take such
action as may be necessary, or as the Principal Representative may direct, for the protection and
preservation of the property related to this Contract which is in the possession of the Contractor and in
which the State has or may acquire an interest.
Any disputes as to questions of fact, which may arise hereunder, shall be subject to the Remedies
provisions of the Colorado Procurement Code, §§ 24-109-101, et seq., C.R.S., as amended.
ARTICLE 51.
CONTRACTOR’S RIGHT TO STOP WORK AND/OR TERMINATE CONTRACT
If the Work shall be stopped under an order of any court or other public authority for a period of three (3)
months through no act or fault of the Contractor or of any one employed by him, then the Contractor may on
seven (7) days’ written Notice to the Principal Representative and the Architect/Engineer stop work or
terminate this Contract and recover from the Principal Representative payment for all work executed, any
losses sustained on any plant or material, and a reasonable profit. If the Architect/Engineer shall fail to
issue or otherwise act in writing upon any certificate for payment within ten (10) days after it is presented
and received by the Architect/Engineer, as provided in Article 31, Applications For Payments, or if the
Principal Representative shall fail to pay the Contractor any sum certified that is not disputed in whole or in
part by the Principal Representative in writing to the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer within thirty (30)
days after the Architect/Engineer’s certification, then the Contractor may on ten (10) days’ written Notice to
the Principal Representative and the Architect/Engineer stop work and/or give written Notice of intention to
terminate this Contract.
If the Principal Representative shall thereafter fail to pay the Contractor any amount certified by the
Architect/Engineer and not disputed in writing by the Principal Representative within ten (10) days after
receipt of such Notice, then the Contractor may terminate this Contract and recover from the Principal
Representative payment for all work executed, any losses sustained upon any plant or materials, and a
reasonable profit.
The Principal Representative’s right to dispute an amount certified by the
Architect/Engineer shall not relieve the Principal Representative of the obligation to pay amounts not in
dispute as certified by the Architect/Engineer.
ARTICLE 52.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
A.
CONTROLLER’S APPROVAL CRS 24-30-202(1)
This Contract shall not be deemed valid until it has been approved by the Colorado State Controller or
designee.
B.
FUND AVAILABILITY CRS 24-30-202(5.5)
Financial obligations of the State payable after the current fiscal year are contingent upon funds for
that purpose being appropriated, budgeted, and otherwise made available
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
44
C.
GOVERNMENTAL IMMUNITY
No term or condition of this contract shall be construed or interpreted as a waiver, express or implied,
of any of the immunities, rights, benefits, protections, or other provisions, of the Colorado
Governmental Immunity Act, CRS §24-10-101 et seq., or the Federal Tort Claims Act, 28 U.S.C.
§§1346(b) and 2671 et seq., as applicable now or hereafter amended.
D.
INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR 4 CCR 801-2
Contractor shall perform its duties hereunder as an independent contractor and not as an employee.
Neither Contractor nor any agent or employee of Contractor shall be deemed to be an agent or
employee of the State. Contractor and its employees and agents are not entitled to unemployment
insurance or workers compensation benefits through the State and the State shall not pay for or
otherwise provide such coverage for Contractor or any of its agents or employees. Unemployment
insurance benefits will be available to Contractor and its employees and agents only if such coverage
is made available by Contractor or a third party. Contractor shall pay when due all applicable
employment taxes and income taxes and local head taxes incurred pursuant to this contract.
Contractor shall not have authorization, express or implied, to bind the State to any agreement, liability
or understanding, except as expressly set forth herein. Contractor shall (a) provide and keep in force
workers' compensation and unemployment compensation insurance in the amounts required by law,
(b) provide proof thereof when requested by the State, and (c) be solely responsible for its acts and
those of its employees and agents.
E.
COMPLIANCE WITH LAW
Contractor shall strictly comply with all applicable federal and State laws, rules, and regulations in
effect or hereafter established, including, without limitation, laws applicable to discrimination and unfair
employment practices.
F.
CHOICE OF LAW
Colorado law, and rules and regulations issued pursuant thereto, shall be applied in the interpretation,
execution, and enforcement of this contract. Any provision included or incorporated herein by
reference which conflicts with said laws, rules, and regulations shall be null and void. Any provision
incorporated herein by reference which purports to negate this or any other Special Provision in whole
or in part shall not be valid or enforceable or available in any action at law, whether by way of
complaint, defense, or otherwise. Any provision rendered null and void by the operation of this
provision shall not invalidate the remainder of this contract, to the extent capable of execution.
G.
BINDING ARBITRATION PROHIBITED
The State of Colorado does not agree to binding arbitration by any extra-judicial body or person. Any
provision to the contrary in this contract or incorporated herein by reference shall be null and void.
H.
SOFTWARE PIRACY PROHIBITION. Governor’s Executive Order D 002 00
State or other public funds payable under this contract shall not be used for the acquisition, operation,
or maintenance of computer software in violation of federal copyright laws or applicable licensing
restrictions. Contractor hereby certifies and warrants that, during the term of this contract and any
extensions, Contractor has and shall maintain in place appropriate systems and controls to prevent
such improper use of public funds. If the State determines that Contractor is in violation of this
provision, the State may exercise any remedy available at law or in equity or under this contract,
including, without limitation, immediate termination of this contract and any remedy consistent with
federal copyright laws or applicable licensing restrictions.
I.
EMPLOYEE FINANCIAL INTEREST/CONFLICT OF INTEREST CRS 24-18-201 & CRS 24-50-507
The signatories aver that to their knowledge, no employee of the State has any personal or beneficial
interest whatsoever in the service or property described in this contract. Contractor has no interest and
shall not acquire any interest, direct or indirect, that would conflict in any manner or degree with the
performance of Contractor’s services and Contractor shall not employ any person having such known
interests.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
45
J.
VENDOR OFFSET CRS 24-30-202(1) & CRS 24-30-202.4
Subject to CRS §24-30-202.4 (3.5), the State Controller may withhold payment under the State’s
vendor offset intercept system for debts owed to State agencies for: (a) unpaid child support debts or
child support arrearages; (b) unpaid balances of tax, accrued interest, or other charges specified in
CRS §39-21-101, et seq.; (c) unpaid loans due to the Student Loan Division of the Department of
Higher Education; (d) amounts required to be paid to the Unemployment Compensation Fund; and (e)
other unpaid debts owing to the State as a result of final agency determination or judicial action.
K.
PUBLIC CONTRACTS FOR SERVICES. CRS §8-17.5-101. [Not Applicable to agreements relating
to the offer, issuance, or sale of securities, investment advisory services or fund management
services, sponsored projects, intergovernmental agreements, or information technology
services or products and services] Contractor certifies, warrants, and agrees that it does not
knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien who will perform work under this contract and will
confirm the employment eligibility of all employees who are newly hired for employment in the United
States to perform work under this contract, through participation in the E-Verify Program or the
Department program established pursuant to CRS §8-17.5-102(5)(c), Contractor shall not knowingly
employ or contract with an illegal alien to perform work under this contract or enter into a contract with
a subcontractor that fails to certify to Contractor that the subcontractor shall not knowingly employ or
contract with an illegal alien to perform work under this contract. Contractor (a) shall not use E-Verify
Program or Department program procedures to undertake pre-employment screening of job applicants
while this contract is being performed, (b) shall notify the subcontractor and the contracting State
agency within three days if Contractor has actual knowledge that a subcontractor is employing or
contracting with an illegal alien for work under this contract, (c) shall terminate the subcontract if a
subcontractor does not stop employing or contracting with the illegal alien within three days of
receiving the notice, and (d) shall comply with reasonable requests made in the course of an
investigation, undertaken pursuant to CRS §8-17.5-102(5), by the Colorado Department of Labor and
Employment. If Contractor participates in the Department program, Contractor shall deliver to the
contracting State agency, Institution of Higher Education or political subdivision a written, notarized
affirmation, affirming that Contractor has examined the legal work status of such employee, and shall
comply with all of the other requirements of the Department program. If Contractor fails to comply with
any requirement of this provision or CRS §8-17.5-101 et seq., the contracting State agency, institution
of higher education or political subdivision may terminate this contract for breach and, if so terminated,
Contractor shall be liable for damages.
L.
PUBLIC CONTRACTS WITH NATURAL PERSONS. CRS §24-76.5-101.
Contractor, if a natural person eighteen (18) years of age or older, hereby swears and affirms under
penalty of perjury that he or she (a) is a citizen or otherwise lawfully present in the United States
pursuant to federal law, (b) shall comply with the provisions of CRS §24-76.5-101 et seq., and (c) has
produced one form of identification required by CRS §24-76.5-103 prior to the effective date of this
contract.
ARTICLE 53.
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
A.
CONSTRUCTION OF LANGUAGE
The language used in these General Conditions shall be construed as a whole according to its plain
meaning, and not strictly for or against any party. Such construction shall, however, construe
language to interpret the intent of the parties giving due consideration to the order of precedence noted
in Article 2C, Intent of Documents.
B.
SEVERABILITY
Provided this Agreement can be executed and performance of the obligations of the Parties
accomplished within its intent, the provisions hereof are severable and any provision that is declared
invalid or becomes inoperable for any reason shall not affect the validity of any other provision hereof,
provided that the Parties can continue to perform their obligations under this Agreement in accordance
with its intent.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
46
C.
SECTION HEADINGS
The captions and headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, and shall not be
used to interpret, define, or limit its provisions.
D.
AUTHORITY
Each person executing the Agreement and its Exhibits in a representative capacity expressly
represents and warrants that he or she has been duly authorized by one of the parties to execute the
Agreement and has authority to bind said party to the terms and conditions hereof.
E.
INTEGRATION OF UNDERSTANDING
This Contract is intended as the complete integration of all understandings between the parties and
supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. No prior or
contemporaneous addition, deletion, or other amendment hereto shall have any force or effect
whatsoever, unless embodied herein in writing. No subsequent novation, renewal, addition, deletion,
or other amendment hereto shall have any force or effect unless embodied in a written Change Order
or Amendment to this Contract.
F.
VENUE
All suits or actions related to this Agreement shall be filed and proceedings held in the State of
Colorado and exclusive venue shall be in the City and County of Denver.
G.
NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES
Enforcement of this Agreement and all rights and obligations hereunder are reserved solely to the
Parties. Any services or benefits which third parties receive as a result of this Contract are incidental to
the Contract, and do not create any rights for such third parties.
H.
WAIVER
Waiver of any breach under a term, provision, or requirement of this Agreement, or any right or remedy
hereunder, whether explicitly or by lack of enforcement, shall not be construed or deemed as a waiver
of any subsequent breach of such term, provision or requirement, or of any other term, provision, or
requirement.
I.
INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify, save, and hold harmless the State, its employees and agents, against any
and all claims, damages, liability and court awards including costs, expenses, and attorney fees and
related costs, incurred as a result of any act or omission by Contractor, or its employees, agents,
subcontractors, or assignees pursuant to the terms of this contract.
J.
STATEWIDE CONTRACT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
If the maximum amount payable to Contractor under this Contract is $100,000 or greater, either on the
Effective Date or at anytime thereafter, this section shall apply.
Contractor agrees to be governed, and to abide, by the provisions of CRS 24-102-205, 24-102-206,
24-103-601, 24-103.5-101, 24-105-101, and 24-105-102 concerning the monitoring of vendor
performance on state contracts and inclusion of contract performance information in a statewide
contract management system.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
47
Contractor’s performance shall be subject to Evaluation and Review in accordance with the terms and
conditions of this Contract, State law, including C.R.S 24-103.5-101, and State Fiscal Rules, Policies
and Guidance. Evaluation and Review of Contractor’s performance shall be part of the normal contract
administration process and Contractor’s performance will be systematically recorded in the statewide
Contract Management System. Areas of Evaluation and Review shall include, but shall not be limited
to quality, cost and timeliness. Collection of information relevant to the performance of Contractor’s
obligations under this Contract shall be determined by the specific requirements of such obligations
and shall include factors tailored to match the requirements of Contractor’s obligations. Such
performance information shall be entered into the statewide Contract Management System at intervals
established herein and a final Evaluation, Review and Rating shall be rendered within 30 days of the
end of the Contract term. Contractor shall be notified following each performance Evaluation and
Review, and shall address or correct any identified problem in a timely manner and maintain work
progress.
Should the final performance Evaluation and Review determine that Contractor demonstrated a gross
failure to meet the performance measures established hereunder, the Executive Director of the
Colorado Department of Personnel and Administration (Executive Director), upon request by the
Principal Representative, and showing of good cause, may debar Contractor and prohibit Contractor
from bidding on future contracts. Contractor may contest the final Evaluation, Review and Rating by:
(a) filing rebuttal statements, which may result in either removal or correction of the evaluation (CRS
24-105-102(6)), or (b) under CRS 24-105-102(6), exercising the debarment protest and appeal rights
provided in CRS 24-109-106, 107, 201 or 202, which may result in the reversal of the debarment and
reinstatement of Contractor, by the Executive Director, upon a showing of good cause.
K.
CORA DISCLOSURE
To the extent not prohibited by federal law, this Agreement and the performance measures and
standards under CRS §24-103.5-101, if any, are subject to public release through the Colorado Open
Records Act, CRS §24-72-101, et seq.
Rev. 7/2012
SC-6.23
48
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
NOTICE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Date of Substantial Completion::
Date to be inserted by the Principal Representative
Institution/Agency:
Project No./Name:
TO:
Principal Representative
and
Contractor
This is to advise you that the Work has been reviewed, inspected and determined, to the best knowledge, information
and belief of the Architect/Engineer, to be substantially complete as of the date noted above in accordance with the
criteria outlined in Article 41 of The General Conditions of the Contract in SC-6.23 and SC-8.1 or Article 17.3 in SC-6.4
and the Specifications, including without limitation a) suitable for occupancy, b) inspected for code compliance with
Building Inspection Records signed by code officials for the State, c) determined to be fully and comfortably usable,
and d) fully cleaned and appropriate for presentation to the public.
A punch list of work to be completed, work not in compliance with the Drawings or Specifications, and unsatisfactory
work is attached hereto, along with the Contractor’s schedule for the completion of each and every item identified on
the punch list specifying the Subcontractor or trade responsible for the work, and the dates the completion or
correction will be commenced and finished within any period indicated in the Agreement for punch list completion
prior to Final Acceptance.
Except as stated on the reverse side of this Notice of Substantial Completion, all manufacturers’ warranties, other
special warranties and the Contractor’s one-year obligation to perform remedial work, shall commence on the Date
of Substantial Completion noted above.
This Notice of Substantial Completion shall be effective and establish the Date of Substantial Completion only when
fully executed by the Contractor and the Principal Representative. The Principal Representative accepts the Work
as substantially complete as of the Date of Substantial Completion herein noted. The Contractor agrees to complete
or correct the Work identified on the attached punch list and to do so in accordance with attached punch list
completion schedule
Architect/Engineer
Date
Contractor
Date
State Buildings Programs
(or Authorized Delegate)
Date
Principal Representative
(Institution or Agency)
Date
State Form SPB-07
Rev 7/2012
Page 1 of 2
The responsibilities of the Principal Representative and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, and
insurance shall be as specified in the Contract Documents or as otherwise hereafter noted:
Exceptions, if any, to the commencement of warranties shall be:
The attached final punch list consists of
pages, and the attached Contractor’s schedule showing the
dates of commencement and completion of each punch list item consists of
pages.
When completely executed, this form shall be sent to the Contractor and the Principal Representative with a copy to State Buildings
Programs.
State Form SPB-07
Rev 7/2012
Page 2 of 2
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
NOTICE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Date of Notice of Acceptance:
Date to be inserted by A/E after consultation with the Principal Representative
Institution/Agency: University of Colorado At Colorado Springs
Project No./Name: 09-002 (M08023)/Repair/Replace Rooftop Units – University Hall
TO:
Notice is hereby given that the State of Colorado, acting by and through the
accepts as complete* the above numbered project.
State Buildings Programs
(or Authorized Delegate)
Date
Principal Representative
(Institution or Agency)
,
Date
*When completely executed, this form is to be sent by certified mail to the Contractor by the Principal
Representative.
State Form SBP-6.27
Rev. 9/2006
STATE OF COLORADO
OFFICE OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STATE BUILDINGS PROGRAMS
NOTICE OF CONTRACTOR’S SETTLEMENT
Institution/Agency:
Notice Number:
Project No./Title:
Notice is hereby given that on
date
at
address
Colorado, final settlement will be made by
the STATE OF COLORADO with
vendor name
, hereinafter called the "CONTRACTOR", for
and on account of the contract for the construction of a PROJECT as referenced above.
1.
Any person, co-partnership, association or corporation who has an unpaid claim against the said project, for or
on account of the furnishing of labor, materials, team hire, sustenance, provisions, provender, rental
machinery, tools. or equipment and other supplies used or consumed by such Contractor or any of his
subcontractors In or about the performance of said work, may at any time up to and including said time of such
final settlement, file a verified statement of the amount due and unpaid on account of such claim
2.
All such claims shall be filed with the Authority for College, Institution, Department or Agency.
3.
Failure on the part of a creditor to file such statement prior to such final settlement will relieve the State of
Colorado from any and all liability for such claim
Authorized Facility Manager or Authorized Individual
Name:
Approval Date:
Agency:
Phone:
Fax:
Email:
MEDIA OF PUBLICATION:
PUBLICATION DATES:
First:
Second:
(At least ten (10) days prior to above settlement date)
NOTES TO EDITOR:
Transmit two (2) copies of the Affidavit of Publication, and invoice, to:
State Form SBP-7.3
Rev. 7/2010
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Project Identification: Project consists of removal and replacement of existing boilers.
1.
2.
Project Location: Engineering Building, University of Colorado at Colorado Springs,
Colorado Springs, Colorado.
Owner: University of Colorado Springs.
B.
Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated 25 January, 2013, were prepared for
Project by Schendt Engineering Corp., 2912 Beacon Street, Colorado Springs, CO 80907.
C.
Project Coordinator:
Coordinator.
D.
The Work consists of demolition of the process fluid cooler (C-15) and installation of a new
process fluid cooler, piping modifications, power wiring and controls.
1.
1.3
Mr. Marcus Davis has been appointed by Owner to serve as Project
The Work includes associated electrical modifications.
CONTRACT
A.
1.4
Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.
WORK SEQUENCE
A.
The Work shall be conducted in single phase.
1.
1.5
Phase: Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy
within 120 days of the Notice to Proceed.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated
on Drawings by the Contract limits.
B.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project
site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
SUMMARY
(12116)
Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site.
01 10 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
2.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving
premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at
all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a.
b.
3.
4.
Limit construction operations to those methods and procedures which will not adversely
and unduly affect the working environment of the Owner's occupied spaces, including
noise, dust, odors, air pollution, ambient discomfort, poor lighting, hazards and other
undesirable effects and conditions.
Disruptive operations: Noisy and disruptive operations (such as use of jack hammers
and other noisy equipment) shall not be allowed at times that will disrupt the Owner’s
existing operations.
a.
b.
5.
C.
1.6
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
Schedule and coordinate such operations with Owner.
Upon notification from Owner, cease operations which are, in the opinion of the
Owner, disruptive to operations. Schedule such operations as described above.
Power Outages: Do not interrupt power, lighting, plumbing, telephone and HVAC services
to occupied areas. Coordinate and schedule any required utility outages with the Owner
at least 30 days in advance of the outage; have Owner's approval.
Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and
its occupants during construction period.
OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period,
with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction
operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to
interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used
facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy
and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial
Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such
placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
SUMMARY
(12116)
Architect will prepare a Notice of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the
Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of building.
On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of building
01 10 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.7
WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A.
1.8
General: Cooperate fully with Owner and separate contractors so work on those contracts may
be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1.
B.
Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the
beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the
Contract Documents.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a.
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 10 00
SUMMARY
(12116)
01 10 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General project coordination procedures.
Conservation.
Coordination Drawings.
Administrative and supervisory personnel.
Project meetings.
B.
Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
will be assigned to a specific contractor.
C.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination:
Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
B.
Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other
contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections,
that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of
attendees at meetings.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
(12116)
01 31 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
D.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Start-up and adjustment of systems.
Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.
1.4
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings:
Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Staff Names: Within 10 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site.
Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers,
including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1.
1.5
Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 26
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing
requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone.
ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A.
General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
1.
Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
(12116)
01 31 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.6
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of
the meeting.
Preconstruction Conference:
Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location.
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1.
2.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and
other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
C.
Tentative construction schedule.
Phasing.
Critical work sequencing.
Designation of responsible personnel.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of Record Documents.
Use of the premises.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Working hours.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
2.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
Contract Documents.
Options.
Related Change Orders.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
(12116)
01 31 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
3.
4.
D.
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility problems.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Required performance results.
Protection of construction and personnel.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals.
meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1.
2.
Coordinate dates of
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
b.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
(12116)
01 31 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
14)
3.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since
the previous meeting and report.
a.
E.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly intervals. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as
progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.
1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a.
b.
c.
Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions
are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after
each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
3.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and
to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
(12116)
01 31 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 31 00
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
(12116)
01 31 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination
Drawings.
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and
Delegated-Design Submittals.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record
Documents and operation and maintenance manuals.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval.
Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files may be provided to
Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Limited to drawings that already exist.
Used by Contractor as background information only.
Contractor includes a statement absolving the Architect or Engineer of all liability in
connection with the use of said CAD drawing. This statement shall be included on all
published drawings that include elements from the copied CAD files.
Architect or Engineer will not be held responsible for delays in Contractor’s submittals as
a result of delivery or non-delivery of any CAD file.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 33 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
2.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements for list of submittals and time requirements for
scheduled performance of related construction activities.
D.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect
will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is required, allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal.
If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
Allow 10 days for processing each resubmittal.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Unique identifier, including revision number.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
F.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on
submittals.
G.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect
observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve
as final submittal.
1.
2.
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of
copies to Architect.
Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken
and will be returned.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 33 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
H.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without
review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1.
2.
3.
On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the
related submittal.
Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Project name.
Date.
Destination (To:).
Source (From:).
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Remarks.
Signature of transmitter.
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in
connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1.
B.
Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Standard color charts.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 33 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
C.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Mill reports.
Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
3.
4.
Dimensions.
Identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Design calculations.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
Number of Copies: Submit four blue- or black-line prints of each submittal, unless prints
are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two prints;
remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record
Drawing.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management
and Coordination."
E.
Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for
the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
Number and name of room or space.
Location within room or space.
F.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
Requirements."
G.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
(12116)
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
01 33 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1.
2.
3.
Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
B.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
C.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements.
D.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel
certified.
E.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
F.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience
where required.
G.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements.
H.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements.
I.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements.
J.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 33 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
K.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements.
L.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
M.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name of evaluation organization.
Date of evaluation.
Time period when report is in effect.
Product and manufacturers' names.
Description of product.
Test procedures and results.
Limitations of use.
N.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
O.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance
and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of
assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load
diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations.
Include page numbers.
P.
Manufacturer's Instructions:
Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Q.
Preparation of substrates.
Required substrate tolerances.
Sequence of installation or erection.
Required installation tolerances.
Required adjustments.
Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 33 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
6.
7.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
R.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
S.
Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect,
Architect will not review this information but will return it with no action taken.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
No Exceptions Taken.
Rejected.
Submit Specified Item.
Make Corrections Noted.
Revise & Resubmit.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject
and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 33 00 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
1.4
Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in
the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also
cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Construction
Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction
disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed
construction complies with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements.
Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Construction Manager.
C.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
DELEGATED DESIGN
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 40 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
1.5
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
CODE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following codes and regulations and retain at
Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.6
International Building Code (IBC) – 2009 Edition.
International Mechanical Code (IMC) – 2009 Edition.
International Plumbing Code (IPC) – 2009 Edition.
International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) – 2009 Edition.
International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) – 2009 Edition.
International Fire Code (IFC) – 2009 Edition.
National Electrical Code (NEC) – 2011 Edition.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on
the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for
each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a
design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with
performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
C.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Specification Section number and title.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 40 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
E.
1.7
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
B.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
C.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F.
Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1.
Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations
governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and
similar conventions.
G.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing
and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests
and inspections to be performed.
H.
Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for compliance
with specified requirements for performance and test methods.
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 40 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
I.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,
and similar quality-assurance service to Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.8
Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and
construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately
demonstrate capability of product to comply with performance requirements.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the same
tasks for Project.
When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on Project.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Construction Manager.
Notify Construction Manager seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or
construction.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are
engaged to perform.
Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services
specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a.
2.
Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to
in writing by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 40 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.
4.
5.
C.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests
and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Testing agency will notify Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities
and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service to Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing.
E.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established
by the Contract Documents.
F.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Construction Manager, and Contractor in
performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Notify Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies
observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 40 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
7.
H.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
I.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of
date established for the Notice to Proceed.
1.
Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Construction Manager, testing agencies, and
each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections
are required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
2.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of
these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 40 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C.
“Architect”: Architect or Engineer in responsible charge of the project.
D.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
E.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
F.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
G.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
H.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
I.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
J.
"Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor,
or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,
erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
K.
Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively
to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
"Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed
a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
REFERENCES
(12116)
01 42 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
L.
1.3
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards:
Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,
comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are
different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.
D.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly
with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within
reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are
minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements.
Refer
uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source and make them available on request.
E.
Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the
recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone
numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and
up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
ADAAG
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from Access Board
(800) 872-2253
www.access-board.gov
(202) 272-5434
CFR
CRD
REFERENCES
(12116)
Code of Federal Regulations
Available from Government Printing Office
www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr
Handbook for Concrete and Cement
Available from Army Corps of Engineers
Waterways Experiment Station
www.wes.army.mil
(888) 293-6498
(202) 512-1530
(601) 634-2355
01 42 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
DOD
Department of Defense Specifications and Standards
Available from Defense Automated Printing Service
www.astimage.daps.dla.mil/online
FED-STD
Federal Standard
(See FS)
FS
Federal Specification
Available from Defense Automated Printing Service
www.astimage.daps.dla.mil/online
(202) 619-8925
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences
www.nibs.org
(202) 289-7800
Federal Test Method Standard
(See FS)
MILSPEC
Military Specification and Standards
Available from Defense Automated Printing Service
www.astimage.daps.dla.mil/online
1.4
(215) 697-6257
Available from General Services Administration
www.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fed-specs.cfm
FTMS
UFAS
(215) 697-6257
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
Available from Access Board
www.access-board.gov
(215) 697-6257
(800) 872-2253
(202) 272-5434
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale
Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade &
Professional Associations of the U.S."
B.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to
be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)
(202) 862-5100
www.aluminum.org
AA
AAADM
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers
www.aaadm.com
(216) 241-7333
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
www.aabchq.com
(202) 737-0202
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
www.aamanet.org
(847) 303-5664
AAN
American Association of Nurserymen
(See ANLA)
REFERENCES
(12116)
01 42 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
www.aashto.org
(202) 624-5800
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The)
www.aatcc.org
(919) 549-8141
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
www.abma-dc.org
(202) 367-1155
ACI
American Concrete Institute/ACI International
www.aci-int.org
(248) 848-3700
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
www.concrete-pipe.org
(972) 506-7216
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
www.aeic.org
(205) 257-2530
AFPA
American Forest & Paper Association
(See AF&PA)
AF&PA
American Forest & Paper Association
www.afandpa.org
(800) 878-8878
(202) 463-2700
AGA
American Gas Association
www.aga.org
(202) 824-7000
AGC
Associated General Contractors of America (The)
www.agc.org
(703) 548-3118
AHA
American Hardboard Association
www.hardboard.org
(847) 934-8800
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
www.aham.org
(202) 872-5955
AI
Asphalt Institute
www.asphaltinstitute.org
(859) 288-4960
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)
www.aia.org
(800) 242-3837
(202) 626-7300
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
www.aisc.org
(800) 644-2400
(312) 670-2400
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
www.steel.org
(202) 452-7100
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
www.aitc-glulam.org
(303) 792-9559
ALCA
Associated Landscape Contractors of America
www.alca.org
(800) 395-2522
(703) 736-9666
REFERENCES
(12116)
01 42 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee
(301) 972-1700
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
www.amca.org
(847) 394-0150
ANLA
American Nursery & Landscape Association
(Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen)
www.anla.org
(202) 789-2900
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
www.ansi.org
(202) 293-8020
AOSA
Association of Official Seed Analysts
www.aosaseed.com
(505) 522-1437
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association
www.apawood.org
(253) 565-6600
APA
Architectural Precast Association
www.archprecast.org
(941) 454-6989
API
American Petroleum Institute
www.api.org
(202) 682-8000
ARI
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
www.ari.org
(703) 524-8800
ASCA
Architectural Spray Coaters Association
www.ascassoc.com
(609) 848-6120
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
www.asce.org
(800) 548-2723
(703) 295-6300
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers
www.ashrae.org
(800) 527-4723
ASME
ASME International
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
www.asme.org
(800) 843-2763
(212) 591-7722
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
www.asse-plumbing.org
(440) 835-3040
ASTM
ASTM International
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
(610) 832-9585
AWCI
AWCI International
(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International)
www.awci.org
(703) 534-8300
AWCMA
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(See WCMA)
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
REFERENCES
(12116)
(404) 636-8400
(800) 449-8811
01 42 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
www.awinet.org
(703) 733-0600
AWPA
American Wood-Preservers' Association
www.awpa.com
(817) 326-6300
AWS
American Welding Society
www.aws.org
(800) 443-9353
(305) 443-9353
AWWA
American Water Works Association
www.awwa.org
(800) 926-7337
(303) 794-7711
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
www.buildershardware.com
(212) 297-2122
BIA
Brick Industry Association (The)
www.bia.org
(703) 620-0010
BIFMA
BIFMA International
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association International)
www.bifma.com
(616) 285-3963
CCC
Carpet Cushion Council
www.carpetcushion.org
(203) 637-1312
CCFSS
Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures
www.umr.edu/~ccfss
(573) 341-4471
CDA
Copper Development Association Inc.
www.copper.org
(800) 232-3282
(212) 251-7200
CEA
Canadian Electricity Association
www.canelect.ca
(613) 230-9263
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.
www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com
(216) 241-7333
CGA
Compressed Gas Association
www.cganet.com
(703) 788-2700
CGSB
Canadian General Standards Board
www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb
(819) 956-0425
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
www.cellulose.org
(888) 881-2462
(937) 222-2462
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
www.cisca.org
(630) 584-1919
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
www.cispi.org
(423) 892-0137
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
www.chainlinkinfo.org
(301) 596-2583
CPPA
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
(800) 510-2772
REFERENCES
(12116)
01 42 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
www.cppa-info.org
(202) 462-9607
CRI
Carpet & Rug Institute (The)
www.carpet-rug.com
(800) 882-8846
(706) 278-3176
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
www.crsi.org
(847) 517-1200
CSA
CSA International
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
www.csa-international.org
(800) 463-6727
(416) 747-4000
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute (The)
www.csinet.org
(800) 689-2900
(703) 684-0300
CSSB
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau
www.cedarbureau.org
(604) 820-7700
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
www.cti.org
(281) 583-4087
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
www.dhi.org
(703) 222-2010
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance
www.eia.org
(703) 907-7500
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
www.eifsfacts.com
(800) 294-3462
(770) 968-7945
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
www.ejma.org
(914) 332-0040
FCI
Fluid Controls Institute
www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org
(216) 241-7333
FGMA
Flat Glass Marketing Association
(See GANA)
FM
Factory Mutual System
(See FMG)
FMG
FM Global
(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)
www.fmglobal.com
(401) 275-3000
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council
www.fscoax.org
52 951 5146905
GA
Gypsum Association
www.gypsum.org
(202) 289-5440
GANA
Glass Association of North America
(Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association)
www.glasswebsite.com/gana
(785) 271-0208
REFERENCES
(12116)
01 42 00 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
GRI
Geosynthetic Research Institute
www.drexel.edu/gri
GTA
Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of
North America
(See GANA)
HI
Hydraulic Institute
www.pumps.org
(888) 786-7744
(973) 267-9700
HI
Hydronics Institute
www.gamanet.org
(908) 464-8200
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(See NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
www.hpva.org
(703) 435-2900
HPW
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
www.hpwhite.com
(410) 838-6550
IAS
International Approval Services
(See CSA)
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
www.icea.net
(770) 830-0369
ICRI
International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
www.icri.org
(847) 827-0830
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
www.iec.ch
41 22 919 02 11
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
www.ieee.org
(212) 419-7900
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
www.iesna.org
(212) 248-5000
IGCC
Insulating Glass Certification Council
www.igcc.org
(315) 646-2234
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The)
www.igmaonline.org
(613) 233-1510
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
www.iliai.com
(812) 275-4426
ISSFA
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
(702) 567-8150
I3A
International Imaging Industry Association
(Formerly: PIMA - Photographic & Imaging Manufacturers Association)
www.pima.net
(914) 698-7603
REFERENCES
(12116)
(215) 895-2343
01 42 00 - 8
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
ITS
Intertek Testing Services
www.itsglobal.com
IWS
Insect Screening Weavers Association
(Now defunct)
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
www.kcma.org
(703) 264-1690
LMA
Laminating Materials Association
(Formerly: ALA - American Laminators Association)
www.lma.org
(201) 664-2700
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute
www.lightning.org
(800) 488-6864
(847) 577-7200
LSGA
Laminated Safety Glass Association
(See GANA)
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association
www.mbma.com
(216) 241-7333
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
www.maplefloor.org
(847) 480-9138
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association
www.metalframingmfg.org
(312) 644-6610
MHIA
Material Handling Industry of America
www.mhia.org
(800) 345-1815
(704) 676-1190
MIA
Marble Institute of America
www.marble-institute.com
(614) 228-6194
ML/SFA
Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
(See SSMA)
MPI
Master Painters Institute
www.paintinfo.com
(888) 674-8937
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and
Fittings Industry Inc.
www.mss-hq.com
(703) 281-6613
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
www.naamm.org
(312) 332-0405
NAAMM
North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers
(See GANA)
NACE
NACE International
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
www.nace.org
(281) 228-6200
NAIMA
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
(703) 684-0084
REFERENCES
(12116)
(800) 345-3851
(607) 753-6711
01 42 00 - 9
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
(The)
www.naima.org
NAMI
National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc.
(304) 258-5100
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
www.nbgqa.com
(800) 557-2848
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
www.ncma.org
(703) 713-1900
NCPI
National Clay Pipe Institute
www.ncpi.org
(414) 248-9094
NCTA
National Cable & Telecommunications Association
www.ncta.com
(202) 775-3550
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
www.nebb.org
(301) 977-3698
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association
www.necanet.org
(301) 657-3110
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
www.nelma.org
(207) 829-6901
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
www.nema.org
(703) 841-3200
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
www.netaworld.org
(303) 697-8441
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
www.nfpa.org
(800) 344-3555
(617) 770-3000
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
www.nfrc.org
(301) 589-6372
NGA
National Glass Association
www.glass.org
(703) 442-4890
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
www.natlhardwood.org
(800) 933-0318
(901) 377-1818
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
www.nlga.org
(604) 524-2393
NOFMA
National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
www.nofma.org
(901) 526-5016
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
www.nrca.net
(800) 323-9545
(847) 299-9070
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
www.nrmca.org
(888) 846-7622
(301) 587-1400
REFERENCES
(12116)
01 42 00 - 10
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
NSA
National Stone Association
(See NSSGA)
NSF
NSF International
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
www.nsf.org
(800) 673-6275
(734) 769-8010
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
(Formerly: NSA - National Stone Association)
www.nssga.org
(800) 342-1415
(703) 525-8788
NTMA
National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc.
www.ntma.com
(800) 323-9736
(703) 779-1022
NWWDA
National Wood Window and Door Association
(See WDMA)
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
www.pci.org
(312) 786-0300
PDCA
Painting and Decorating Contractors of America
www.pdca.com
(800) 332-7322
(703) 359-0826
PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute
www.pdionline.org
(800) 589-8956
(508) 230-3516
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute
//pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu
(217) 333-3929
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections
www.boltcouncil.org
(800) 644-2400
(312) 670-2400
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
www.rfci.com
Contact by mail only
RIS
Redwood Inspection Service
www.calredwood.org
(888) 225-7339
(415) 382-0662
SAE
SAE International
www.sae.org
(724) 776-4841
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
www.sdi.org
(847) 462-1930
SDI
Steel Door Institute
www.steeldoor.org
(440) 899-0010
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
www.sefalabfurn.com
(516) 294-5424
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council
www.sgcc.org
(315) 646-2234
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
(See IGMA)
REFERENCES
(12116)
01 42 00 - 11
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
www.steeljoist.org
(843) 626-1995
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association
www.screenmfgassociation.org
(561) 533-0991
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association
www.smacna.org
(703) 803-2980
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the
Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
www.sprayfoam.org
(800) 523-6154
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
www.spib.org
(850) 434-2611
SPI/SPFD
Society of the Plastics Industry (The)
Spray Polyurethane Foam Division
(See SPFA)
SPRI
SPRI
(Single Ply Roofing Institute)
www.spri.org
(781) 444-0242
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America
www.ssina.com
(800) 982-0355
(202) 342-8630
SSMA
Steel Stud Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: ML/SFA - Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association)
www.ssma.com
(312) 456-5590
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
www.sspc.org
(877) 281-7772
(412) 281-2331
STI
Steel Tank Institute
www.steeltank.com
(847) 438-8265
SWI
Steel Window Institute
www.steelwindows.com
(216) 241-7333
SWRI
Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute
www.swrionline.org
(816) 472-7974
TCA
Tile Council of America, Inc.
www.tileusa.com
(864) 646-8453
TIA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
Industries Alliance
www.tiaonline.org
(703) 907-7700
TPI
Truss Plate Institute
(608) 833-5900
TPI
Turfgrass Producers International
www.turfgrasssod.org
(800) 405-8873
(847) 705-9898
REFERENCES
(12116)
01 42 00 - 12
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
www.ul.com
(800) 704-4050
(847) 272-8800
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
www.uni-bell.org
(972) 243-3902
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.
www.culturenet.ca/usitt
(800) 938-7488
(315) 463-6463
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association
www.wastec.org
(800) 424-2869
(202) 244-4700
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
www.wclib.org
(800) 283-1486
(503) 639-0651
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(See WCSC)
WCSC
Window Covering Safety Council
(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers
Association)
www.windowcoverings.org
(800) 506-4636
(212) 661-4261
WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and
Door Association)
www.wdma.com
(800) 223-2301
(847) 299-5200
WIC
Woodwork Institute of California
www.wicnet.org
(916) 372-9943
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
www.wmmpa.com
(800) 550-7889
(530) 661-9591
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
www.wwpa.org
(503) 224-3930
C.
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to
be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
BOCA
BOCA International, Inc.
(708) 7992300
www.bocai.org
CABO
Council of American Building Officials
(See ICC)
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical
(909) 5958449
Officials (The)
www.iapmo.org
ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials
REFERENCES
(12116)
(800) 28401 42 00 - 13
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
www.icbo.org
ICC
International Code Council, Inc.
4406
(562) 6990541
(703) 9314533
(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials)
www.intlcode.org
SBCCI
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
(205) 5911853
www.sbcci.org
D.
CE
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and
are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
Army Corps of Engineers
www.usace.army.mil
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission
www.cpsc.gov
(800) 638-2772
(301) 504-0990
DOC
Department of Commerce
www.doc.gov
(202) 482-2000
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
www.epa.gov
(202) 260-2090
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
www.faa.gov
(202) 366-4000
FDA
Food and Drug Administration
www.fda.gov
(888) 463-6332
GSA
General Services Administration
www.gsa.gov
(202) 708-5082
HUD
Department of Housing and Urban Development
www.hud.gov
(202) 708-1112
LBL
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
(See LBNL)
LBNL
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
www.lbl.gov
NCHRP
National Cooperative Highway Research Program
(See TRB)
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology
www.nist.gov
(301) 975-6478
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
www.osha.gov
(800) 321-6742
(202) 693-1999
REFERENCES
(12116)
(510) 486-5605
01 42 00 - 14
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
PBS
Public Building Service
(See GSA)
RUS
Rural Utilities Service
(See USDA)
(202) 720-9540
TRB
Transportation Research Board
www.nas.edu/trb
(202) 334-2934
USDA
Department of Agriculture
www.usda.gov
(202) 720-2791
USPS
Postal Service
www.usps.com
(202) 268-2000
E.
State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CAPUC (See CPUC)
CBHF
State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs
Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation
www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti
(800) 952-5210
(916) 574-2041
CPUC
California Public Utilities Commission
www.cpuc.ca.gov
(415) 703-2782
TFS
Texas Forest Service
Forest Products Laboratory
//txforestservice.tamu.edu
(936) 639-8180
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 42 00
REFERENCES
(12116)
01 42 00 - 15
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of
products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard
warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.
Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless
explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 60 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
D.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for
a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
E.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for
Owner.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names
of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each
product.
1.
2.
Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals
Schedule.
Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
Initial Submittal: Within 15 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 4
copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for
variations from Contract requirements.
a.
4.
5.
B.
Specification Section number and title.
Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
Manufacturer's name and address.
Supplier's name and address.
Installer's name and address.
Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery
date.
At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and
designations that must be established early in Contract period.
Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 4
copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and
for variations from Contract requirements.
Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt
of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product
selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack
of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the
Contract Documents.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 60 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
3.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
C.
1.5
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.
2.
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 60 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.6
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
1.7
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage.
Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document
using appropriate form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 60 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or
equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
1.
Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a
single product and manufacturer, provide the product named.
a.
2.
Manufacturer/Source:
Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by
the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.
a.
3.
6.
7.
Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers
listed that complies with requirements.
a.
5.
Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce
a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed
that complies with requirements.
a.
4.
Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available
Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of
the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with
provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed
product.
Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by
one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements.
Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an
unnamed product.
Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that
size, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product
or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 60 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
8.
product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product
Substitutions" Article.
Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Basis-of-Design Products" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of
manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by
one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes,
profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an
unnamed product.
a.
9.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and
matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed
product matches satisfactorily.
a.
10.
If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and
complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract
Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and
manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.
a.
b.
2.2
Substitutions will not be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture
from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 10 days after the
Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion
of Architect.
B.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 60 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has
been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible
with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to
other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
(12116)
01 60 00 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 01 73 10 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the
building for alterations.
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated
construction.
Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
a.
1.3
Requirements in this Section apply to fire suppression, plumbing, mechanical and
electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 26 Sections for other
requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching fire suppression,
plumbing, mechanical and electrical installations.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other Work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days
before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include
the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's
appearance and other significant visual elements.
Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
(12116)
01 73 10 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List
utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate
how long service will be disrupted.
Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity
to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Primary operational systems and equipment.
Air or smoke barriers.
Fire-protection systems.
Control systems.
Communication systems.
Electrical wiring systems.
Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
Membranes and flashings.
Exterior curtain-wall construction.
Equipment supports.
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a
visually unsatisfactory manner.
1.
If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed
below. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another
recognized, experienced, and specialized firm.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Processed concrete finishes.
Stonework and stone masonry.
Preformed metal panels.
Roofing.
Firestopping.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
(12116)
01 73 10 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
f.
g.
E.
1.6
Wall covering.
HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.
Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to
void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B.
Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1.
2.
3.2
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
(12116)
01 73 10 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
D.
3.3
Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or
abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied
areas.
PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of
other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections of these Specifications.
1.
2.
3.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of
patching and refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint
coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
(12116)
01 73 10 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
4.
5.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
END OF SECTION 01 73 10
CUTTING AND PATCHING
(12116)
01 73 10 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 01 73 20 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
2.
Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for
selective demolition operations.
Division 21 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating fire suppression
items.
Division 22 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating plumbing items.
Division 23 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property
and shall be removed from Project site.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
(12116)
01 73 20 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
B.
Proposed Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that
indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their
operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.
C.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site operations are
uninterrupted.
Interruption of utility services.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Use of elevator and stairs.
Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
D.
Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed
and salvaged.
E.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: Comply with Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
C.
Regulatory Requirements:
Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
D.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
E.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
(12116)
01 73 20 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than
72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.
B.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1.
C.
Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
D.
Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without
written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
as far as practical.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
2.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
under a separate contract.
E.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
F.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
1.8
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
1.
If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to patch the exposed Work listed below
that is damaged during selective demolition. If it is impossible to engage original Installer
or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Processed concrete finishes.
Stonework and stone masonry.
Preformed metal panels.
Roofing.
Firestopping.
Wall covering.
HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
(12116)
01 73 20 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1.
2.
B.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing
materials.
Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E.
Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing
any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
3.2
UTILITY SERVICES
A.
Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.
B.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in
writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
C.
Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during
changeover.
Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving
areas to be selectively demolished.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
(12116)
01 73 20 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding
with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective
demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.
Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
PREPARATION
A.
Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals,
gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with
selective demolition operations.
B.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
3.4
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing
regulations.
Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered
passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip
line of groups of trees to remain.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area
and to and from occupied portions of building.
Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
POLLUTION CONTROLS
A.
Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread
of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
1.
2.
Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or
objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition
enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
(12116)
01 73 20 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
1.
C.
3.5
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable
fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing
before selective demolition operations began.
B.
Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting
elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during
selective demolition operations.
C.
Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
(12116)
01 73 20 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
F.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to
remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw
cuts.
G.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
H.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
I.
Resilient Floor Coverings:
Remove floor coverings
recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum.
1.
and
adhesive
according
to
Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the
methods recommended by RFCI.
J.
Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing.
Refer to applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements.
K.
Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.
3.6
PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A.
General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition
operations.
B.
Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
C.
Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for
new materials.
1.
Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an
approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
D.
Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
E.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
(12116)
01 73 20 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
1.
2.
3.
F.
3.7
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply
with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats
over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch.
Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity
of installation.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to
accumulate on-site.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Burning: Burning of demolished materials will be permitted only at designated areas on
Owner's property, providing required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for
burning materials until fires are extinguished.
D.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's
property.
E.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.8
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE
A.
The extent of selective demolition is generally defined on the drawings. The owner reserves
the right to salvage any equipment, components or devices removed during demolition.
Demolition shall include removal of the following miscellaneous items not shown to be removed
that would otherwise be abandoned in place:
1.
2.
3.
Conduit and piping that has been disconnected.
Control wiring and devices that have been disconnected.
Pneumatic tubing that has been disconnected including pneumatic devices and control
panels.
a.
Previously abandoned conduit, wiring, tubing, piping, and devices.
END OF SECTION 01 73 20
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
(12116)
01 73 20 - 8
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Inspection procedures.
Project Record Documents.
Operation and maintenance manuals.
Warranties.
Instruction of Owner's personnel.
Final cleaning.
Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instruction of
Owner's personnel.
Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for products of those Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
and similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 77 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or
will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.4
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with construction tools,
and similar elements.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of
construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
1.5
Submit a final Application for Payment.
Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.Revise paragraph and subparagraph below to comply with office
policy and Project requirements.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and
area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first[and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 77 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.6
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents
for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1.
Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up
Record Prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are
marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where applicable.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to
indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated
in Product Data.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 77 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
2.
3.
E.
1.7
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Record Specifications, where
applicable.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals:
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other
Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual
performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for
continued use and reference.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
1.
Operation Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Maintenance Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
1.8
Emergency instructions and procedures.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend
operations.
Description of controls and sequence of operations.
Piping diagrams.
Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
Maintenance procedures.
Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
Maintenance record forms.
Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
Copies of maintenance service agreements.
Copies of warranties and bonds.
Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets.
Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 77 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
2.
3.
C.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems,
and equipment not part of a system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of
instruction, and course content.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for
each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include
instruction for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
System design and operational philosophy.
Review of documentation.
Operations.
Adjustments.
Troubleshooting.
Maintenance.
Repair.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 77 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.2
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1)
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, [elevator equipment,] and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 77 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
r.
C.
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
(12116)
01 77 00 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 00 00 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
This Section applies to all Division 23 (mechanical) work.
B.
Related Documents:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements applies to all Division 23 work.
1.2
COORDINATION BETWEEN SPECIFICATION SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Each specification section within their respective division shall be coordinated with all other
sections in that division for related work.
COORDINATION OF WORK
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Refer to the Division 1 sections for general coordination requirements applicable to the
entire work.
The contractor shall recognize that the contract documents are
diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within
the plumbing, mechanical and electrical work, and in its interface with other work
including utilities and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the
Contractor. Because the drawings are diagrammatic and on a small scale, all rises,
drops, offsets, etc., have not been shown. The Contractor shall agree to provide and
install the necessary conduit, piping, fittings, valves, ducts, and other specialties to suit
such conditions without additional cost to the Owner.
Piping and conduits, except electrical conduits run in floor construction, suspended
ceiling space, or roof space shall be run parallel with lines of the building unless
otherwise noted on drawings. Water supply pipes, where practicable, shall be placed at
same elevation and hung on multiple hangers. Electric conduits shall not be hung on
hangers with any other service, unless approved by the Engineer and shall be hung
above all other service pipes. The different service pipes, valves, fittings, and similar
items, shall be so installed that after the covering is applied there will be not less than
1/2" clear space between the finished covering and other work and between the finished
covering of parallel adjacent pipes. Hangers on different service lines running close to
and parallel with each other shall be in line with each other and parallel to the lines of the
building. Exact location of electric outlets, piping, ducts, and the like shall be coordinated
to avoid interferences between lighting fixtures, piping, ducts, and similar items.
Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange
entire mechanical and electrical work with adequate access for operation and
maintenance.
Give right-of-way to piping which must slope for drainage.
Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of
large units of plumbing, mechanical and electrical work (equipment).
Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of
the actual equipment to be connected.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
(12116)
23 00 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Coordination Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
Contract Document Discrepancies:
1.
1.4
For locations where several elements of mechanical (or combined plumbing, mechanical
and electrical) work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into
the available space, prepare coordination drawings (shop drawings) showing the actual
physical dimensions (at accurate scale) required for the installation. Prepare and submit
coordination drawings prior to purchase-fabrication-installation of any of the elements
involved in the coordination.
Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and
maintenance.
If work is required in manner to make it impossible to produce first class work, or should
discrepancies appear among contract documents, request interpretation before
proceeding with work. If Contractor fails to make such request, no excuse will thereafter
be entertained for failure to carry out work in satisfactory manner. Should conflict occur
in or between drawings, and specifications, Contractor is deemed to have estimated on
more expensive way of doing work unless he shall have asked for and obtained written
decision before submission of proposal as to method or materials required.
FEES, PERMITS, LICENSES, UTILITY CONNECTION CHARGES, AND UTILITY COST.
A.
The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all fees, permits, licenses, utility connection charges
(water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer and gas) and utility cost for services to the building
required.
B.
The Contractor shall guard against danger and use all proper means for the safety of the public.
C.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect copies of all fees, permits and licenses required for
all mechanical work herein specified before any mechanical work is started.
1.5
CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY FOR CONSULTANTS ADDITIONAL SERVICES
A.
The Consultant is entitled to compensation for additional services not included in their contract
but provided on this project. Since our contract is with the Owner or Architect, the Owner or
Architect has the responsibility to compensate us for these additional services. The Consultant
will provide, without advance authorization from the Client, the Additional Services listed below.
These services will be tracked in our office and billed to the Client upon completion of the
project. The client will in turn deduct the sum of these additional services from the contractors
final payment. The following is a list of services that have been included in our contract with the
client along with a description of services that will be charged against the contractors final
payment due to services brought about due to the contractors actions:
1.
2.
Re-submittals: The consultant has included in their contract with our Client, one (1)
review for each submittal item. The contractor is required to carefully review each
submittal from their suppliers and subcontractors for compliance with the contract
documents along with a written notice of deviations of any type prior to submitting them to
the Engineer for review. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Client for all
reasonable costs charged by the Consultant to the Client for the Additional Services
required for re-submittals.
Substitutions: The Consultant has included in their contract with our Client, incorporation
of minor changes to the contract documents to develop record documents in electronic
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
(12116)
23 00 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.
4.
5.
1.6
SINGULAR NUMBER
A.
1.7
Where any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the singular number (such as "the
pump"), such reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to
complete the installation as shown on the drawings.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
1.8
format. These changes are limited to unforeseen site conditions and clarifications to the
contract documents. Review of substitutions for compliance with the contract documents,
and services required to modify and coordinate changes required due to contractor
substitutions or deviations from the contract documents are not included in our contract
with the Client. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Client for all reasonable costs
charged by the Consultant to the Client for the Additional Services required to modify and
coordinate documents or provide field coordination due to contractor substitutions or
deviations from the contract documents.
Requests For clarification or Interpretation (RFI): The Contractor may, after exercising
due diligence to locate required information, request from the Consultant clarification or
interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Consultant shall, with
reasonable promptness, respond to such Contractor’s request for clarification or
interpretation. However, if the information requested by the Contractor is apparent from
field observations, is contained in the Contract Documents or is reasonably inferable from
them, the Contractor shall be responsible to the Client for all reasonable costs charged
by the Consultant to the Client for the Additional Services required to provide such
information.
Construction Meetings & Site Observations:
The consultant has included a
predetermined number of construction meetings and site observations in their contract
with the owner based on the anticipated construction period specified. However if
additional construction meetings and site observations are required due to the
contractors delay in completion of the project, the Contractor shall be responsible to the
Client for all reasonable costs charged by the Consultant to the Client for the Additional
Services required to attend additional construction meetings or provide additional site
observations.
Re-inspections: The contractor is responsible to prepare a final punch list for the project
and to correct all items prior to calling for a final inspection from the consultant. Upon
being notified, the consultant will then visit the site and prepare a final punch list. The
contractor is then required to correct all items on the consultants final punch list and call
for a re-inspection of the project. If all items have not been corrected, the final punch list
will be updated and additional re-inspections will be required. However if additional reinspections are required, the Contractor shall be responsible to the Client for all
reasonable costs charged by the Consultant to the Client for the Additional Services
required for the additional re-inspections.
General: During handling and installation of work at project site, each contractor shall clean and
protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply
suitable protective covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to ensure
freedom from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean and
perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary through remainder of
construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without
damaging effects.
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUALS
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
(12116)
23 00 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
1.9
Prepare and submit four (4) copies of maintenance and operation instructions for all Division 23
and Division 26 equipment furnished. Organize maintenance and operating manual information
into suitable sets of manageable size, and bind into individual binders properly identified and
indexed (thumb-tabbed). Include emergency instructions, spare parts listing, copies of
warranties, wiring diagrams, recommended "turn-around" cycles, inspection procedures, shop
drawings, product data, and similar application information. Bind each manual of each set in a
heavy-duty 2", 3-ring vinyl-covered binder, and include pocket folders for folded sheet
information. Mark identification on both front and spine of each binder.
PROJECT CLOSE OUT
A.
General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Maintain a daily
log of operational data on mechanical equipment and systems through the closeout period;
record hours of operation, assigned personnel, fuel consumption and similar information; submit
copy to Owner.
B.
Record Drawings: For Division 23 and Division 26 work, give special attention to the complete
and accurate recording of underground conduit, piping and ductwork, other concealed and
non-accessible work, branching arrangement and valve location for piping systems, locations of
dampers and coils in duct systems, locations of control system sensors and other control
devices, and work of change orders where not shown accurately by contract documents.
C.
Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of
project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate
each item of equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Owner's
operating personnel present, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and
correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each system, and
replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work.
D.
Operating Instructions: Conduct a full-day walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's
personnel to be involved in the continued operation and maintenance of mechanical equipment
and systems. Explain the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm
provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and
similar features of the systems.
E.
Turn-Over of Operation: At the time of substantial completion, turn over the prime responsibility
for operation of the mechanical equipment and systems to the Owner's operating personnel.
1.10
A.
FINAL COMPLETION
The following special requirements shall be provided in addition to these specifications
elsewhere in these specifications:
1.
The Division 23 Contractors shall not call for a final completion check until the entire
Mechanical and Electrical Equipment and Systems have been installed, adjusted,
balanced and in full and complete satisfactory operation and the following certifications of
inspection from equipment suppliers have been completed and submitted to the
Architect/Engineer. Certifications of Inspections for Division 23 Equipment are required
on the following items of equipment:
a.
b.
c.
Pumps (Local Rep)
Closed Circuit Fluid Coolers (Local Rep)
Temperature control equipment (Manufacturer)
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
(12116)
23 00 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
The Certifications shall consist of letters signed by Factory Trained and Authorized Service
Engineers stating the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.11
A.
1.12
They have inspected all of their equipment on the project.
They approve the condition of the equipment and its installation.
They have fully checked its operation and certify that it is operating properly.
They will note any problems, conditions or objections that could lead to future operating
problems.
Units shall be inspected by all concerned and certify the installation and operation of the
units and associated heating and cooling equipment. Certification to come from the local
rep and the factory.
Exceptions may be permitted upon written request from the Contractor listing any minor items
that are uncompleted and beyond his reasonable control. The full guarantee that they will be
completed at a named later date and the guarantee extended as required to provide a full
warranty.
FINAL PAYMENT
Final Payment will not be made until the Contractor has satisfactorily completed all final
inspection items.
GUARANTEE
A.
The one-year guarantee period shall not start until the project is fully completed and the
Contractor has received the Final Payment and Certification of Completion.
B.
All equipment and all work shall be fully guaranteed, parts, and labor, for one full year from the
date of the Certificate of Completion. Repairs made during this period must be fully guaranteed
for an additional one year period from the date of repairs.
C.
The Division 23 Contractor has the full responsibility to guarantee all equipment and work and
shall assume full responsibility to repair any equipment at his cost that the manufacturer refuses
to guarantee.
D.
The Owner has the right to order repairs to any equipment or work provided hereon and to
charge the Contractor for same if repairs are not made by the Contractor within a reasonable
period of time not to exceed 24 hours during an emergency or 72 hours on a non-critical item.
E.
Where equipment is furnished by the owner and installed by the contractor, the contractors
responsibilities shall remain as indicated above except that the owner will assist in enforcing the
stipulated manufacturer’s warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 23 00 00
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
(12116)
23 00 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 01 00 – MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
GENERAL
A.
Shop drawing Submittals shall comply with the requirements of Division 1, Section 01300, and
with the requirements of this Section. Shop Drawing Submittals shall include specially-prepared
technical data for this project, including drawings, diagrams, performance curves, data sheets,
schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and similar
information not in standard printed form for general application to a range of similar projects.
Performance curves shall show the full operating range of the proposed equipment
B.
Shop Drawing Submittals shall also include product data which includes standard printed
information on materials, products and systems; not specially-prepared for this project, but with
the designation of selections from among available choices for this project clearly identified.
1.3
SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination and Sequencing: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with
performance of the work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and
sequence different categories of submittals for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so
that one will not be delayed for coordination of Architect/Engineer's review with another.
B.
Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project,
date, contractor, subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from
other submittals. Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking and provide space
for Architect's/Engineer's "Action" marking. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal
and handling. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Contractor's
office will be returned by Architect/Engineer "without action".
C.
Provide Contractor's certification on form, ready for execution, stating that information submitted
complies with requirements of contract documents. Failure to fully review submittals for
compliance with contract documents may result in rejection by the Architect/Engineer requiring
re-submittal by the contractor. Contractor shall pay the Architect/Engineer for review of all resubmittals in accordance with Section 15000 “Mechanical General Provisions”.
1.4
SUBMITTAL LIST
A.
Shop drawings shall be submitted for, but not limited to, the items listed in each section of the
specifications.
Submittals, in addition to those listed, may be required by the
Architect/Engineer. The following is a summary list of submittals required for the project.
MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS
(12116)
23 01 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION
23 00 00
23 00 00
23 05 00
23 05 00
23 05 00
23 05 00
23 05 00
23 05 19
23 05 19
23 05 23
23 05 29
23 05 29
23 05 93
23 07 00
23 09 00
23 10 00
23 21 13
23 21 13
23 21 13
23 21 13
23 21 13
23 21 13
23 21 13
23 21 13
23 21 13
23 21 13
23 21 13
23 21 23
23 25 00
23 05 00
23 31 13
23 33 00
23 65 50
ITEM
DATE
RECEIVED
BY A/E
TRANSMITTAL
NO.
DATE
RETURNED
Record Drawings
Maintenance & Operations Manuals
Access Panels
Concrete Work
Fire Barrier Penetration Seals
Joint Sealers
Mechanical Identification
Meters and Fittings
Gages & Fittings
General Duty Valves
Pipe Supports
Equipment Supports
Testing, Adjusting & Balancing Report
Mechanical Insulation Materials
Electric Control System
Variable Frequency Drives
Hydronic Piping Materials
Balancing Valves & Cocks
Vent Valves
Flow Control Valves
Air Separators
Compression Tanks
Pump Suction Diffusers
Chemical Shot Feeder
Flow Switches
Pressure Relief Valves
Pressure Reducing Valves
HVAC Pumps
Water Treatment Systems
Glycol Feeders
Ductwork (Layout Drawings)
Duct Access Doors
Closed Circuit Fluid Coolers
END OF SECTION 23 01 00
MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS
(12116)
23 01 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 03 00 – ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK AND MECHANICAL
PROVISIONS OF ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Extent of electrical provisions to be provided as mechanical work and the requirements for
piping and duct work connections to equipment furnished under Division 26 is indicated in other
Division-23 sections, on drawings, and as further specified in this section.
B.
Types of work, normally recognized as electrical but provided as mechanical, specified or
partially specified in this section, include but are not necessarily limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Motors for mechanical equipment.
Starters for motors of mechanical equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be
furnished integrally with equipment.
Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of mechanical
equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment.
Furnish and install all electrical control circuit conduits and wiring and control devices
required to perform the equipment control functions as specified in Division 23, including
float control switches, flow control switches, and similar mechanical-electrical devices
provided for mechanical systems.
Electrical heating coils and similar elements in mechanical equipment.
Furnish and install capacitors for power factor correction on all mechanical equipment as
specified in other sections of this Division.
All electrical equipment provided and the wiring and installation of electrical equipment
shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Division 26.
C.
Refer to Division-23 Controls sections for control system wiring.
D.
Refer to other Division-23 sections for specific individual mechanical equipment electrical
requirements.
E.
Refer to Division-26 sections for motor starters and controls not furnished integrally with
mechanical equipment.
F.
Refer to Division-26 sections for junction boxes and disconnect switches required for motors
and other electrical units of mechanical equipment.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Coordination with Electrical Work: Wherever possible, match elements of electrical provisions
of mechanical work with similar elements of electrical work specified in Division-26 sections.
Comply with applicable requirements of Division-26 sections for electrical work of this section
which is not otherwise specified.
B.
Standards: For electrical equipment and products, comply with applicable NEMA standards,
and refer to NEMA standards for definitions of terminology herein. Comply with National
Electrical Code (NFPA 70) for workmanship and installation requirements.
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK AND
MECHANICAL PROVISIONS OF ELECTRICAL WORK
(12116)
23 03 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
C.
1.3
Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Listing, Motors of Mechanical Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Concurrently with submittal of mechanical products listing (Division 23 Section “Shop
Drawings” and Division-1 requirements), submit separate listing showing rating, power
characteristics, application (connected equipment), and general location of every motor to
be provided with mechanical work.
Submit updated information promptly when and if initial data is revised.
Include in listing of motors, notation of whether motor starter is furnished or installed
integrally with motor or equipment containing motor.
Submit thermal overload selection calculations including required selection parameters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MOTORS
A.
Manufacturer: Except where item of mechanical equipment (which otherwise complies with
requirements) must be integrally equipped with motor produced by another manufacturer,
provide motors for mechanical equipment manufactured by single one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
ABB Industrial Systems
Baldor Electric Co.
General Electric Co.
Louis Allis Div.; Litton Industrial Products, Inc.
Marathon Electric Mfg. Corp.
Magne Tek Inc.
US Electriic Motors.
Motor Characteristics: Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with
the following requirements for motors of mechanical work:
1.
2.
Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads.
Service Factor:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Minimum 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
For installation altitudes greater than 3,300 feet the effective service factor shall be
reduced to 1.0 on motors with nameplate service factors of 1.15 and greater.
Motors with nameplate Service Factors of 1.0 shall not be used for installation
altitudes greater than 3,300 feet.
Irrespective of the schedule, installed motor sizes shall be large enough so that the
driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range, but not less
than 75% of the nameplate; if a standard size does not fall within this range the next
larger NEMA standard motor size shall be used.
Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 deg C environment with maximum 50 deg C
temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation). Provide Class B
Insulation for motor ambient conditions in excess of 40 deg. C.
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK AND
MECHANICAL PROVISIONS OF ELECTRICAL WORK
(12116)
23 03 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
5.
6.
7.
8.
Starting Capability: Provide each motor capable of making starts as frequently as
indicated by automatic control system, and not less than 5 evenly time spaced starts per
hour for manually controlled motors.
Motors 1/2 horsepower and larger shall have bearings with pressure grease lubrication.
Motors connected to drive equipment by belt shall be furnished with adjustable slide rail
bases except for fractional horsepower motors which shall have slotted bases. Motor
leads shall be permanently identified and supplied with connectors.
Phases and Current Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
Motor Construction: Provide general purpose, continuous duty, premium efficiency
motors, Design "B" except "C" where required for high starting torque.
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
Provide squirrel-cage induction polyphase motors for 1 hp and larger.
Provide capacitor-start single-phase motors for 3/4 hp and smaller, except 1/6 hp
and smaller may, at equipment manufacturer's option, be split-phase type.
Coordinate current characteristics with power specified in Division-26 sections, and
with individual equipment requirements specified in other Division-23 sections.
Do not purchase motors until power characteristics available at locations of
motors, ambient conditions, and altitude have been confirmed, and until rotation
directions have been confirmed and the motor selected accordingly.
Bearings: Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals, regreasable
except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular
maintenance. Where belt drives and other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in
motor, provide bearings designed to resist thrust loading. Refer to individual
sections of Division 23 for fractional-hp light-duty motors where sleeve-type
bearings are permitted.
Enclosure Type: Except as otherwise indicated, provide open drip-proof motors for
indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and
provide guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or
building occupants. Provide weather- protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II
where not housed. Refer to individual sections of Division 23 for other enclosure
requirements. Provide motors with steel housings and bases for motors less than
5HP in size and cast iron housings and bases for motors larger than 5HP.
Aluminum housings and bases will not be permitted.
Overload Protection: Provide built-in thermal overload protection and, where
indicated, provide internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor
at starter.
Each motor shall be free from magnetic hum, designed for quiet operation.
Efficiency:
a.
b.
Provide motors with efficiency in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test Method
B.
Minimum efficiencies and power factors shall not be less than listed in the table
below for 460V, 3 phase, 1,800 rpm motors:
MOTOR SIZE
(HP)
1
1.5
2
3
1,200 RPM
PREMIUM EFFICIENCY
EFFICIENCY POWER FACTOR
(%)
(%)
82.5
64
87.5
65.5
88.5
68.5
89.5
71
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK AND
MECHANICAL PROVISIONS OF ELECTRICAL WORK
(12116)
1,800 RPM
PREMIUM EFFICIENCY
EFFICIENCY POWER FACTOR
(%)
(%)
85.5
74.5
86.5
76.5
86.5
75.5
89.5
78.5
23 03 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
MOTOR SIZE
(HP)
5
7.5
c.
11.
C.
2.2
1,200 RPM
PREMIUM EFFICIENCY
EFFICIENCY POWER FACTOR
(%)
(%)
89.5
73
91
78
1,800 RPM
PREMIUM EFFICIENCY
EFFICIENCY POWER FACTOR
(%)
(%)
89.5
81.5
91
83.5
Minimum efficiencies and power factors for motors at other voltages and speeds
for smaller than 1 HP in size shall be from the same “Energy Efficient” product line
that conforms to the above table.
Variable Speed Motors: Variable speed motors used in conjunction with variable
frequency drives shall be inverter duty type and rated for across the line starting.
Variable speed motors 5HP and larger shall have shaft grounding kits.
Name Plate: Provide metal nameplate on each motor, indicating full identification of
manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, power factor, construction, special features and similar
information.
STARTERS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES, AND WIRING
A.
Motor Starter Characteristics:
1.
2.
B.
Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet
locations shall be NEMA 3R with conduit hubs, or units in hazardous locations which
shall have NEC proper class and division.
Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the driven
equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition.
Magnetic Starters: Provide magnetic starters for motors 1 hp and larger, and for smaller motors
where interlock or automatic operation is indicted. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Hand-Off-Auto selector switch and pilot lights, properly arranged for single-speed or
multi-speed operation as indicated.
Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase.
Interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with
control requirements of Division-23 Controls sections.
Built-in 120-volt control circuit transformer, fused from line side, where service exceeds
240 volts.
Externally operated manual reset.
Undervoltage release or protection.
Monitors for phase loss or reversal: Solid-state voltage and phase-angle sensing device
which drives a SPDT electromechanical output relay.
C.
Electrical Heating Elements: Where electric resistance coils and other heating elements are
included in mechanical equipment or otherwise indicated as mechanical work, and except as
otherwise indicated, provide 120-volt units where rating is less than 2 KW, higher-voltage
single-phase units where rating is 2 KW but less than 5 KW, and higher-voltage 3-phase units
where rating is 5 KW and greater.
D.
Motor Connections:
specifically indicated.
Provide flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK AND
MECHANICAL PROVISIONS OF ELECTRICAL WORK
(12116)
23 03 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
2.3
CAPACITORS
A.
Capacitors shall be installed on all motors 1 horsepower and larger, that have an uncorrected
power factor of less than 85 percent at rated load.
B.
Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.4
Individual unit cells.
All welded steel housing.
Each capacitor internally fused.
Non-flammable synthetic liquid impregnant.
Craft tissue insulation.
Aluminum foil electrodes.
KVAR size shall be as required to correct motor power factor to 90 percent or better.
Provide disconnect switches for each capacitor.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A.
Fusible switches: fused, each phase; general duty; horsepower rated; non-teasible quick-make,
quick-break mechanism; dead front line side shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or
aluminum conductors; spring reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts;
hinged doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the "OPEN" position; arc quenchers;
capacity and characteristics as indicated.
B.
Non-fusible switches: for equipment 2 horsepower and smaller, shall be horsepower rated;
toggle switch type; quantity of poles and voltage rating as indicated. For equipment larger than
2 horsepower, switches shall be the same as fusible type.
2.5
EQUIPMENT FABRICATION
A.
2.6
General: Fabricate mechanical equipment for secure mounting of motors and other electrical
items included in work. Provide either permanent alignment of motors with equipment, or
adjustable mountings as applicable for belt drives, gear drives, special couplings and similar
indirect coupling of equipment. Provide safe, secure, durable, and removable guards for motor
drives, arranged for lubrication and similar running-maintenance without removal of guards.
CONTRACTOR COORDINATION
A.
The following information is provided as an aid to interdisciiplinary coordination. It is the general
contractors responsibility to assure that full and complete coordination of the subcontractors is
achieved to provide complete and fully operational systems.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, all motors, equipment, controls, etc. shall be furnished, set in place
and wired in accordance with the following schedule.
ITEM
Equipment Motors
Unit Mounted Motor Starters,
Contactors, and Overload Heaters
FURNISHED
BY
MC
MC
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK AND
MECHANICAL PROVISIONS OF ELECTRICAL WORK
(12116)
SET
BY
MC
MC
POWER
WIRING BY
EC
EC
CONTROL
WIRING
BY
-MC
23 03 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
FURNISHED
BY
EC
SET
BY
ITEM
Loose Motor Starters, ContacEC
tors and Overload Heaters
Fused and Unfused Disconnect
EC
EC
Switches, Thermal Overload and
Heaters
Control Relays and TransformMC
MC
ers
Thermostats and Time Switches MC
MC
Temperature Control Panels
MC
MC
Variable Speed Drives
MC
EC
Electric actuators and Solenoid
MC
MC
Valves, Damper Motors
Closed Circuit Fluid Coolers and MC
MC
Controls
Pushbutton Stations
MC
MC
MC = Mechanical Contractor
EC = Electrical Contractor
* Temperature Control Wiring Only By Mechanical Contractor
POWER
WIRING BY
EC
CONTROL
WIRING
BY
MC
EC
--
EC
MC
EC
EC
EC
MC
MC
MC
MC
MC
EC
MC
EC
EC
C.
All starters shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor unless otherwise indicated on the
preceding schedule. All starters shall be provided with three O.L. heaters, one normally-open
and one normally-closed auxiliary contact, and shall conform to NEC and NEMA requirements.
D.
Immersion temperature sensors, motorized valves, controls, etc., which are an integral part of
the mechanical equipment or directly attached to ducts, piping, equipment, etc., shall be set in
place under mechanical contract. Motor driven units which are controlled from line voltage
manual operating or start-stop switches or automatic controls such as line voltage thermostats,
float switches or time switches which operate at line voltage shall be wired for both power and
control circuit under the electrical contract. This description shall apply to equipment not
covered by 23 09 00 (Electric Control System)
E.
Factory prewired control panels and packaged HVAC units shall be provided with one power
source connection point unless noted otherwise.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's instructions,
securely anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces inherent in
mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen set
screws, except motors of 1/3 hp and less may be secured with Allen set screws on flat surface
of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts.
B.
Deliver starters and wiring devices which have not been factory- installed on equipment unit to
electrical Installer for installation.
END OF SECTION 23 03 00
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK AND
MECHANICAL PROVISIONS OF ELECTRICAL WORK
(12116)
23 03 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 05 00 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Extent of basic mechanical materials and methods work required by this section is indicated on
drawings and schedules, and/or specified in other Division-23 sections.
B.
Types of basic mechanical materials and methods specified in this section include the following:
1.
2.
Mechanical equipment nameplate data.
Selective demolition including:
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2
Nondestructive removal of materials and equipment for reuse or salvage as
indicated.
b.
Dismantling mechanical materials and equipment made obsolete by these
installations.
Miscellaneous metals for support of mechanical materials and equipment.
Joint sealers for sealing around mechanical materials and equipment; and for sealing
penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors, and foundation walls.
Access panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to mechanical materials
and equipment.
Mechanical Identification of mechanical materials and equipment.
Concrete for floor patching, equipment bases, etc.
Painting of mechanical materials and equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 1
Specification Sections, and Section 23 01 00.
B.
Product data for the following products:
1.
2.
Access panels and doors.
Joint sealers.
C.
Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood supports
and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment.
D.
Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations.
E.
Samples of joint sealer, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors
available for each product.
F.
Welder certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under "Quality Assurance" article of this Section.
G.
Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition
prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of utility services and details
for dust and noise control.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
(12116)
23 05 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
1.3
Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified in
Division 1 Section "Summary of Work."
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application of
joint sealers, access panels, and doors.
B.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
1.
C.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide access
door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL
"Building Materials Directory" for rating shown.
1.
1.4
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver joint sealer materials in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing
about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life,
curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B.
Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with the manufacturers' recommendations
to prevent their deterioration and damage.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Conditions Affecting Selective Demolition: The following project conditions apply:
1.
2.
B.
1.6
Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain. Install and maintain dust and noise
barriers to keep dirt, dust, and noise from being transmitted to adjacent areas. Remove
protection and barriers after demolition operations are complete.
Locate, identify, and protect mechanical services passing through demolition area and
serving other areas outside the demolition limits. Maintain services to areas outside
demolition limits. When services must be interrupted, install temporary services for
affected areas.
Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within
the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet
substrates.
SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate the shut-off and disconnection of utility services with the Owner and the utility
company.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
(12116)
23 05 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Notify the Architect/Engineer and Owner at least 5 days prior to commencing demolition
operations.
C.
Perform demolition in phases as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA
A.
2.2
Nameplate: For each piece of power operated mechanical equipment provide a permanent
operational data nameplate indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial
number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar
essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A.
Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36.
B.
Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.
C.
Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded.
E.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout:
Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications.
F.
Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3
Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3
boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with
AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent.
B.
Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue; thickness
as indicated, or if not indicated, not less than 15/32 inches.
2.4
JOINT SEALERS
A.
General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and
with joint substrates under conditions of service and application.
B.
Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
C.
Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types:
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
(12116)
23 05 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
2.
3.
One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other
substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint
substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous
substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and
temperature extremes.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
b.
One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
D.
"Dow Corning 786," Dow Corning Corp.
"SCS 1702 Sanitary," General Electric Co.
"863 #345 White," Pecora Corp.
"Rhodorsil 6B," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.
"Proglaze White," Tremco, Inc.
"OmniPlus," Sonneborn Building Products Div.
Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with ASTM
C 834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations
involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
"Chem-Calk N-Cure 2000," Bostic Construction Products Div.
"Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp.
"Silglaze N SCS 2501," General Electric Co.
"Silpruf SCS 2000," General Electric Co.
"864," Pecora Corp.
"Rhodorsil 5C," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.
"Spectrum 1," Tremco, Inc.
"Spectrum 2," Tremco, Inc.
"Dow Corning 795," Dow Corning Corp.
"Rhodorsil 6B," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.
"Rhodorsil 70," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.
"Omnisea," Sonneborn Building Products Div.
"Chem-Calk 100," Bostic Construction Products Div.
"Gesil N SCS 2600," General Electric Co.
"Chem-Calk 600," Bostic Construction Products Div.
"AC-2-," Pecora Corp.
"Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div.
"Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc.
FIRE BARRIER PENETRATIONS
A.
General: All cracks, voids, or holes for the passing of mechanical and electrical items through
fire rated floors, walls and ceilings and having a fire rating of 1 hour or more shall be sealed with
a fire barrier caulk, putty, or sealant. Caulk, putty, and sealant systems shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations to maintain a fire rating of 3 hours
minimum.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
(12116)
23 05 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Fire-Resistant Joint Sealers: Two-part, foamed-in-place, silicone sealant formulated for use in
through-penetration fire-stopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through
fire-rated walls and floors. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistant ratings indicated,
as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 814, by Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Fire-Resistant Caulk:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.6
"Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam," Dow Corning Corp.
"Pensil 851," General Electric Co.
“3M” CP 25 Caulk or 303 Putty
ACCESS DOORS
A.
Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with
attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously
welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
B.
Frames: 16-gauge steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit
masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling.
1.
2.
3.
C.
For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling:
1
inch-wide-exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors.
For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead.
For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing
bead, welded to perimeter of frame.
Flush Panel Doors: 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous
piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint.
1.
Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and
self-closing mechanism.
D.
Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks.
E.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.7
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Bar-Co., Inc.
J.L. Industries.
Karp Associates, Inc.
Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc.
Nystrom, Inc.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
A.
General: Manufacturer’s standard products of categories and types required for each
application as referenced in other Division 23 Sections. If more than one type is specified for
application, selection is Installer’s option, but provide one selection for each product category.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
(12116)
23 05 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Equipment nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped;
permanently fastened to equipment.
1.
2.
C.
Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating
and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data.
Location: Accessible and visible location.
Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes complying with
recommendations of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4inch-high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4-inch-high letters for access door signs and
similar operational instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Material: Fiberboard.
Material: Brass.
Stencil Paint:
Standard exterior-type stenciling enamel; black, unless otherwise
indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.
Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated for piping systems, comply with ASME A13.1 for colors.
D.
Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap on, colorcoded, complying with ASME A13.1.
E.
Pressure-Sensative Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive,
color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A13.1.
F.
Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the
following color code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Green: Cold Air.
Yellow: Hot Air.
Yellow/Green or Green: Supply Air.
Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designations recommended by ASME A13.1
Nomenclature: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
G.
Direction of airflow.
Duct service.
Duct origin.
Duct Destination.
Design cubic feet per minute.
Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resinlaminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine
subcore, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fabricate in sizes required for message.
Engrave with engraver’s standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match
equipment identification.
Punch for mechanical fastening.
Thickness: 1/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Thickness: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Thickness: 1/16 inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches long; 1/8 inch for larger units.
Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
(12116)
23 05 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
H.
Plastic Equipment Markers: Color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the following color
code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Green: Cooling equipment and components.
Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any criteria above.
For hazardous equipment, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as
possible:
a.
b.
c.
d.
8.
I.
Size: Approximate 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2
by inches for equipment.
Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
mechanical identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering,
and wording indicated for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical
systems and equipment.
1.
2.8
Name and plan number.
Equipment service.
Design capacity.
Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and rpm.
Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide
identification that indicates individual system number and service such as "Boiler No. 3,"
"Air Supply No. 1H," or "Standpipe F12."
PAINTING, FINISHING
A.
Painting of mechanical and electrical work exposed in occupied spaces, except mechanical and
electrical machine rooms and maintenance/service space; and work exposed on the exterior is
specified and performed under other divisions of these specifications.
B.
Factory finishes, shop painting, and specil protective coatings are specified in the individual
equipment specification sections.
C.
Where factory finishes are provided on equipment and no additional field painting is specified,
all marred or damaged surfaces shall be touched up or refinished so as to leave a smooth,
uniform finish at the time of final inspection.
D.
Paint inside of ductwork black, where it can be seen from occupied spaces through diffusers,
grilles or louvers (under any lighting condition).
2.9
CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT
A.
Concrete mixes shall be designed by the Contractor to produce the classes of concrete
specified below. Concrete shall be Class A for reinforced concrete and shall be designed for a
maximum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Concrete shall be class B for
nonreinforced work unless otherwise shown or specified and shall be designed for a minimum
compressive strength of 2500 psi at 28 days. Design mix computations and test data shall be
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
(12116)
23 05 00 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
submitted for approval. Maximum size aggregate shall be 3/4 inch. Exterior concrete shall have
air entrainment of 5 to 7 percent. Concrete quality, mixing, placing, of reinforcement shall
conform to American Concrete Institute Publications ACI 318 and 347. Maximum dimension of
slab between construction joints shall be 25 feet. All exposed construction joints shall be sealed
with approved joint sealant.
B.
Reinforcement: Bars shall be deformed, grade 40 billet or axle steel, or grade 50 rail steel.
Mesh shall be welded steel wire fabric with wires at right angles to each other.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and
application of joint sealers and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS
A.
Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint
sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.
B.
Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect
adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A.
General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned mechanical materials and
equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved.
B.
Materials and Equipment to be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing
mechanical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged, and deliver
materials and equipment to the location designated for storage by Owner.
C.
Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and
equipment not indicated to be salvaged.
D.
Mechanical Materials and Equipment:
following items:
1.
Inactive and obsolete piping, fittings and specialties, equipment, ductwork, controls,
fixtures, and insulation.
a.
2.
Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the
Piping and ducts embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such
materials do not interfere with new installations. Remove materials above
accessible ceilings. Drain and cap piping and ducts allowed to remain.
Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 1
Section "Cutting and Patching."
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
(12116)
23 05 00 - 8
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.4
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."
3.5
APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS
A.
General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
1.
2.
Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants.
Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint sealants.
B.
Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool
sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and
adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by
sealant manufacturer.
C.
Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other
accessory materials, to fill openings around mechanical services penetrating floors and walls, to
provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which
penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting
agency.
3.6
INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS
A.
Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and
level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.
B.
Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
3.7
INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall be supported off the floor or ground during placement of
concrete. Exposed ends of bars shall be protected with plastic caps when not working
immediately in or around the site if exposed to the public
B.
Finishing: Finishes shall be as specified below. The dusting of surfaces with cement will not be
permitted.
1.
C.
Rough Slab Finish: Slabs to receive fill and mortar setting beds shall be finished by
screeding with straightedges to bring the surface to the required finish with no coarse
aggregate visible. In addition, roof slabs and slabs to receive membrane waterproofing
shall be floated to produce a reasonably true and uniform surface and shall be slightly
steel troweled.
Curing: Immediately after placing or finishing, concrete surfaces not covered by forms shall be
protected against moisture loss for not less than seven days. Curing shall be accomplished by
moist curing, waterproof paper or polyethylene sheet curing or membrane curing. Membrane
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
(12116)
23 05 00 - 9
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
curing compound shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer. Compound shall not
be used on surfaces that are to receive any subsequent treatment that depends upon adhesion
or bonding to the concrete.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
(12116)
23 05 00 - 10
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 05 19 – METERS AND GAGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Extent of meters and gages required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in
other Division-23 sections.
B.
Types of meters and gages specific in this section include the following:
1.
Temperature Gages and Fittings.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Pressure Gages and Fittings.
a.
b.
c.
C.
1.2
Glass Thermometers.
Thermometer Wells.
Temperature Gage Connector Plugs.
Pressure Gages.
Pressure Gage Cocks.
Pressure Gage Connector Plugs.
Meters and gages furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of
equipment assembly in other Division-23 sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of meters and gages, of
types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 5 years.
B.
Codes and Standards:
1.
2.
C.
1.3
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL standards pertaining to meters and gages.
ANSI and ISA Compliance’s: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI and Instrument
Society of America (ISA) standards pertaining to construction and installation of meters
and gages.
Certification:
Provide meters and gages whose accuracies, under specified operating
conditions, are certified by manufacturer.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions
for each type of meter and gage. Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance
curves, certified where indicated. Submit meter and gage schedule showing manufacturer's
figure number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter and gage.
METERS AND GAGES
(12116)
23 05 19 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of meter and
gage. Include this data and product data in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with
requirements of Section 23 00 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Glass Thermometers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Pressure Gages:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Ametek/U.S. Gauge
Marsh Instrument Co., Unit of General Signal.
Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.
Trerice (H.O.) Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
Temperature and Pressure Gage Connector Plugs:
a.
2.2
Ernst Gage Co.
Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.
Trend Instruments, Inc.
Trerice (H.O.) Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
Peterson Engineering Co.
GLASS THERMOMETERS
A.
General: Provide glass thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed
and constructed for use in service indicated.
B.
Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9" long.
C.
Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180 degree adjustment in vertical
plane, 360 degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D.
Tube and Capillary: Organic liquid filled, magnifying lens, 1% scale range accuracy, shock
mounted.
E.
Scale: Satin faced, non-reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.
F.
Stem: Copper-plated steel, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.
G.
Range: Conform to the following:
1.
2.
o
o
o
Chilled Water: 30 F - 130 F with 1 F scale divisions.
o
o
o
Condenser Water: 30 F - 130 F with 1 F scale divisions.
METERS AND GAGES
(12116)
23 05 19 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
2.3
THERMOMETER WELLS
A.
General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to
match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping. Provide cap
nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.
B.
Manufacturer: Same as thermometers.
2.4
TEMPERATURE GAGE CONNECTOR PLUGS
A.
2.5
o
General: Provide temperature gage connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200 F.
Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with 1/2" NPT fitting, with self-sealing valve
core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly from dial
type insertion thermometer. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide
extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.
PRESSURE GAGES
A.
General: Provide pressure gages of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and
constructed for use in service indicated.
B.
Type: General use, 1% accuracy, ANSI B 40.1 grade A, phospher bronze bourdon type, bottom
connection.
C.
Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2" diameter bezel with 4 digit, 5/8” LCD digital
display.
D.
Connector: Brass with 1/4" male NPT. Provide protective syphon when used for steam service.
E.
Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
F.
Range: Conform to the following:
1.
2.
2.6
Vacuum: 30" Hg - 15 PSI.
Water: 0 - 100 PSI.
PRESSURE GAGE ISOLATION VALVES
A.
General: Provide ball valves on low pressure systems. Refer to Division 23 Sections “General
Duty Valves”.
B.
Snubber: 1/4" brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which pressure
fluid is filtered. Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating.
C.
Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gages.
2.7
PRESSURE GAGE CONNECTOR PLUGS
A.
o
General: Provide pressure gage connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200 F.
Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with 1/2" NPT fitting, with self-sealing valve
core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly from dial
METERS AND GAGES
(12116)
23 05 19 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
type insertion pressure gage. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain.
extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.
Provide
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine areas and conditions under which meters and gages are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAGES
A.
General: Install temperature gages in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read
by observer standing on floor.
B.
Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:
1.
At inlet and outlet of each closed circuit fluid cooler.
C.
Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fill well
with oil or graphite, secure cap.
D.
Temperature Gage Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at
most readable position. Secure cap.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAGES
A.
General: Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage cock, located on pipe at most
readable position.
B.
Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:
1.
2.
3.
At suction and discharge of each hydronic pump.
At discharge of each pressure reducing valve.
At inlet and outlet of closed circuit fluid coolers.
C.
Pressure Gage Cocks: Install in piping tee with snubber.
D.
Pressure Gage Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most
readable position. Secure cap.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
B.
Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked
or broken windows, repair any scratched or marred surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION 23 05 19
METERS AND GAGES
(12116)
23 05 19 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 05 23 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
This Section includes general duty valves common to most mechanical piping systems.
B.
Types of valves specified in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ball
Globe
Butterfly
Check
C.
Special purpose valves are specified in individual piping system specifications.
D.
Valves tags and charts are specified in Division-23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 1
Specifications Sections and Section 23 01 00.
B.
Product data, including body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification,
end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and
required clearances, and installation instructions.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Compliances: Comply with ASME B31.9
for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping.
B.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) Compliance:
Comply with the various MSS Standard Practices referenced.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
Protect valve ends against damage to threads, flange faces, and weld-end preps.
Set valves in best position for handling. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent
rattling; set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces; set
butterfly valves closed or slightly open; and block swing check valves in either closed or
open position.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES
(12116)
23 05 23 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Storage: Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
2.
C.
Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for
storage.
Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoor. Maintain valve temperature higher
than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valve
off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures.
Handling: Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves
to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging
points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturer: Subject to the compliance with requirements, provide valves from one of the
manufacturers listed in valve schedule.
VALVE FEATURES, GENERAL
A.
Valve Design: Rising steam or rising outside screw and yoke stems.
1.
B.
Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As scheduled and required to suit system pressures and
temperatures.
C.
Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Operators: Provide the following special operator features:
1.
2.
3.
Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn.
Lever Handles, on quarter-turn valves 6 inches and smaller, except for plug valves.
Provide plug valves with square heads; provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves.
Gear drive operators on quarter-turn valves 8 inches and larger.
E.
Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stem arranged to
receive insulation.
F.
End Connections: As indicated in the valve specifications.
1.
2.
2.3
Nonrising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of rising
stems.
Threads: Comply with ANSI B1.20.1.
Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI B16.24
for bronze valves.
BALL VALVES
GENERAL DUTY VALVES
(12116)
23 05 23 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
Ball valves - 1 Inch and Smaller: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG
pressure; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, standard (or
regular) port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout
proof steam, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide threaded ends for condenser water,
chilled water, and domestic hot and cold water service.
B.
Ball Valves - 1-1/4 Inch to 2 Inch: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG
pressure; 3-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, conventional port,
chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem,
and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide threaded ends for condenser water, chilled water, and
domestic hot and cold water service.
2.4
GLOBE VALVES
A.
Globe Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and screwed bonnet of ASTM
B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition disc, coppersilicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron
handwheel. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above where pressure requires
B.
Globe Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-85; Class 125 iron body and bolted bonnet
conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; with outside screw and yoke, bronze mounted, flanged
ends, and "Teflon" impregnated packing and two-piece backing gland assembly.
2.5
BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
2.6
Butterfly Valves - 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-67; rated at 250 psi, cast iron body
conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B. Provide valves with aluminum bronze disc, stainless steel
stem, and EPDM O-ring stem seals. Provide lever operators with adjustable index plate for
sizes 2 through 6 inches and gear operators with position indicator for sizes 8 through 24
inches. Provide lug type valves, wafer type valves will not be permitted. Drill and tap valves on
dead-end service or requiring additional body strength.
CHECK VALVES
A.
Swing Check Valves - 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast bronze body and cap
conforming to ASTM B 62, with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having
threaded or solder ends. Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve remains in
the line. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications, with threaded end
connections, where system pressure requires or Class 125 valves are not available.
B.
Swing Check Valves - 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class 125 (Class 175 FM
approved for fire protection piping systems), cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM
A 126, Class B; horizontal swing and bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring; and
flanged ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.
C.
Silent Check Valves: Class 125, cast iron body; globe style with replaceable bronze seat, and
non-slam design lapped and balanced twin bronze flappers and stainless steel trim and torsion
spring. Provide valves designed to open and close at approximately one foot differential
pressure.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES
(12116)
23 05 23 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine valve interior through the end ports, for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter and
corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used which prevents disc
movement during shipping and handling.
B.
Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally significant
features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such action. Following examination,
return the valve closure member to the shipping position.
C.
Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (i.e., out-of-round or local
indentation) and cleanliness.
D.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions which might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition
suitable for service, and for freedom from defects and damage.
E.
Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign materials,
and proper alignment.
F.
Replace defective valves with new valves.
3.2
VALVE SELECTION
A.
Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Copper Tube Size 2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded ends.
Steel Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded.
Steel Pipe Sizes 2-1/2” and Larger: Flanged.
VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A.
General Application: Use ball, and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for
throttling duty. Refer to piping system specification sections for specific valve applications and
arrangements.
B.
Provide memory stops for all valves used for throttling service.
C.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D.
Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment
removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
E.
Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling type valves.
F.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
G.
Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES
(12116)
23 05 23 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
H.
Check valves at pump discharge shall be non-slam silent check valves.
I.
Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1.
2.
3.4
THREADED CONNECTIONS
A.
Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall, to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B.
Align threads at point of assembly.
C.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal
threading is specified).
D.
Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is
being threaded.
3.5
FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A.
Align flanges surfaces parallel.
B.
Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as
flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually
and uniformly using a torque wrench.
C.
For dead end service, butterfly valves required flanges both upstream and downstream for
proper shutoff and retention.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.7
Tests: After piping system have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and
balancing, inspect valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valve if leak
persists.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
3.8
Swing Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position with hinge pin level.
Silent Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare
to receive finish painting or insulation.
VALVE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULES
VALVES - 2 INCHES AND SMALLER
SERVICE
Condenser Water
Chilled Water
GENERAL DUTY VALVES
(12116)
GLOBE
125
125
BALL
150
150
CHECK
125
125
23 05 23 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
Domestic Hot and Cold Water
125
150
GLOBE
125
125
125
BALL
200
200
200
125
VALVES - 2-1/2 INCHES AND LARGER
SERVICE
Condenser Water
Chilled Water
Domestic Hot and Cold Water
3.9
CHECK
125
125
125
VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
BALL VALVES - 1 INCH AND SMALLER
MANUFACTURER
Conbraco (Apollo)
Jomar
Nibco
Watts
REMARKS:
X – Means not available.
THREADED ENDS
77-100
T-100N
T-585-70-66
B-6080
B.
BALL VALVES – 1-1/4 INCH AND LARGER
MANUFACTURER
Conbraco (Apollo)
Jomar
Nibco
Watts
REMARKS:
X – Means not available.
THREADED ENDS
82-100
T-600-4B
T-590-Y
B-6800
C.
GLOBE VALVES - 2 INCH AND SMALLER
MANUFACTURER
Crane
Grinnell
Hammond
Jenkins
Lunkenheimer
Milwaukee
Nibco
Powell
Stockham
REMARKS:
X – Means not available.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES
(12116)
CLASS 125
THREADED
1
3210
IB440
746
2140
502
T-211-B
T-211-Y
650
B-16
CLASS 150
THREADED
17TF
3240
IB413T
106-A-2
407
590
B-22
150
B-22
23 05 23 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
D.
BUTTERFLY VALVES – 2-1/2 INCH AND LARGER
MANUFACTURER
DISC. MATERIAL
Centerline
Aluminum Bronze
Grinnell
Aluminum Bronze
Keystone
Aluminum Bronze
Nibco
Aluminum Bronze
REMARKS:
X – Means not available.
LEVER
Series 225
Or Equal
222
Or Equal
GEAR
Series 225
Or Equal
222
Or Equal
SWING CHECK VALVES - 2 INCH AND SMALLER
MANUFACTURER
Crane
Grinnell
Hammond
Jenkins
Lunkenheimer
Milwaukee
Nibco
Powell
Stockham
REMARKS:
X – Means not available.
CLASS 125
THREADED
37
3300
IB940
92-A
2144
509
T-413
578
B-319
CLASS 150
THREADED
137
3320
IB946
92-A
230-70
510
T-433
596
B-321
SWING CHECK VALVES – 2-1/2 INCH AND LARGER
MANUFACTURER
Crane
Grinnell
Hammond
Jenkins
Kennedy
Lunkenheimer
Milwaukee
Nibco
Powell
Stockham
REMARKS:
X – Means not available.
CLASS 125
373
6300A
IR1124
X
X
1790 IBBM
F2974
F-918
559
G-931
CLASS 175
X
X
X
729
FIG. 126
X
X
X
X
G-940
SILENT CHECK VALVES – 2-1/2 INCH AND LARGER
MANUFACTURER
Metraflex
Milwaukee
Mueller
GENERAL DUTY VALVES
(12116)
GLOBE STYLE
CLASS 125
105MAP
23 05 23 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
Nibco
REMARKS:
X – Means not available.
F-910
END OF SECTION 23 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES
(12116)
23 05 23 - 8
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Extent of supports and anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or
specified in other Division-23 sections.
B.
Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
1.2
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports.
Hanger-Rod Attachments.
Building Attachments.
Pipe Covering Protection Shields.
Spring Hangers and Supports.
Miscellaneous Materials.
Equipment Supports.
Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of
the equipment assembly in other Division-23 sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors,
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 5 years.
B.
Codes and Standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Code Compliance: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to product
materials and installation of supports and anchors.
ANSI/ASME B31.1 – Power Piping.
UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are UL-listed and FM approved.
MSS Standard Compliance:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.3
Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture
comply with MSS SP-58.
Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69.
Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89.
Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions
for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing
Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and
support.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
(12116)
23 05 29 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support
and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly or
components.
C.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and
anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of Section 23 00 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
Pipe Hangers and Supports
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Pipe Covering Protection Shields
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
B-Line Systems, Inc.
Carpenter and Patterson, Inc.
Corner & Lada Co., Inc.
Elcen Metal Products Co.
Fee & Mason Mfg. Co., Div. Figgie International.
ITT Grinnel Corp.
PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
Unistrut.
Elcen Metal Products Co.
Grinnel
PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
Pipe Shields, Inc.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
HORIZONTAL-PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal-piping hangers
and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by
Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service.
Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit
around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated
hangers and supports for copper-piping systems.
B.
Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1.
C.
Yoke Type Alloy Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 2.
D.
Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3.
E.
Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
(12116)
23 05 29 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
F.
Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5.
G.
Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: MSS Type 6.
H.
Single Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 41.
I.
Adjustable Steel Yoke Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43.
2.3
HANGER-ROD ATTACHMENTS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated hanger-rod attachments
complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit
horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each
piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide
copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems.
B.
Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
C.
Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14.
D.
Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.
E.
Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.
F.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
2.4
BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated building attachments
complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit
building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published
product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide
copper-plated building attachments for copper piping systems.
B.
Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19.
C.
Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20.
D.
Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21.
E.
C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.
F.
Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25.
G.
Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.
2.5
PIPE COVERING PROTECTION SHIELDS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide pipe covering protection shields under piping
hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size pipe covering protection
shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
(12116)
23 05 29 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing
of insulation.
C.
Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360 degree insert of high density, 100 PSI,
water-proofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 degree sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of
same thickness as adjoining insulation.
2.6
SPRING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated spring hangers and
supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by
Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published
product information. Use only one type of one manufacturer for each piping service. Select
spring hangers and supports to suit pipe size and loading.
B.
Restraint Control Devices: MSS Type 47.
C.
Spring Cushion Hangers: MSS Type 48.
D.
Spring Cushion Roll Hangers: MSS Type 49.
E.
Spring Sway Braces: MSS Type 50.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A36M, steel Plates, Shapes and Bars, black and galvanized.
B.
Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A183, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.
C.
Washers: ASTM F844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D.
Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B, non-shrink, nonmetallic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Characteristics include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, drying, hydraulic-cement-type
grout that is non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both
interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5,000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
Water: Potable.
Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.
Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection
systems include UL listing and FM approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
(12116)
23 05 29 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building structural
work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies
including (but not limited to) proper placement of building structural attachments.
B.
Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at
project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and
testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with work
of this section and Architect/Engineer for purpose of reviewing material selections and
procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A.
Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for proper
piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS
SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional
concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at
changes in direction of piping.
B.
Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Install according to fastener manufacturer’s written instructions. Do not use in lightweight
concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps and
attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel
runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze type
hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69.
Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers
for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire
or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
B.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and
other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install
hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
C.
Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36 steel shapes selected for loads
being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D.
Support fire protection systems piping independently of other piping.
E.
Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are
copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.
F.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of
movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops,
expansion bends and similar units.
G.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
(12116)
23 05 29 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
H.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 are not exceeded.
I.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.
1.
2.
Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting
through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.1.
Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields span an arc of 180 degrees and have dimensions in inches not less than the
following:
NPS (Inches
1/4 to 3-1/2
4
5 and 6
3.
4.
3.5
LENGTH (Inches)
12
12
18
THICKNESS (Inches)
0.048
0.060
0.060
Insert Material: Length at least as long as the protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
3.6
Provide concrete housekeeping bases for all floors mounted equipment furnished as part of the
work of Division-23. Size bases to extend minimum of 4" beyond equipment base in any
direction; and 3-1/2" above finished floor elevation. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen
floor slab beneath base for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base.
Locate anchor bolts using equipment manufacturer's templates. Chamfer top and edge
corners.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to
proper level and elevations.
3.7
PAINTING
A.
Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas
immediately after erection of hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).
B.
Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section “Painting.”
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanized-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
(12116)
23 05 29 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 05 93 – TESTING, ADJUSING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Extent of testing, adjusting, and balancing work required by this section is indicated on drawings
and schedules, and by requirements of this section; and is defined to include, but is not
necessarily limited to, hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus
of mechanical work. The work consists of setting speed and volume (flow) adjusting facilities
provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and
recommending modifications to work as required by contract documents.
B.
Component types of testing, adjusting, and balancing specified in this section includes the
following as applied to mechanical equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pumps.
Closed Circuit Fluid Coolers.
Coils and heat exchangers.
Piping systems.
C.
Refer to Division-23 sections for installation and start-up of equipment to be tested, adjusted,
and balanced.
D.
Refer to Division-23 sections for pressure testing of piping systems.
E.
Refer to Division-26 sections for electrical hook-up and wiring of equipment to be tested,
adjusted, and balanced.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Tester's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing
experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to those required for this
project, who is not Installer of system to be tested, and is otherwise independent of project.
B.
Tester's Qualifications: Firm certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) in
those testing and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this project, who is not
Installer of system to be tested and is otherwise independent of project.
C.
Tester's Qualifications: Firm certified by Associated Air Balance council (AABC) in those testing
and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this project.
D.
Codes and Standards:
1.
NEBB Compliance: Comply with NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing of Environmental Systems" as applicable to mechanical air hydronic
distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus.
2.
AABC Compliance: Comply with AABC's Manual MN-1 "AABC National Standards", as
applicable to mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems, and associated
equipment and apparatus.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
(12116)
23 05 93 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.
1.3
Industry Standards:
Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to
measurements, instruments, and testing, adjusting, and balancing, except as otherwise
indicated.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit certified test reports signed by Test and Balance Supervisor who performed TAB work.
In addition, have report certified by Professional Engineer who is familiar with TAB work and
also with project, and who is registered in jurisdiction where testing is being conducted.
B.
Include identification and types of instruments used, and their most recent calibration date with
submission of final test report.
C.
Submit biographical data on Engineer who is to directly supervise testing, adjusting, and
balancing work.
D.
Maintenance Data:
Include in maintenance manuals, copies of certified test reports,
identification of instruments, and data on Engineer; in accordance with requirements of Division
1.
1.4
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until work has been completed and
is operable. Ensure that there is not latent residual work still to be completed.
B.
Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing is clean and free from
debris, dirt and discarded building materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PATCHING MATERIALS
A.
Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching
holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes,
including access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and similar purposes.
1.
B.
2.2
At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in
ductwork and housings.
** OR **
Refer to Division-23 "Mechanical Related Work" section for patching of holes in insulation,
ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes. In each case, patching
is to be completed by original Installer.
TEST INSTRUMENTS
A.
Utilize test instruments and equipment for TAB work required, of type, precision, and capacity
as recommended in the following TAB standards:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
(12116)
23 05 93 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
NEBB's Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems.
2.
AABC's Manual MN-1 "AABC National Standards".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
At time of bid take-off, review drawings for completeness in regards to balancing operations.
Notify prospective contractors of discrepancies such as missing balancing valves, etc. upon
submittal of proposal to insure that these items are covered in his bid.
B.
Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work
has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester.
3.2
GENERAL TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
A.
3.3
Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated in accordance
with procedures outlined in applicable standards.
WATER SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A.
Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance
with procedures outlined in applicable standards, with the following minimum requirements.
B.
Preliminary checks, settings and adjustments shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass stop valves. Set mixing valve to full
coil flow.
Remove and clean strainers.
Examine the water in the system and determine if water has been treated and cleaned.
Check pump rotation.
Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and the system is
completely full of water.
Check air vents at high points of water systems and determine that all are installed and
operating freely.
Set temperature controls so coils are calling for full flow.
Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
Check and set operating temperatures of heat exchangers to design requirements.
Phase I - Water systems testing and balancing procedures shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set cooling water pumps to the proper gallon per minute delivery.
Adjust water flows through heat exchangers.
Check leaving water temperatures and return water temperatures through heat
exchangers. Reset to correct design temperature.
Check water temperatures at inlet side of cooling. Note rise or drop of temperatures from
source.
Proceed to balance each water coil.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
(12116)
23 05 93 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
6.
D.
Mark settings on valves and record data upon the completion of flow readings and
adjustments at coils.
Phase II - Water systems testing and balancing procedures shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Recheck settings at the pumps and heat exchangers and re-adjust, if required, after
adjustments are made to coils.
Install pressure gauges on coils, and read pressure drop through coil at set flow rate on
demand for full cooling. Set pressure drop across bypass valve to match coil full flow
pressure drop.
Check and record the following items at each cooling and heating element:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.4
Inlet water temperatures.
Leaving water temperatures.
Pressure drop of each coil.
GPM at each pump, coil, and heat exchanger.
Pump operating suction and discharge pressure and final total dynamic head.
List mechanical specifications of pumps.
Rated and actual running amperage of pump motor.
Check control valves for operation from full open to full closed, and record
pressures.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format
recommended by applicable standards.
B.
Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test
purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer.
C.
Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, and similar
controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with
paint or other suitable permanent identification materials.
D.
Prepare a report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances
when system cannot be successfully balanced; including, where necessary, modifications which
exceed requirements of contract documents for mechanical work.
E.
Retest, adjust and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and
resubmit test results.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
(12116)
23 05 93 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 07 00 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules,
and by requirements of this section.
B.
This section includes pipe and duct insulation.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100 degree F or higher.
B.
Dual-Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold.
C.
Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75 degree F.
D.
Thermal Resistivity: "r-values" represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value).
Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch
thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between
two exposed faces required to cause one Btu to flow through one square foot of material, in one
hour, at a given mean temperature.
E.
Density: Is expressed in lb/sq.ft.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
each type of mechanical insulation.
B.
Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, and furnished
accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation
including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or
other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label
insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory.
1.
2.
1.5
Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50
or less.
Exterior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of
150 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
MECHANICAL INSULATION
(12116)
23 07 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with
manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products.
B.
Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.
1.6
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after testing of piping and duct systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Glass Fiber:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
CertainTeed Corporation.
Knauf Fiberglass GmbH.
Manville.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.
USG Interiors, Inc. - Thermafiber Division.
GLASS FIBER
A.
Material: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin.
B.
Jacket: All-purpose, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber- reinforced, flame-retardant kraft
paper and aluminum foil having self-sealing lap.
C.
Board: ASTM C 612, Class 2, semi-rigid jacketed board.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, jacketed.
1.
2.
E.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 average maximum at 75 degree F mean temperature.
Density: 10 average maximum.
Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and Follow-up service.
1.
2.
F.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 average maximum, at 75 degree F mean temperature.
Density: 12 pcf average maximum.
o
Maximum Temperature Use: 400 F.
Type: Non-flammable, solvent-based.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 degree F.
Vapor Barrier Coating:
outside service.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
(12116)
Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for
23 07 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
2.3
INSULATING CEMENTS
A.
Mineral Fiber: ASTM C 195.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Mineral Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C 449.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Thermal Conductivity: 1.0 average maximum at 500 degree F mean temperature.
Compressive Strength: 10 psi at 5 percent deformation.
o
o
Temperature Use Range: 100 F to 1600 F.
Thermal Conductivity: 1.2 average maximum at 400 degree F mean temperature.
Compressive Strength: 100 psi at 5 percent deformation.
o
o
Temperature Use Range: 100 F to 1200 F.
ADHESIVES
A.
Lagging Adhesive:
Grades:
1.
2.
2.5
MIL-A-3316C, non-flammable adhesive in the following Classes and
Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass fiber insulation,
sealing edges of glass fiber insulation, and bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass fiber
insulation.
Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
FIELD APPLIED JACKETS
A.
General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated for field applied jackets.
B.
Foil and Paper Jacket:
aluminum foil.
1.
2.
C.
Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum, when tested according to ASTM E 96.
Puncture Resistance: 50 beach units minimum, when tested according to ASTM D 781.
PVC Fitting Covers:
Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil-thick,
high-impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC.
1.
2.6
Laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A.
Glass Cloth and Tape: Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 ounces
per sq. yd.
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Tape Width: 4 inches.
Cloth Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type I.
Tape Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type II.
SEALING COMPOUNDS
A.
Vapor Barrier Compound: Water-based, fire-resistive composition.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
(12116)
23 07 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
2.
Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perm maximum.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 degree F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale, and dirt.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Refer to schedules on the drawings for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each mechanical system.
B.
Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that
do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.
C.
Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts, and equipment having surface operating
temperatures below 60 degree F.
D.
Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
E.
Install insulation with smooth, straight, and even surfaces.
F.
Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.
G.
Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a
vapor barrier.
H.
Seal Ends: Taper ends at 45 degree angle and seal with lagging adhesive.
I.
Apply adhesives and coatings at manufacturer's recommended coverage-per-gallon rate.
J.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
K.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.3
Flexible connectors for ducts and pipes.
Vibration control devices.
Testing laboratory labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Access panels and doors in air distribution systems.
Piping specialties including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves,
and flow regulators.
PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
(12116)
23 07 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Stagger joints on double layers of insulation.
C.
Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves, and specialties, except as otherwise
indicated.
D.
Apply insulation with a minimum number of joints.
E.
Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Pull jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, at least 3-inches wide, and of same material
as insulation jacket. Secure with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both
edges of butt strip and space 4 inches on center.
Longitudinal Seams: Overlap seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches on center.
a.
4.
5.
6.
Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation applied to piping systems
with surface temperatures at or below 35 degree F.
Vapor Barrier Coatings: Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply on seams and joints,
over staples, and at ends butt to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with
vapor barrier coating.
Repair damaged insulation jackets, except metal jackets, by applying jacket material
around damaged jacket. Adhere, staple, and seal. Extend patch at least 2 inches in both
directions beyond damaged insulation jacket and around the entire circumference of the
pipe.
F.
Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions. Apply an aluminum jacket with factory-applied
moisture barrier over insulation. Extend 2 inches from both surfaces of wall or partition. Secure
aluminum jacket with metal bands at both ends. Seal ends of jacket with vapor barrier coating.
Seal around penetration with joint sealer. Refer to Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods”.
G.
Flanges, Fittings, and Valves - Interior Exposed and Concealed: Coat pipe insulation ends with
vapor barrier coating. Apply premolded, precut, or field-fabricated segments of insulation
around flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. Make joints tight. Bond with adhesive.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H.
Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation.
Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches or 1-pipe diameter, which ever is greater.
Apply materials with adhesive, fill voids with mineral fiber insulating cement. Secure with
wire or tape.
Insulate elbows and tees smaller than 3-inches pipe size with premolded insulation.
Insulate elbows and tees 3 inches and larger with premolded insulation or insulation
material segments. Use at least 3 segments for each elbow.
Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with PVC fitting covers and seal
circumferential joints with butt strips.
Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments. Install saddles, shields, and inserts as specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers
and Supports." For cold surface piping, extend insulation on anchor legs a minimum of 12
inches and taper and seal insulation ends.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
(12116)
23 07 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
3.4
Inserts and Shields: Cover hanger inserts and shields with jacket material matching
adjacent pipe insulation.
GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Bond insulation to pipe with lagging adhesive.
B.
Seal exposed ends with lagging adhesive.
C.
Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound.
3.5
DUCT INSULATION
A.
Install block and board insulation as follows:
1.
2.
3.6
Adhesive and Band Attachment: Secure block and board insulation tight and smooth
with at least 50 percent coverage of adhesive. Install bands spaced 12 inches apart.
Protect insulation under bands and at exterior corners with metal corner angles. Fill
joints, seams, and chipped edges with vapor barrier compound.
Speed Washers Attachment: Secure insulation tight and smooth with speed washers
and welded pins. Space anchor pins 12 inches apart each way and 2 inches from
insulation joints. Apply vapor barrier coating compound to insulation in contact, open
joints, breaks, punctures, and voids in insulation.
FIELD APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Foil and Paper Jackets (FP): Install jackets drawn tight. Install lap or butt strips at joints with
material same as jacket. Secure with adhesive. Install jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at
longitudinal joints and 3-inch-wide butt strips at end joints.
1.
3.7
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor barrier jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor barrier compound.
FINISHES
A.
3.8
Paint finished insulation as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
APPLICATIONS
A.
General: Materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules on the drawings.
B.
Interior, Exposed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping
systems:
1.
C.
Hydronic piping (35 to 99 degree F).
Interior, Concealed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping
systems:
1.
Hydronic piping (35 to 99 degree F).
MECHANICAL INSULATION
(12116)
23 07 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
D.
Duct Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following duct systems:
1.
3.9
Interior exposed and concealed outside air and discharge air from closed circuit fluid
coolers.
PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULES
A.
General: Abbreviations used in the following schedules include:
1.
2.
3.10
A.
3.11
Field-Applied Jackets: P - PVC, K - Foil and Paper.
Pipe Sizes: NPS - Nominal Pipe Size.
EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR
Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, where damaged or removed for
new connections. Use insulation of same thickness as existing insulation, install new jacket
lapping and sealed over existing.
PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A.
Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor
barrier damage and moisture saturated units.
B.
Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work
during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.
END OF SECTION 23 07 00
MECHANICAL INSULATION
(12116)
23 07 00 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 09 00 – ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The General provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special
Conditions, the Owner's policy concerning the Executive Order Compliance and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. Subcontractor must familiarize
himself with the terms of the above documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Refer to paragraph "Acceptable Manufacturers" for acceptable pre-qualified temperature control
sub-contractors for the work specified in this section.
B.
Installers Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in electric control system
installations for not less than 5 years.
C.
Codes and Standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products (line voltage) which have been tested,
listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA standards.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and
devices for electric control systems.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems” where applicable to controls and control
sequences.
NEMA EMC1 - Energy Management Systems Definitions.
ASME MC85.1 - Terminology for Automatic Control.
NEMA ICS1 - Industrial Control and Systems.
UL Compliance: Provide control system listed under UL 916 for Control of Mechanical
Systems and Temperature Regulating Systems.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Provide all controls and instrumentation work necessary for the construction of the project as
indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. Such work includes, but is not limited to the
following:
1.
2.
B.
The system of electronic temperature controls utilizing microprocessor-based digital
controllers shall include all controlled equipment as shown on drawings, herein specified,
and as shown on point list.
Provide control and interface panels and all necessary transducers, EPU's, relays,
switches and other devices for the complete control system as specified herein.
The work included under this section of the specifications and drawings includes the complete
installation of an electronic temperature control system utilizing digital controllers.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
C.
The point list identifies those points that are to be addressed by the digital controller and
incorporated into the new electronic, stand-alone temperature control system.
D.
The system of automatic temperature control shall be furnished and installed as required for
proper control of the HVAC equipment and shall include the furnishing and installation of all
equipment materials and labor necessary for or reasonably incidental to the complete control
system, and if shown but not specified or if specified but not shown shall be provided as though
delineated in both specifications and drawings.
E.
The contractor is to furnish and install a complete temperature control system including all
necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the
control sequences of operation as called for in this specification.
F.
The contractor is to obtain and pay for all necessary construction permits and licenses.
G.
The Drawings and Specifications are not intended to show all details. The Contractor is to
secure satisfactory information before submitting the proposal and include in the proposal a
sum sufficient to cover all items of labor and material required for the complete installation of the
devices and systems described.
H.
All work performed under this Section of the Specification shall comply with all codes, laws and
governing bodies. If the Drawings and/or Specifications are in conflict with governing codes, the
Contractor shall submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code
restrictions.
If this Specification and associated drawings exceeds governing code
requirements, this Specification shall govern.
I.
The Contractor shall execute his work in such a manner as to minimize down time and prevent
delays in the scheduled completion date.
1.4
COORDINATED WORK
A.
This Contractor shall cooperate with other contractors performing work on this project as
necessary to achieve a complete neatly fitted installation for each condition. To that end, each
contractor shall consult the drawings and specifications for all trades to determine nature and
extent of others' work.
B.
It shall be the duty of the Contractor to work in cooperation with the owner and other contractors
and so arranging his work that the entire project will be delivered complete in the best possible
condition by the scheduled completion date.
1.5
CLEAN-UP
A.
This Contractor shall maintain the premises in an orderly fashion at all times during the
construction period. He shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc., as soon as their
contents have been removed and he shall also remove all debris, caused by his work daily. All
cartons, debris, etc., shall be removed from the site and premises at the sole expense of the
Contractor.
B.
At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall clean all of his work, equipment, etc., free
from dust, etc., and leave the work in good housekeeping fashion in a manner acceptable to the
Owner.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for both the hardware and applications software to be
utilized in the temperature control system. The following is a minimum submittal requirement:
1.
Hardware:
a.
b.
Include a complete bill of material of equipment used indicating quantity,
manufacturer and model number and other relevant technical data.
Include manufacturer's description and technical data, such as, performance
curves, product specification sheets and installation/maintenance instructions for
the items listed and other items relevant but not listed below:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
c.
d.
e.
2.
Provide complete coded interconnection wiring diagrams for each electrically
operated piece of equipment. Show all termination and wiring numbers.
Provide schematic wiring diagrams for each control panel. Show all terminations
and wiring numbers.
Provide schematic wiring diagrams for all field sensors and controllers.
Software:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Digital Controller
D/A and A/D Converters
Power Supply
Sensors
Batteries
Relays/Switches
Control Panels
Flow Switches
Provide a complete description of the applications programming language and
instructions on how to program and reprogram any portion of the system.
Provide programming flow diagrams of the applications software.
Include a complete description of the operation of the temperature control system
including sequences of operation.
Provide line-by-line applications software utilized to accomplish the control
strategies called for in this specification.
Provide the control loop algorithms/calculations proposed.
Provide a digital controller point list including both inputs and outputs indicating I/O
point number, the controlled device associated with the I/O point and the location
of the I/O device.
Provide other documentation not listed above if deemed necessary by the Owner
or Engineer to enable understanding of the applications software and algorithms
proposed for proper functioning of the control system.
General:
a.
b.
c.
No construction may begin until shop drawings are approved by the Engineer for
conformity with the plan and specification design intent.
Quantities of items submitted will not be reviewed by the Engineer, and is the
responsibility of the Contractor.
When manufacturers cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific
product, the data specifically applicable to the project will be highlighted or clearly
indicated by other means.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
d.
B.
Construction Record Documents: At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit
three (3) revised signed and certified sets of documents as construction record documents.
Construction record documents should include significant departures from the Contractor's
originally approved documents or the Engineer's documents.
1.
2.
C.
Construction record documents to be submitted are those listed under shop drawings
pertaining to both hardware and software.
Construction record documents for software also requires that the Contractor supply to
the Owner the project software in storage on written/paper form and on floppy disc.
Operating and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: Three (3) O&M manuals shall be submitted for
approval and shall include the following, at a minimum, bound in three (3) ring hardback binders
after system acceptance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
Provide to the Engineer any additional information or data which the Engineer
deems necessary to determine compliance with these specifications or which he
deems valuable to the Owner in documenting the system to be installed.
Names, addresses and telephone numbers of Contractors installing equipment and
systems and the service representative for the system.
Shop drawing hardware and software submittals as well as construction record
documentation if not duplication of shop drawing submittals.
Complete descriptions on the maintenance of all system components including sensors,
controllers, actuators, etc.
The descriptions shall include inspection, periodic
preventative maintenance suggestions, system/component failure and diagnosis and the
procedure for repair or replacement of defective components.
Definitions of terms utilized where applicable and necessary for complete Owner
understanding of the installed system.
START-UP/TESTING
A.
Prior to testing and verifying proper system operation, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner
and Engineer, for acceptance, two (2) copies each of the start-up/testing procedure proposed.
The Owner and Engineer must approve the check-out procedure prior to start-up/testing.
B.
Submittal of the start-up/testing procedure must be submitted one (1) calendar month prior to
the projected construction completion date.
C.
After the procedure is approved and after installation is complete and systems are ready to be
placed in regular service, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of this fact in writing.
D.
On the start-up date, the Contractor will have on-site qualified field technicians to place the
system in operation, making such tests, adjustments and changes as may be found necessary
to insure successful operation of the equipment and systems.
E.
The Contractor is to test and verify proper operation for each control loop.
F.
Each control loop check will verify that the digital controller, watch dog circuit, automatic/manual
switch, fail-safe control and electric interlocks are operating as intended to accomplish the
control strategy.
G.
Sensor calibrating/operation will be tested to verify that they are operating and within the
performance parameters established in this specification.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
H.
Each input and output shall be checked to verify that correct terminations/designations of I/O
are in place.
I.
Communications to the digital controller shall be tested and verified that it is in working order.
1.
2.
On-site dial-up communications to the digital controller will be tested as well as on-site
communications to the controller.
Dial-out communications by the digital controller shall be tested to verify that the digital
controller is able to initiate and establish communications with a designated terminal offsite for exception reporting/alarms.
J.
Proper operation of all on-site operator interface hardware shall be tested to verify proper
operation.
K.
Downloading of applications programs will be tested both from on-site and off-site locations to
verify proper operation of downloading procedure.
L.
Reports/trend logs will be retrieved to verify proper operation/format.
M.
All tests will be documented by the Contractor and certified verifying that the tests have been
performed and that all deficiencies have been corrected.
1.
N.
1.8
All testing must be performed and all deficiencies corrected to the Owners satisfaction.
At the end of the start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactory to the
Owner and Engineer, the Owner shall sign certificate certifying that the systems operation has
been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. The date of
Owner's acceptance shall be the start of guaranty.
GUARANTY
A.
The control systems specified shall be guaranteed free from defects, workmanship and material
under conditions for a period of fifteen (15) months after acceptance by the Owner. Any
equipment herein described proven to be defective in workmanship or material during
guarantee period shall be adjusted, repaired or replaced at no charge to the Owner.
B.
During the guarantee period, software updates/digital controller improvements, i.e.,
microprocessor chip changes, shall be provided to the Owner at no charge. Written
authorization by the Owner must, however, be granted prior to the software or digital controller
hardware updates.
C.
The Contractor shall submit an alternate price for an extended service agreement after the end
of the one-year warranty. Contract shall include parts, labor, and software. An escalation
percentage shall be included for an additional four years.
1.9
TRAINING
A.
Within one (1) week after the temperature control systems has been accepted by the Owner,
the Contractor will provide a minimum of two (2) hours of training at the site of the Installation
for Owner designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of the system installed.
Training sessions shall be limited to four hours per day and two days per week.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
The Instructor(s) shall be competent and have full knowledge of the system installed and will
provide training specifically oriented to the Owner's installed system.
C.
The training shall utilize the operating and maintenance manual provided for the system as the
reference manual and the training will include, at a minimum, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Description of the overall control system configuration and physical layout indicating
location of all sensors and controlled devices.
Description of the control strategies being utilized at the installation.
Description of all the key hardware components utilized in the system.
Instructions on how to communicate with (command and monitor) the systems digital
controller.
Description of the programming instructions required to use the system.
Description of the requirements to retrieve alarm and trend log formats and how to react
to alarm conditions.
Description of diagnostic trouble-shooting techniques for the entire system.
Prior to final turnover of the system to Owner, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of two (2)
hours training on the actual installation for the Owner's personnel. Specifically, detailed
description of the system shall be given to the building's operating personnel, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric control system of one
of the following:
1.
2.2
Delta Controls.
GENERAL
A.
The function of this section is to establish a minimum quality of hardware to be provided, a
minimum quality of installation and to establish equipment or equipment configurations to be
utilized for standardization.
B.
All work installed by the temperature control contractor shall be done in a neat and workmanlike
manner as determined by the Owner, and acceptable standards for this type of work.
C.
The temperature control contractor will provide hardware as specified to meet all system
performance requirements. Should hardware be required to meet the specified system
performance which is not specified herein, the contractor shall follow procedures established in
the General Conditions.
D.
Where two (2) or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be
products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the
products of a single manufacturer.
E.
The digital controller system materials and installation will be addressed in three sections:
1.
2.
System Controller.
Field Equipment.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.
2.3
Wiring.
ARCHITECTURE
A.
Diagram shown on the drawings shows the major hardware components which will form the
digital control system. This diagram is included for clarification purposes only and is not
intended to dictate a specific control system configuration.
B.
The following terms, when used in this section, will be as defined here.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Digital Controller:
A microprocessor-based controller supplied by an approved
manufacturer. The term digital controller will be used to designate a package of
equipment as supplied by the manufacturer.
System Controller: A digital controller plus asociated equipment. The term system
controller will be used to designate a specific group of equipment which will be supplied
either as part of the digital controller package or supplied independently to meet the
system controller specification.
Field Equipment: Equipment through which the system controller will interface with the
facilities environmental, mechanical, and electrical systems.
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
A.
General:
1.
2.
The temperature control contractor will supply a system controller which is capable of
meeting or exceeding the performance requirements as specified under this section.
The temperature control contractor will supply a sufficient number of system controllers to
meet the input/output capacity requirements and shall supply a sufficient number of
system controllers such that none is overloaded from a control standpoint.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Overloaded is defined as a condition where the system controller cannot update all
input values, calculate control outputs and execute all control within five (5)
seconds.
Supply a dedicated 120 volt/1 phase, 20 amp circuit to power the system controller.
Provide a service disconnect at the system controller. Provide surge protection for the
power circuit.
The system controller shall be enclosed in a rigid enclosure, with baked enamel finish,
hinged access door and keyed latch. Digital controllers meeting this criteria may be
directly mounted.
When the digital controller qualifies for direct mounting, remaining components to
complete the system controller shall be mounted in the field interface panel.
When the digital controller is to be mounted in a contractor supplied enclosure, all
components classified under system controller shall be mounted in a common enclosure.
The system controller shall be labeled using one inch plastic engraved tags. Every
component forming the system controller shall be labeled using 1/2 inch plastic
embossed tags. Every termination within the system controller shall be labeled with
mechanically fabricated or mechanically printed letters, numbers, etc., which exactly
corresponds to as-built drawings.
Enclosure:
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
C.
The contractor supplied enclosure shall be of rigid construction with baked enamel finish,
NEMA Type 1, have a hinged door with keyed lock. The enclosure shall be sized for
twenty (20) percent spare mounting space. The lock shall be keyed consistent with the
field interface panels.
Digital Controller:
1.
2.
The digital controller shall be supplied by a pre-approved manufacturer and shall be of
the designation, model or type listed.
These units shall be the latest version available including the most updated software and
hardware offered by the manufacturers and shall include:
a.
b.
c.
Network/Global Control Unit.
Application Specific Controllers (ASC) - all VAV terminal units, air handling units,
hot water system, chilled water system, etc..
IBM PS/2 software:
1)
2)
d.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Network monitoring terminal.
Network/Global controller through which all other digital controllers communicate shall
maintain full communication to all other controllers and the network monitoring terminal at
all times.
Network/Global Control Unit: A 16 bit microprocessor based controller providing a
multitasking/multi-user operating system. The complete software library for this project
shall reside in the ROM memory of the controller. All programming including applications
programs, defined functions, and point database shall be protected from loss due to
power failure with non-volatile memory. Modifications to the software database shall be
accomplished while the controller is on-line. Controllers shall utilize true floating point
arithmetic capabilities. Units with input/output capabilities may be utilized as an
Application Specific Controller (ASC) in addition to its network supervision requirements.
Units shall have a built-in keypad/terminal or shall be provided with a portable terminal for
program modification. All units shall be UL listed under UL 916 for control of mechanical
systems and temperature regulating systems.
Application Specific Controller: An Application Specific Controller shall be a 16 bit
microprocessor based standalone DDC controller capable of monitoring and controlling
all input and output points of a specific system. An ASC shall be capable of performing
its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network.
Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data
base and shall directly interface to a portable service terminal. All programming including
application programs, defined functions, and point database shall be protected from loss
due to power failure with non-volatile memory. Multiple ASC's shall not be used to
control a single system unless they communicate through a true Peer-Peer
communications protocal in which loss of communication between them and the
Network/Global controller does not cause loss of communication between ASC's. The
minimum communication rate between ASC's and Network/Global controllers shall be
9600 Baud.
Processor Speed: The minimum acceptable processor speed for direct digital controllers
shall be as follows:
a.
b.
7.
Standard machine third party interface
Graphic programming language
Network/Global Controllers - 8MHz.
Application Specific Controllers - 5MHz.
Input/Output Electrical Protection:
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 8
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
a.
b.
8.
All analog inputs/outputs and digital inputs and outputs shall be protected at
minimum to withstand 120 volts AC continuously without damage to the digital
controller.
This includes any input/output supplied whether or not it will be utilized in meeting
this specification.
Field Input/Output:
a.
Provide, at minimum, digital input, digital output, analog input, and analog output
point capacity as follows:
1)
2)
9.
Memory:
a.
10.
11.
b.
c.
When this power supply may create problem heat for the digital controller, it may be
mounted in the field interface panel or separately in it's own enclosure.
Battery Backup:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Network/Global controllers shall communicate with each other and the network
monitoring terminal through a Local Area Network.
Network/Global controller shall have a serial communication port for off site access
which shall be EIA RS232C compatible.
Network/Global controller shall have a serial or parallel communication port for
printer alarm reporting which shall be EIA RS232C or RS422 compatible.
Digital Controller Power Supply:
1.
E.
The microprocessor-based digital controllers shall contain both random access
memory (RAM) and read only memory (ROM). All the operating programs
(systems' monitor) for the digital controller shall be ROM or PROM, i.e., memory
resident operating system. Application software programs and strategies to
accomplish the desired sequence of operation and other requirements shall be
random access memory (RAM) resident. Bulk storage devices such as disks,
tapes, etc., shall not be allowed/used in an interactive "on-line" mode.
Provide a sufficient memory capacity for all applications programs specified in this
Section plus 100 percent future growth.
Communications Section:
a.
D.
Basic requirements: Per input/output summary.
Spare capacity: 1 from each block of eight.
Provide battery backup to the memory and real time clock such that a loss of house
service power of up to 24 hours will not cause any program loss or loss of the time. The
battery shall be rechargeable and automatically be recharged after a power outage.
Provide circuitry to eliminate erratic operation due to low battery charge, sensing battery
performance to execute an orderly shutdown before the electronic minimum operating
point is reached.
Upon restoration of power, the system controller will automatically resume its operating
functions.
System Integrity Checks:
1.
The digital controller will have circuitry to continuously check for system integrity. This
will include such items as hardware/software checks and watch dog timers. Should the
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 9
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
digital controller fail any of these integrity checks, all controller outputs will go to a failsafe
value.
2.5
FIELD EQUIPMENT
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
All field interface devices, where practical, will be mounted in the field interface panel. All
other field interface devices will be mounted at the point of field interface in a separate
enclosure suitable for the location.
When the manufacturer provides an
enclosure/packaging of the device or sensor which protects the device from dust,
moisture, conceals integral wiring and moving parts, this enclosure will be acceptable.
Every field interface device and every field termination will be labeled using words, letters
or numbers with permanent mechanically fabricated or printed tags exactly corresponding
to as-built drawings.
Field Interface Panel:
1.
General:
a.
b.
2.
Enclosure:
a.
3.
b.
All wiring to and from the field interface panel will be to screw type terminals.
Analog or communications wiring may use the field interface panel as a raceway
without terminating.
All wiring within the field interface panel will be run in plastic wiring duct to give a
neat and workmanlike appearance.
Output Status:
a.
b.
5.
Supply an enclosure of all steel construction with baked enamel finish, NEMA,
Type 1 rated with a hinged type door and keyed lock or equivalent rigid
construction. The enclosure shall be sized for twenty (20) percent spare mounting
space.
Terminations:
a.
4.
Mounted within the field interface panel will be power supplies for sensors,
interfacing relays and contactors, output point logic override for safety pneumatic
to electric and electric to pneumatic transducers, output status indication, etc.
Where shown on the plans, the field interface panel will be firmly attached to a
permanent wall or it shall be freestanding.
Every output shall have a visual indication of it's status. Binary outputs will use a
light emitting diode (LED). Electrical analog outputs will use either a voltmeter or
ammeter. Pneumatic analog outputs will use an air gauge.
All output status indication will be amounted in a common location within the field
interface panel on a sub-panel. Provide sufficient room for all used and all spare
outputs. Each output will be properly labeled.
Pulse Width Modulation to Continuous Analog Output:
a.
Where called for, provide equipment to convert a binary output from pulse width
modulation to a continuous analog signal. Binary to electric will be through the use
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 10
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
of a stepping motor potentiometer arrangement. Binary to pneumatic will be
through the use of a pulsed feed and bleed solenoids.
C.
Analog Inputs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The temperature control contractor shall provide equipment for analog sensing as
indicated in the point list. This will include the sensor, signal conditioning equipment and
wiring.
Sensors and signal conditioning equipment provided shall be of the type which are
universally accepted in the industry, can easily be second sourced and could be utilized
with the majority of Digital Controller manufacturer's equipment.
Transducers may be supplied as an integral unit with the field sensor, mounted
separately from the sensor, in a field interface panel or be packaged as part of the Digital
Controller providing specified sensing accuracy is achieved. All transducers shall be
calibrateable.
Transduced analog signals shall be of one of the following forms: 4-20 MA, 0-5V, or 010V. Frequency modulated signals will not be allowed.
a.
5.
Exception: Direct thermister input to the Digital Controller for A to D conversion
and software linearization will be acceptable.
Sensor and transducer selection shall be appropriate for the duty and mounting location
including but not limited to the following items:
a.
The sensor/transducer will be appropriately packaged for the location.
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
The sensor/transducer will be appropriately selected to withstand ambient
conditions.
1)
2)
3)
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Architectural housing for space wall mounting.
Weatherproof/sunshield housing for outside mounting.
Thermal well housing for water applications.
Dust and physical protective housing for duct mounting.
Moisture or condensation where it is a factor.
Vibration from ductwork, equipment, etc.
Reasonably expected transient conditions such as temperatures, pressures,
humidities, etc., outside the normal sensing range.
The sensor/transducer will be appropriately selected to most closely match the
expected sensing range.
The system shall maintain the specified end-to-end accuracy throughout the
warranty period from sensor to Digital Controller read-out.
Temperature Sensors: Temperature sensors will be by the use of thermistors or
RTD's. Thermocouples or solid state temperature sensors will not be allowed.
Space temperature applications with a range of 50 to 120 degrees F. within plus or
minus 0.5 degrees F. Sensor shall have built in built-in setpoint potentiometer.
Water temperature applications with a range of 30 to 100 degrees F. within plus or
minus 0.5 degrees F; the range of 100 to 250 degrees F within plus or minus 1.0
degrees F; and applications for the purpose of performing BTU calculations using
differential temperatures to within plus or minus 0.15 degrees F.
Conductivity Sensor/Transmitter(Condenser Water System):
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 11
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1)
2)
3)
D.
Analog Outputs:
1.
2.
3.
E.
The temperature control contractor shall provide equipment for analog outputs as
indicated in the point list. This will include digital to analog conversion and wiring or
pneumatic tubing to the controlled device. When required, the analog output signal must
be fed back as an analog input. When hardware feedback is not required, the output will
be software estimated.
All controlled devices which are to be modulated are to receive analog signals of one of
the following forms: 4-20 MA, 0-5V, 0-10 volt or 0-20 psi.
Digital to analog converters shall be packaged as part of the digital controller and have a
minimum resolution of 8 bits plus sign for 256 levels of control.
Digital Inputs:
1.
2.
The temperature control contractor shall provide equipment for digital inputs as indicated
in the point list.
All digital inputs will be electrically isolated from the digital controller either by optical
isolation or relays.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Sensor: Electrodeless type sensor with a 0-5,000 microSiemens/cm
measuring range and 32-250 degree F automatic temperature
compensation referenced to 77 degrees F. Sensor shall be electrically
isolated with a polypropylene casing. The sensor shall be of the convertible
style threaded into a bushing for pipe tee mounting.
Transmitter: 4-20 milliamp transmitter in NEMA 4X PVC case suitable for
urface or pipe mounting with 3” diameter dual scale analog meter
(conductivity and 4-20 mA output). Unit shall have integral calibration
controls with a .07 percent of span sensitivity and repeatability, 1.25 percent
of span non-linearity, .005 percent of span/°C temperature drift, .15 percent
of span/24 hours non-cumulative stability and a response time of 5 seconds.
Accessories: Provide 2” PVC tee with union, viton-o-ring, aluminum junction
box, and manufacturers standard sensor and interconnect cables.
When relays are used, transient suppression shall be placed across the relay
contacts.
All digital inputs will be provided by dry contacts single pole double throw. The contacts
will be wired normally open or normally closed as required.
Pulse Accumulation: For pulse accumulation, provide a buffed input port which will
totalize pulses between interrogations. The pulse accumulator shall accept rates up to
ten (10) pulses per second.
Pressure Switches: Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of plus or minus
one (1) percent of their operating range and shall withstand up to 150 percent of rated
pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube. Switch actuation shall be
adjustable over the operating pressure range. Switch shall have a snap-action SPDT
contact rated for the application. Switch contacts shall be wiping contacts and shall have
adjustable differential setting. Differential pressure switches shall be Dwyer 1630 Series
with Operating ranges between 0.05 to 12 inches, W.C.
Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for the application, with SPDT
contacts, enclosed in a dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contact
with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. All control relays shall have a
LED status indicator light.
Digital Outputs:
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 12
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
2.
The temperature control contractor shall provide equipment for digital outputs as
indicated in the point list.
All digital outputs will be electrically isolated from the digital controller either by optical
isolation or relays.
a.
3.
4.
G.
When relays are used, transient suppression shall be placed across the coils.
All digital outputs will be provided by dry contacts single pole double throw. The contacts
will be wired normally open or normally closed as required.
Equipment Start/Stop: Equipment on/off control shall use either momentary relays or
magnetic latching relays as appropriate for the equipment control starter.
Controlled Devices:
1.
Control Valves: Provide factory-fabricated electrical control valves of type, body material
and pressure class indicated. Where type or body material is not indicated, provide
selection as determined by manufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class,
based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system. Except as
otherwise indicated, provide valves which mate and match material of connecting piping.
Equip control valves with control valve motors, and with proper shutoff ratings for each
individual application.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Dampers: Provide automatic control dampers as indicated, with damper frames not less
than formed 13 ga galvanized steel. Maximum damper section size shall be 48"x72" with
larger damper installed in sections with appropriate jack shafting. Provide mounting
holes for enclosed duct mounting. Provide damper blades not less than formed 16 ga
galvanized steel, with maximum blade width of 8". Equip dampers with motors, with
proper rating for each application.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Water Service Valves: Equal percentage characteristics with range of 50 to 1, and
maximum full flow pressure drop of 5 PSIG.
Valve Trim and Stems: Polished stainless steel.
Packing: Spring-loaded Teflon, self-adjusting.
Secure blades to 1/2" diameter zinc-plated axles using zinc- plated hardware.
Seal off against spring stainless steel blade bearings. Provide blade bearings of
nylon and provide thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Construct blade
linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass. Submit leakage and flow
characteristic, plus size schedule for controlled dampers.
o
o
Operating Temperature Range: From -20 F to 200 F.
For standard applications, provide parallel or opposed blade design. For
proportional or modulating control applications, provide opposed blade design. For
mixing applications, provide parallel blade design. Dampers shall be designed to
operate in systems having velocities up to 3,000 FPM and shall have stainless
steel seals along top, bottom and sides of frame and butyl rubber seals along each
blade. Dampers shall be rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm/sq. ft. of damper
area, at differential pressure of 4" w.g. when damper is being held by a torque of
5.0 inch-pounds.
Dampers and Valve Motors: Size each motor to operate dampers or valves with
sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as
specified.
a.
Provide permanent split-capacitor or shaded pole type motors with gear trains
completely oil-immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors, where indicated
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 13
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
b.
c.
4.
Butterfly Valve Actuators: Heavy duty direct mounted quarter-turn actuator consisting of
baseplate/housing, electric drive train, and control interface. Actuators shall be sized for
the required valve torque up to 17,700Lb-in.
a.
b.
c.
d.
H.
Baseplate/Housing: Cast iron baseplate, anodized EXPC aluminum alloy AC-4430
with epoxy powder coat finish. Housing shall be NEMA 4x and shall consist of two
separate enclosures, one for the drive train and electronics and one for
termination.
Drive Train: Permanently grease lubricated epicyclical gear train with high grade
alloy steel work gears, self locking mechanism, NBR or fluorosilicon O-rings,
adjustable mechanical travel stops, manual override, and visual mechanical
position indicator. Motor shall accept 24-240V power with integral speed control
independently adjustable in open and closing directions, integral high temperature
thermostat, torque limit switches adjustable from 40-100% of rated torque and anticondensation heaters.
Control Input/Output Interface: 2-Position or Analog control modules with 4-20mA
input signal, 4-20mA output from absolute encoder position feedback, four SPST
end switches with normally open and normally closed latching contacts for fully
open and fully closed valve position. End switch contacts shall be rated for
5Amps. Provide open or closed feedback status on 2-position valves and analog
feedback on modulating valves.
Basis of Design: Keystone EPI2, no substitutions allowed.
Contactors, Relays, and Switches:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
on drawings or in operational sequence, with integral spiralspring mechanism.
Furnish entire spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for
service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback
potentiometer.
Motors for outdoor locations shall be completely weatherproof, and capable of
o
normal operation at -20 F.
Actuators may be of the push-pull or rotating type for either modulating or
two-positioning control. Actuators shall stroke by a rotating motion of an
overload-proof synchronous motor. Control voltage shall be either 24V AC or
0-20V DC as required by the application.
Electric Contactors: Provide contactors for operating or limit- control of electric heating
loads which are UL-listed for 100,000 cycles of resistive loads. Equip with replaceable
molded coils and replaceable silver cadmium oxide contacts. Coat core laminations with
heat-resistant inorganic firm to reduce core losses. Provide line and load terminals on
contactors with higher-than-35-amp rating, or provide one-piece formed-and-welded
pressure type. Provide screw-type contactors for 35-amp-or-lower rating. Equip
field-mounted contactors with suitable steel enclosures; and provide open-type mounting
for those installed in factory- fabricated panels.
Water Flow Switches: Provide water flow switches of stainless steel or bronze paddle
types. Where flow switches are used in chilled water application, provide vapor-proof
type to prevent condensation of electrical switch. Provide pressure-flow switches of
bellows actuated mercury type or snap-acting type, with appropriate scale range and
differential adjustment for service indicated.
Flow switches shall be of the paddle type equipped with SPDT contacts to establish proof
of flow. Flow switches shall be of the vapor proof type similar to a McDonnel Miller
FSS-V.
WIRING
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 14
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
All devices in the digital temperature control panel or remote shall be final connected under this
Section.
B.
Wire:
1.
2.
General:
a.
All power wiring, class 1, 2 or 3 wiring and communications wiring required for
satisfactory installation and operations of all equipment required on this project for
the section of work specified under temperature control shall be supplied and
installed by the Temperature Control Contractor (TCC).
Exception: When specifically specified to be provided by another trade.
All wiring shall be installed in accordance to wiring specifications found in Division
26 and those found in this section.
Note: Should any discrepancy be found between wiring specifications in this Division 23 and Division 26, wiring requirements of Division 23 will prevail for work
specified in Division 23.
b.
All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable electrical codes and
shall comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
Exception: When specifically specified materials or installation methods exceed
applicable electrical codes and equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
c.
d.
The TCC shall be responsible for all required permits for his work.
Provide a commercial telephone connection to the Network/Global controller.
Raceway System:
a.
b.
c.
3.
All wiring shall be installed in a complete conduit raceway system of a minimum
trade size of 1/2 inch. Conduit shall be installed continuous from terminal to
terminal and shall be mechanically and electrically connected. The entire system
shall be grounded.
Conduits passing from the building exterior to interior or passing between
conditioned and non-conditioned spaces shall be sealed to prevent condensation
in the conduit.
Conduits crossing building-expansion joints shall be provided with expansion
fittings and flexible grounded bonds by-passing the fittings to insure ground
continuity.
Wire and Cable
a.
All wire shall be copper and meet the minimum wire size and insulation class
listed.
Wire Class
Min. Wire Size
Min. Insulation Class
Power
12 Gauge
600 Volt
Class One
14 Gauge
600 Volt
Class Two
18 Gauge Stranded
300 Volt
Class Three
18 Gauge Stranded
300 Volt
Communications
Per Manufacturer
Per Manufacturer
b.
Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and
Three wiring and communications wiring may be run in the same conduit. Power
and Class One may not be run together with Class Two and Three or communications.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 15
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
c.
d.
e.
f.
Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain
clearances and install barriers per NEC.
All sensor wiring shall have a 100 percent grounded shield.
All sensor wiring shall use crimped or soldered connections. Wire nuts are not
allowed.
Conduit, in finished areas, shall be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums,
furred spaces and wall construction.
Exception: Metallic surface raceway may be used in finished areas on masonry
walls. All surface raceway in finished areas must be color matched to the existing
finish within the limitations of standard manufactured colors.
Note: Finished areas include offices, hallways, restrooms, etc.
g.
Conduit, in non-finished areas where possible, shall be concealed in ceiling cavity
spaces, plenums, furred spaces and wall construction. Exposed conduit shall run
parallel to or at right angles to the building structure.
Note: Non-finished areas include equipment rooms; such as HVAC equipment,
telephone equipment, batteries, work shops, janitorial closets, etc.
h.
Identify all control/signal wires with labeling tape using either words, letters or
numbers that can be exactly cross-referenced with as-built drawings.
Pull spare control cables as noted on drawings.
i.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
The temperature control contractor will supply an approved digital controller complete with all
required hardware and software to meet the minimum requirements specified for each of the
four areas of performance.
1.
2.
3.
B.
In meeting these performance specifications, the temperature control contractor will provide a
total system of a configuration.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Building system control.
Alarming/monitoring.
Data collection and formatting.
Compatible with good industry practice.
Composed of components meeting minimum hardware quality specified.
Compatible with specified system architecture.
BUILDING SYSTEM CONTROL
A.
Hardware:
1.
2.
Provide all hardware required to meet the control strategies and performance described
in this section.
Provide control inputs and outputs as checked and noted, and as shown on the
input/output summary forms. These include:
a.
1 form for the closed circuit fluid cooler.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 16
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.
4.
5.
6.
For each input point, provide required field hardware of the type described in this
specification and interface to the system controller.
For each output, provide a controlled device as required and as described in this
specification to allow for proper control of the point.
Upon detection of a digital controller failure, outputs will default to a failsafe value.
Each output loop will consist of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Primary Controller: An approved digital controller including all software to meet
system performance requirements.
Watch'Dog Circuit Decision: A means of detecting digital controller failure.
Failsafe: The default control output when a control loop component fails or power
is lost. The concept of failsafe shall be followed through each component of the
control loop.
Automatic/Manual Circuit Decision: A means whereby automatic control can be
overridden by operating personnel.
1)
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
Provide an automatic/manual switch for each digital output.
Output Indication: Each digital output of the system controller will have visual
status of the control level to the operator through the use of a light source. Each
analog output of the system controller will have visual status of the control level to
the operator through the use of meters or gauges.
Electrical Interlocks for all control - Safety type interlocks. Including but not limited
to smoke control, fire shutdown, freeze thermostats, safety included by equipment
manufacturer, etc.
Controlled Device: Field equipment required for proper control of an output point.
Primary Feedback: Control feedback specifically to the digital controller and listed
in the input/output summary.
Building Temperature Control Software:
1.
General:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Provide all software required to meet the control strategies and performance
described in this section.
All software shall be turned over to the Owner complete and ready for operation.
All operator entered parameters shall be entered as shown. When not indicated,
submit a written request for values to the engineer.
The format that is used to present the software requirements is only a means of
conveying the required information as simply and concise as possible. Software
need only meet the performance requirements.
Applications software may be contractor generated or factory generated and may
be stored in RAM or ROM type memory. Factory or contractor generated software
shall be such that contractor or owner can modify programmed sequences with
knowledge of the appropriate password. When factory supplied programs are
supplied in ROM which do not meet or exceed these specifications, they will be
abandoned and new programs will need to be written and supplied by the
contractor.
Use, at minimum, all of the program inputs specified for each application program.
Where the specified program inputs are not available, provide a "default" value to
replace the missing input, thus maintaining the integrity of the algorithm used.
Where operator parameters are required, they shall need to only be entered once.
They shall be easily examined with a simple command and easily modified using a
simple command.
Control Equation:
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 17
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
a.
C.
3.3
The digital controller output response will be generated by a software-based
control equation in which any combination of inputs, user entered parameters, or
the outputs of other software-based control equation can serve as input variables.
All control outputs will be of one of the following forms:
1.
Two State Control: Will be used when that which is to be controlled (in a closed loop
control this is what we are sensing for feedback) is only to be in one of two states. The
output of the system controller will either be a maximum value or zero.
Example: Exhaust Fan
Desired Fan Status On-Off (Digital)
Possible Fan Status On-Off (Digital)
Control Signal Two State
2.
Proportional Plus Integral Control: Will be used when that which is to be controlled (in a
closed loop control this is what we are sensing for feedback) can be at any value from
zero to maximum and the controlled device can be at any position or output value from
zero to maximum. The output of the system controller will be proportional to the control
loop input plus a constant times the summation of the control error between the setpoint
and actual, over a time period.
Example: Heating Valve
Desired Output 0-100% (Analog)
Possible Output 0-100% (Analog)
Control Signal PI
3.
Pulse Width Modulation: Will be used when that which is to be controlled (in a closed
loop control this is what we are sensing for feedback) can be any value from zero to
maximum but the controlled device can only be a zero or maximum value. The output of
the system controller will be at maximum for a percentage of some cycle time. This
percentage will be proportional to the control loop input plus a constant times the
summation of the control error between the setpoint and actual over time. Include
minimum on and off times when rapid equipment cycling could be detrimental to
equipment.
Example: Single State Electric Heat
Desired Output 0-100% (Analog)
Possible Output On-Off (Digital)
Control Signal PWM
MONITOR/ALARM-INPUT/OUTPUT
A.
The temperature control contractor will provide both the hardware and software required to
monitor points listed in the input/output summary.
B.
Provide software as described in this section completely programmed such that when turned
over to the Owner, all alarming functions will be available to the Owner without additional
programming.
C.
Upon the input of a simple command, the operator will be able to examine the status or value of
any input/output. All analog values examined will be in correct engineering units and all binary
inputs/outputs will be indicated as open/closed, on/off, low/high, etc.
D.
Each analog input point will be assigned maximum and minimum operating or expected value.
When the sensed variable exceeds the assigned operating range, an alarm will be generated.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 18
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
E.
The commanded state of each binary output will be compared to the actual state. If these are
not the same, an alarm will be generated. Time delays will be provided as required to prevent
false alarms.
F.
Alarms shall be classified as either critical or informational.
G.
Critical alarms will output in the following manner.
1.
2.
3.
H.
3.4
The digital controller will dial out to a designated phone number after being
acknowledged by a terminal. A printed alarm message will be sent to the designated
terminal giving time, date, location and alarm description. This message shall consist of
up to fifty (50) characters.
A similar alarm message to that sent off site will appear on the local access terminal.
A binary output will energize a light and horn located at the field interface panel. A
silence switch shall be provided for the horn. The alarm will only be manually reset. If
reset and the silence switch is on, the horn will be activated until the silence switch is
returned to its normal position.
Both critical and information alarms will be stored in memory and will be available through an
operator command.
DATA COLLECTION AND FORMATTING
A.
The temperature control contractor will provide both the hardware and software required to
provide operator logs.
B.
Provide software as described in this section completely programmed such that when turned
over to the Owner, these logs will be available to the Owner without additional programming.
1.
Point Summary: Will print out every currently programmed point showing:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
The descriptive name.
Current analog value or current digital state.
Trend Log: Set up a trend log for every input and output point to record, at minimum, the
last thirty (30) values. Time intervals shall initially all be set at two (2) minutes; however,
they may be user changeable up to one (1) hour.
Alarm Log: Set up an alarm log which will print the last thirty (30) alarms giving time,
date, description and location.
Daily Report: Set up a software program which will be able to initiate any alarm log, trend
log, or point summary on a time programmed weekly basis. Allow for up to four (4)
reports per day. Preceded report with time and date.
CONTROL STRATEGY
A.
The program or software that will initiate the remote enunciation through a dial-up arrangement
shall be configured to allow the Network/Global controller or the temperature control computer
to automatically, without operator assistance, dial the remote terminal in a pre-programmed
sequence. In case the first try fails, the Network/Global controller or the temperature control
computer will keep on trying to communicate with the remote terminal until the alarm report is
received and/or acknowledged automatically by the remote terminal.
During this
communication activity, other temperature control functions and activities of the Network/Global
controller shall not be affected and shall continue to function and operate on a real time basis.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 19
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
Additionally, all or any current and/or pending alarm condition(s) detected and sensed, shall not
affect the current and/or programmed activities of the Network/Global controller with regards to
other control, monitoring and/or alarm functions. The Network/Global controller shall continue
to execute and/or implement all software and programs loaded into it irrespective of whether an
alarm condition(s) is detected, or whether the Network/Global controller is trying to automatically
communicate with a remote terminal. The computer will continue to communicate and report
until the report or data has been received by the remote terminal.
B.
It will be the responsibility of the temperature control contractor to provide the following:
1.
2.
Temperature control programs to accomplish the desired sequence of operation as
indicated. These computer programs shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer for
approval with the hardware submittals. The responsibility will remain with the temperature control contractor to modify the program to accomplish the desired sequence of
operation.
The new digital temperature control panel shall be:
a.
b.
C.
3.6
Completely user programmable and setpoints alterable; user programmable to
mean allowing the user to completely alter and/or change operating strategies,
program and/or software algorithms, operating programs and setpoints.
Remotely accessible through a voice grade telephone line on a dial-up basis by
using regular RS232C, ASCII "Dumb" terminal with printer and CRT. All
programming and program modifications shall be by the dial-up telephone link at
9600 baud signaling speed. Programming should also be done through the local
Operator Interface terminal provided under this section of the specifications, and
remotely thru a remote terminal.
The temperature control contractor shall provide the programs or software necessary to
implement all sequence of operations, methods, alarm programs, etc., needed in this project.
APPLICATION PROGRAMS: PROVIDE SOFTWARE TO ACCOMPLISH THE FOLLOWING
A.
Perform all functions specified in the I/O summary tables by use of the appropriate application
programs.
1.
2.
Program Inputs: Use all of the program inputs specified for each application program to
calculate the specified program output(s). Where the specific program inputs are not
available (no status indication called for in the I/O summary table), provide a "default"
value to place the missing input, thus maintaining the integrity of the algorithm used.
Analog Commands:
a.
b.
3.
4.
Setpoint Adjustment: using an AO or DO in conjunction with an AI signal from the
sensed media, achieve changes in operating setpoints via electric transducers
actuators.
Position Adjustment: Provide position adjustment as specified by using an AO or
DO in conjunction with an AI signal from a controlled device to close the control
loop.
Analog Monitoring: The system shall measure all analog values specified in the I/O
summary tables including calculated analog points, and shall express analog values in
proper engineering units with sign.
Data Environment Restart: Provide a DE restart program based on detection of power
failure. Upon restoration of power to the DE, restart all equipment and restore all loads to
the state at time of power failure or to the state as commanded by time programs or other
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 20
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
overriding programs. Provide appropriate time delays to prevent demand surges or
overload trips.
Failure Mode: Provide a "watch-dog" timer function for detection of failures. Upon
detection of system failure, force all outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with the
control device interfacing with the DE.
Device Operation: All control devices connected to the system shall have memory
resident constraints checked before each command or CPA is issued to insure that no
equipment damage will result from improper operation.
Time Programs: Time programs shall automatically be initiated based on pre-established
time schedules for those items specified. Provide capacity to control on/off and event
initiation times for each day of the week (Monday through Sunday). Provide an additional
time program(s) for holidays. To eliminate power surges, the system shall enter an
adjustable time delay between consecutive start commands generated by the time program for electrical loads over 20 horsepower or 50 kw.
Event Programs: Event programs shall be manually or automatically initiated based on
events, either hardware or software derived.
Scheduled Start/Stop Program: Provide software to start and stop equipment based on
the time of day and day of week including holidays. The program shall monitor the
controlled equipment status to verify that the start and stop command has been carried
out (and provide the system with an alarm when the equipment does not start or stop,
fails, or is locally started or stopped). The schedule start/stop program shall operate in
conjunction and be coordinated with optimum start/stop, day/night setback, ventilation/recirculation and lighting control programs. The software requirements are:
a.
Program Inputs:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Program Outputs:
1)
2)
10.
Day of week.
Time of day.
Summer or winter operation.
Equipment constraints.
Start signal.
Stop signal.
Systems Reports: The system shall be capable of outputting reports through its own
communications channel to a compatible terminal directly connected to its
communications port and to a remotely located compatible ASCII terminal, i.e. Teletype
43 keyboard/CRT/printer, either singly or in combination or Texas Instruments "Silent
700" printer/keyboard combination through telephone automatic dial-up capability. This
reporting capability shall be upon operator request from the direct connected or remotely
located compatible terminal, or when triggered by pre-programmed events or times as
described in the various sequence of operations. All reports from the system whether
activated automatically or in response to an operator request from a remote compatible
ASCII terminal shall be preceded by an approved identification scheme followed by the
text of report. As a minimum, these reports shall consist of the following:
a.
Every 3-hour readings of all input and output points in the system during occupied
times only. The initial 3-hour time span between all input and output points scans
shall be fully changeable/alterable to other time spans by software or program
modification. The readings shall be whatever sensed conditions, i.e. temperatures,
on/off status, humidity, enthalpy, refrigeration, etc., at each respective points
identified in the system. All reporting shall be done automatically without operator
assistance. If during the time of reporting the remote terminal is communicating
with other temperature control systems homing into the same terminal, the
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 21
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
b.
temperature control system shall initiate a pre-programmed sequence to keep on
calling/communicating until the information/report is transmitted and receipt
acknowledged by the remote terminal.
History Report: Upon operator request from a remote compatible ASCII terminal
or keyboard, provide a record of the following:
1)
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Input/Output Reports: Print the value or state of a specified input and/or output
and/or group of inputs and/or outputs in standard engineering units as may be
applicable. The particular input and/or output shall be fully identified in the report.
Alarm Reports: Print an english language - based message(s) indicating the
occurrence of pre-programmed alarm condition(s). The message(s) shall be fully
changeable and/or alterable by software modifications in its entirety. Each alarm
message shall consist of a minimum of 50 ASCII characters.
Error Report: Print a historical record of errors encountered in running the required
self-test diagnostics and a record of power interruptions.
Over-ride Reports: Print a listing of those inputs and outputs that are currently
overridden. The listing shall contain overrides due to use of the output hand-offauto switches as well as overrides initiated via the operators terminal.
Trace: Print a record of the operation of given control sequence.
System Integrity Tests: The unit shall continuously perform discrete tests to verify
the performance of its CPU and memory (both RAM and ROM). These tests shall
be performed in background and shall determine whether a fault has occurred.
These shall include:
1)
2)
3)
i.
j.
Highest and lowest sensed value from all points over the operating time of
the temperature control system.
Performance checks on the CPU.
Correctness of data/programs stored in ROM.
Correctness of application programs stored in RAM.
ROM Check: This background test shall validate check sums maintained for each
2K of ROM. If an error is detected, it shall be logged.
RAM Integrity Checks: As each drum control decision is processed, it shall be
checked to insure data validity before execution of a control decision. If an error is
detected, the condition shall be logged and the line exempted from further
processing.
END OF SECTION 23 09 00
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(12116)
23 09 00 - 22
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 10 00 – VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Variable frequency drives shall be provided by the Building Automation System contractor and
installed by the Electrical contractor.
B.
Extent of variable frequency drives work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by
requirements of this section for the following equipment:
1.
2.
C.
The variable frequency drives for this project shall be of the following type:
1.
Pulse Width Modulation
D.
Refer to other Division-23 sections for motors, pumps, air handling equipment, and controls not
factory installed.
E.
Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work:
1.
F.
1.2
Power wiring for unit.
Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of
Division-26 sections.
1.
Control and interlock wiring between operating controls, indicating devices, unit
temperature control panels and variable frequency drive.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of variable frequency
drives, of types and capacities required, where products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Installer's Qualifications: A firm specializing and experienced in variable frequency drive
installations for not less than 5 years.
C.
Codes and Standards:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Closed circuit fluid cooler (C-15) fans (Provide with electronic bypass).
Hydronic Pumps (C-4D1 & 2) (Provide without electronic bypass).
Electrical Standards: Provide electrical components of variable frequency drives which
have been UL-listed and labeled, and comply with NEC standards.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and
devices.
ETL Compliance: Provide variable frequency drives with ETL approved label.
SUBMITTALS
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
(12116)
23 10 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of
selected model clearly indicated, weights, furnished specialties and accessories; and installation
and start-up instructions.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
C.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring for
variable frequency drives. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and
control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and
portions to be field installed.
D.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each variable frequency drive,
control, and accessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data and
product data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Section 23 00 00.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handle variable frequency drives carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring.
Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.
B.
Store variable frequency drives in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,
construction debris, and physical damage.
C.
Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading variable frequency
drives and moving units to final location for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of Design Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide variable
frequency drives of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
ASEA Brown Boveri (Model ACH550).
Graham Company
Toshiba
Yaskawa.
GENERAL
A.
Establish requirements for variable voltage variable frequency motor controls, for speed control
of fans, blowers, or pumps driven with AC motors.
B.
Contractor shall coordinate exact locations of all motors controlled from a pulse width
modulated VFD and provide motor with Class F insulation rating.
2.3
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROL
A.
Pulse Width Modulation VFD:
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
(12116)
23 10 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
The controller shall produce an adjustable AC voltage/frequency output. It should have
an output voltage regulator to maintain correct output V/Hz. despite incoming voltage
variations.
The controller shall have a continuous output current rating of 100% of motor nameplate
current.
The VFD shall be of the Pulse-Width Modulated type and shall consist of a full-wave
diode bridge converter to convert incoming fixed voltage/frequency/ to a fixed DC voltage.
The inverter output shall be generated by power transistors or IGBT's (isolated gate
bipolar transistors).
The logic control section shall be microprocessor based.
SPECIFICATION
A.
Verify power input requirements with drawings.
1.
2.
Nominal input voltage +/-10%
Input frequency stability +/-5%
B.
Provide minimum 3% Line Reactor.
C.
Output power; 3 phase, 1.5 to 60 Hz with variable voltage to give proper and efficient operation
of variable torque load.
D.
Overload capacity of 125% for 1 minute.
E.
Displacement power factor - Minimum of 90% over the entire speed range.
F.
VFD shall be rated for HP rating indicated on drawings. Additionally amp rating shall not be
less than National Electrical Code, Table 430-150 for corresponding HP size indicated. HP and
current ratings noted above shall be minimum values after any/all derating factors such as
frequency, etc. have been applied.
2.5
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTROL OPERATION
A.
Fused input door interlocked disconnect.
B.
Isolated 115VAC control transformer.
A.
Operator Interface: Provide detachable multifunction control panel with full graphic LCD display
and multiple language capability. Control panel shall have a green power on and red fault LED
indicators, and shall display fault indication, operational parameters, and time clock functions.
The control panel shall contain a keypad to scroll through and set or display operational
parameters. Operator interface shall include Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) selector switch.
B.
Annunciated fault and limit functions for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Thermal overload relay trip
Microprocessor self-check function
Output overcurrent trip
DC bus overvoltage trip
Inverse time overload trip
Heat sink overtemperature trip
DC bus fuse open
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
(12116)
23 10 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
2.6
DC bus overvoltage (regen. limit)
Output ground fault
Inverter ready light
Inverter run light
Bypass run light
Bypass safety lockout light (red)
Inverter safety lockout light (red)
Power line on light
Control voltage enabled light
MINIMUM REQUIRED STANDARD FEATURES
A.
Where indicated, VFD’s shall be provided with a bypass to allow operation of motor(s) across
the line.
B.
Provide fused disconnect integral to enclosure on load side of VFD’s with integral electronic
bypass. Disconnect shall be capable of being locked in the open position.
C.
Provide fused input disconnect switch or circuit breaker on line side of VFD and also on line
side of Bypass supply for VFD’s with external bypass. Disconnect shall be capable of being
locked in the open position.
D.
Provide fused disconnect for each motor when one VFD serves more than one motor. Provide
overload relays for each motor.
E.
Door Mounted Components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Inverter run indication
Bypass run indication
Remote safety indication
Digital speed (frequency or percent speed) and motor ammeter
Manual speed potentiometer
Inverter / Off / Bypass switch
Reset push-button for fault and enable
Manual / Auto reference selector switch
Annunciation as in Section 2.04
F.
DC bus charged indicator
G.
Current limit circuit active to prevent nuisance tripping during accel or run conditions.
H.
Regeneration limit circuit active to prevent nuisance OV tripping during deceleration.
I.
Minimum and maximum speed set, separate and non-interactive.
J.
Power loss restart selectable for Auto Restart in auto mode only.
1.
Automatic restart from undervoltage, power failure, or control fault, or both.
K.
Critical frequency lockout for up to 2 points, available from 10 to 100% speed with at least a 6
Hz bandwidth.
L.
Only non-filament type indicating lights may be used.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
(12116)
23 10 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
M.
Control shall survive without component failure, and annunciate, output phase to phase and
phase to ground faults.
N.
The VFD shall be provided with one of the following three (3) resident serial communications
protocols to allow integration to the Building Automation System (BAS):
1.
Serial Communications protocols:
a.
b.
c.
O.
Johnson Controls N2.
Siemens-Landis FLN.
Modbus RTU.
Control shall have the following isolated instrument signal follower:
1.
2.
3.
4 to 20 madc
0 to 10 vdc
Floating point (optional)
P.
Loss of reference protection, VFD shall reset to predetermined minimum speed until such time
as the control is commanded to stop or the analog reference returns to normal.
Q.
Control shall have available 15 selectable volts per hertz patterns.
R.
Volts per hertz ratio shall be automatic, tracking motor load requirements to achieve most
efficient operation within the parameters set by the volts per hertz pattern. Potentiometer
adjustments not allowed.
S.
VFD shall have automatic restart capabilities and be capable of starting into a spinning motor.
T.
Control must be capable of starting into a spinning motor and switching from inverter to bypass
back to inverter without delay and without tripping off line of the inverter, also must be capable
of stopping a motor rotating in the reverse direction and then accelerating that motor in the
proper direction.
U.
Control shall have a fused door interlocked disconnect with fuses rated for proper branch circuit
protection.
V.
All components must be supplied in an enclosure.
W.
Electronic Bypass Control: An integrated electronic bypass control shall be provided for the
purpose of running the AC motor at full speed with line power while the VFD is inoperative.
Bypass and drive shall be electronically interlocked. VFD shall be serviceable while operating
in the bypass mode. The bypass control shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Safety Circuit Terminal Strip
Door Interlocked Disconnect
Drive Off-Line Selector
Power On Light
VFD Output Contactor
VFD Select Light
Overload Relay
Line Select Light
115 VAC Control Transformer
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
(12116)
23 10 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
X.
Manual Bypass Control. A bypass control shall be provided for the purpose of running the AC
motor at full speed with line power while the VFD is being serviced. Bypass and drive shall be
electrically interlocked. The VFD package shall be configured so that the VFD can be removed
for service with the bypass control left in place. The bypass control shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Y.
NEMA 1 Enclosure
Safety Circuit Terminal Strip
Door Interlocked Disconnect
Drive Off-Line Selector
Bypass Contactor
Power On Light
VFD Output Contactor
VFD Select Light
Overload Relay
Line Select Light
115 VAC Control Transformer
BAS Integration:
Variable frequency drive shall be provided with the resident serial
communications protocol or interface module necessary to integrate the drive with the Delta
BAS.
Resident serial communications protocol or interface module shall provide all
microprocessor operation and diagnostics information to the Delta BAS for a fully integrated
system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine areas and conditions under which variable frequency drive systems are to be installed.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS
A.
3.3
General: Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
roughing-in drawings, and details on drawings. Install electrical components and use electrical
products complying with requirements of applicable Division-26 sections of these specifications.
Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Start-Up:
Start-up, test, and adjust variable frequency drive systems in presence of
manufacturer's authorized representative.
Demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B.
Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces.
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
C.
Final Adjustment: After completion of installation, coordinate with temperature control
contractor to verify that all controls are operating correctly with the variable frequency drive
system.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
(12116)
Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
23 10 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.4
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Owner's Instructions: Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 4hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of variable frequency
drive systems.
1.
Schedule instruction with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and
Engineer of training date.
END OF SECTION 23 10 00
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
(12116)
23 10 00 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 21 13 – HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
This Section includes piping systems for hot water heating, chilled water cooling, condenser
water, make-up water for these systems, blow-down drain lines, and condensate drain piping.
Piping materials and equipment specified in this Section include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
The following Division-23 sections apply to this section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for materials and methods
for sealing pipe penetrations through basement walls, and fire and smoke barriers.
Division 23 Section "General Duty Valves" for globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves.
Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, and pressure gages.
Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for labeling and
identification of hydronic piping system.
Division 23 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for pipe insulation.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic
systems.
Division 23 Section "Electric Control System" for temperature control valves and sensors.
Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for hydronic
systems adjusting and balancing.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Mechanical General Provisions
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
General Duty Valves.
Supports and Anchors.
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
1.2
Piping and fittings.
Calibrated plug valves.
Safety relief valves.
Pressure reducing valves.
Air vents.
Air separators.
Compression tanks.
Pump suction diffusers.
Chemical feeder.
Diverting fittings.
Y-Pattern strainers.
Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
General: The hydronic piping systems are the "water-side" of an air-and-water or all-water air
conditioning system. Hydronic piping systems specified in this Section include a process
cooling water piping system. These systems are classified by ASHRAE as Low Water
Temperature, Forced, Recirculating systems.
B.
Condenser Water System: This system is an open piping loop connecting the chillers to the
cooling tower. Circulation is accomplished by means of parallel, constant volume pumps.
Design flow rates and water temperatures are specified in the various equipment specifications
and schedules. Control sequences and temperature reset schedules are specified in the
temperature control specifications.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties and accessories, and installation instructions for each hydronic
specialty and special duty valve specified.
1.
B.
Maintenance Data for hydronic specialties and special duty valves, for inclusion in operating
and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 and Division-23 Section "Mechanical General
Provisions."
C.
Welders certificates certifying that welders comply with the quality requirements specified in
Quality Assurance below.
D.
Certification of compliance with ASTM and ANSI manufacturing requirements for pipe, fittings,
and specialties.
E.
Reports specified in Part 3 of this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Safety
valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Selection VIII, Division 1.
ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualification" for qualifications for welding processes and operators.
Local, City, and State Codes.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
1.7
Furnish flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and calibrated plug valves,
based on manufacturer's testing.
Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 23 Section “Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods”.
SPECIAL WARRANTY
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
1.8
Manufacturer of propylene pipe and fittings shall warrant pipe and fittings for 10 years to be free
of defects in materials or workmanship. Warranty shall cover labor and material costs of
repairing and/or replacing defective materials and repairing any incidental damage caused by
failure of the piping system due to defects in materials or workmanship.
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Maintenance Stock: Furnish a sufficient quantity of chemical for initial system start-up and for
preventative maintenance for one year from Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hydronic piping system
products from one of the following:
1.
Calibrated Plug Valves:
a.
b.
2.
Safety Relief Valves:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Flow Set by Flow Design, Inc.
Flo-Pac.
Macon.
Victaulic/TA Hydronic Series 700
Air Vents (manual and automatic):
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Taco, Inc.
Balancing Valve System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Amtrol, Inc.
Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Spirax Sarco.
Watts Regulator Co.
Pressure Reducing Valves:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Taco, Inc.
Armstrong Machine Works.
Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Spirax Sarco.
Air Separators:
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
Bladder-Type Compression Tanks:
a.
b.
c.
d.
8.
Perfection Corp.
Watts Regulator Co.
Y-Pattern Strainers
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.2
Victaulic Company of America
Dielectric Unions:
a.
b.
13.
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Taco, Inc.
Dielectric Waterway Fittings:
a.
12.
Culligan USA.
Vulcan Laboratories, Subsidiary of Clow Corp.
York-Shipley, Inc.
Diverting Fittings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
11.
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Flow Conditioning Corp.
Paco.
Taco, Inc.
Chemical Feeder:
a.
b.
c.
10.
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Wessels Company.
Pump Suction Diffusers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
9.
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Taco, Inc.
Armstrong Machine Works.
Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Metraflex Co.
Mueller Steam Specialty.
Spirax Sarco.
Watts Regulator Co.
PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
General: Refer to Part 3 Article "PIPE APPLICATIONS" for identification of where the below
materials are used.
B.
Drawn Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
C.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe, plane ends.
2.3
FITTINGS
A.
Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern, for threaded joints.
Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
B.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints.
Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
C.
Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.
D.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.
E.
CPVC Plastic Fittings: ASTM D 2846, Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) socket-type
fittings and solvent for solvent cemented joints.
F.
Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
G.
Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 150; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
H.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the
following material group, end connection and facing:
1.
2.
3.
Material Group: 1.1.
End Connections: Butt Welding.
Facings: Raised face.
I.
Unions: ANSI B16.39 malleable-iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints,
metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ANSI
B1.20.1.
J.
Dielectric Unions: Threaded or soldered end connections for the pipe materials in which
installed; constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent
corrosion.
K.
Flexible Connectors (Stainless Steel Type): stainless steel bellows with woven flexible bronze
wire reinforcing protective jacket; minimum 150 psig working pressure, maximum 250 degree F
operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded end connections to match
equipment connected; and shall be capable of 3/4 inch misalignment.
2.4
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 Tin-Antimony, for chilled water, condenser water,
heating hot water, low pressure steam, make-up water and drain piping.
B.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg 1 (Silver).
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes
when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.
C.
Welding Materials: Comply, with Section II, Part C. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for
welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being
welded.
D.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled, and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.5
GENERAL DUTY VALVES
A.
2.6
General duty valves (i.e., globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division-23
Section "General Duty Valves." Special duty valves are specified below by their generic name;
refer to Part 3 Article "VALVE APPLICATION" for specific uses and applications for each valve
specified.
SPECIAL DUTY VALVES
A.
Calibrated Plug Valves: 125 psig water working pressure, 250 degree F maximum operating
temperature, bronze body, plug valve with calibrated orifice. Provide with connections for
portable differential pressure meter with integral check valves and seals. Valve shall have
integral pointer and calibrated scale to register degree of valve opening. Valves 2 inches and
smaller shall have threaded connections and 2-1/2 inch valves shall have flanged connections.
B.
Pressure Reducing Valves: Diaphragm operated, cast-iron or brass body valve, with low inlet
pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shut-down, and noncorrosive
valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve
shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field adjustment.
C.
Safety Relief Valves: 125 psig working pressure and 250 degree F maximum operating
temperature; designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements
of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron,
with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber. Select valve to suit actual
system pressure and Btu capacity.
D.
Combined Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves: Diaphragm operated, cast-iron or brass body
valve, with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shut-down,
and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to
suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field
adjustment. Safety relief valve designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with
the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall
be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber; 125 psig working
pressure and 250 degree F maximum operating temperature. Select valve to suit actual system
pressure and Btu capacity. Provide with fast fill feature for filling hydronic system.
E.
Balancing Valve System:
1.
System Description: Furnish and install where shown on drawings complete FlowSet
balancing valve system as manufactured by Flow Design Inc. or equal. This system shall
consist of flow measurement venturis with pressure/temperature ports and flow setting
valves with memory stops on the leaving side of the heat transfer equipment. The valves
shall also contain temperature and pressure test ports. Venturis shall have a minimum
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
static regain of 80 percent and shall be selected with a signal in the range of 24-100
inches water column. The manufacturer shall also furnish a flow meter kit for use with
the system. The following system model numbers shall be used as the basis of design:
a.
b.
2.
Flow Measurement Venturi’s:
a.
b.
3.
b.
2” and Smaller: The flow setting valve shall be a ball valve rated at 400 PSIG at
250°F with bronze body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats, blowout proof stem,
Teflon packing, packing nut, and full size handle with vinyl grip and memory stops.
Ball valves shall have threaded connections.
2-1/2” and Larger: The flow setting valve shall be a butterfly valve rated at
225PSIG at 250°F with cast iron body, aluminum/bronze disc, EPDM seats, 416
stainless steel stem, bronze sleeve bearings, and lug end connections. Valves
shall have ten position handle and external lockable memory stop for valves 6” and
smaller and gear operators with memory stop for valves 8” and larger.
Circuit Balancing Valve:
1.
2.7
2” and Smaller: The flow measuring venturi section shall be of bronze and brass
construction integrally designed with the ball valve section and sized for maximum
pressure recovery and a flow accuracy of ±2% for direct flow measurement
conditions. The valve accuracy is obtained with no provision for external
clearances on ball valves through 2" size. The required clearances are contained
entirely within the assembly. The flow section is furnished with two dual-core
temperature/pressure taps with color coded removable retained safety cap
assemblies. The unit also contains a ground-joint union especially designed for
minimum turbulence and to allow for full service.
2-1/2” and Larger: The flow measuring venturi section shall be of steel
construction with extended inlet and integrally designed with the butterfly valve
section and sized for maximum pressure recovery and a flow accuracy of ±3% for
direct flow measurement conditions. The valve accuracy is obtained with no
provision for external clearances on the butterfly valves or the inlet through 14"
size. The required clearances are contained entirely within the assembly. The
flow section is furnished with two dual-core temperature/pressure taps with color
coded removable retained safety cap assemblies. The unit shall also contains a
150# raised face flange connection on the inlet and outlet to allow for full service.
Flow Setting Valves:
a.
F.
FlowSet Model “F” by Flow Design Inc. for sizes 2” and smaller.
FlowSet Model “EF” by Flow Design Inc. for sizes 2-1/2” and larger.
System Description: Furnish and install where shown on drawings balancing valve as
manufactured by Victaulic/TA or equal:2” and smaller sizes: 300 psi (2065 kPa), threaded
ends, non-ferrous Ametal brass copper alloy body, EPDM o-ring seals. Four turn digital
readout handwheel for balancing, hidden memory feature with locking tamper-proof
setting. Victaulic/TA Hydronics Series 700, or equal (pre-approved by Engineer).
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A.
Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 225
degree F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; and
having 1/8 inch discharge connection and 1/2 inch inlet connection.
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Automatic Air Vent; Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and
nonferrous internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 240 degree F operating temperature; and
having 1/4 inch discharge connection and 1/2 inlet connection.
C.
Bladder-Type Compression Tanks: Size and number as indicated; construct of welded carbon
steel for 125 psig working pressure, 240 degree F maximum operating temperature. Separate
air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by means of a heavy duty
butyl replaceable bladder. Provide taps for pressure gage and air charging fitting (standart tire
valve), and drain fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or ring base; support horizontal
tanks with steel saddles. Tank, with taps and supports, shall be constructed, tested, and
labeled in accordance with ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. (Note:
Diaphram type tanks will not be considered as a substitute for bladder type tanks.)
D.
Air Separator: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for minimum 125 psig water
working pressure and 375 F operating temperature; perforated stainless steel air collector tube
designed to direct released air into compression tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections;
screwed connections up to and including 2" NPS; flanged connections for 2-1/2" NPS and
above; threaded blowdown connection; sized as indicated for full system flow capacity.
E.
Pump Suction Diffusers: Cast-iron body, with threaded connections for 2 inches and smaller,
flanged connections for 2-1/2 inches and larger; 175 psig working pressure, 230 degree F
maximum operating temperature; and complete with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Inlet vanes with length 2-1/2 times pump suction diameter or greater.
Cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings with total free area equal to or greater
than 5 times cross-sectional area of pump suction, designed to withstand pressure
differential equal to pump shutoff head.
Disposable fine mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer.
Permanent magnet, located in flow stream, removable for cleaning.
Adjustable foot support, designed to carry weight of suction piping.
Blowdown tapping in bottom; gage tapping in side.
Chemical Feeder: Bypass type chemical feeder of 5 gallon capacity, welded steel construction;
125 psig working pressure; complete with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
1.
Chemicals shall be specially formulated to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in
piping system and connected equipment, developed based on a water analysis of
make-up water.
G.
Diverting Fittings: Cast iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with solder ends; 125
psig working pressure, 250 degree F maximum operating temperature. Indicate flow direction
on fitting.
H.
Y-Pattern Strainers: 125 psig working pressure cast iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged
ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger, threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller, bolted cover,
perforated Type 304 stainless steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install Type L, drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for 2 inch and
smaller, above ground, within building.
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 8
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Install steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inch and smaller, and with welded joints
for 2-1/2 inch and larger.
C.
Install CPVC plastic pipe with solvent cemented joints for condenser water chemical treatment
piping systems.
3.2
3.3
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general
location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into
consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
B.
Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
C.
Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.
permitted, unless expressly indicated.
D.
Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
E.
Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the
building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1" clearance outside the
insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
F.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.
G.
Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball
valve, and short 3/4" threaded nipple and cap.
H.
Install piping at a uniform grade of 1 inch in 40 feet upward in the direction of flow.
I.
Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side up.
J.
Install branch connections to mains using Tee fittings in main with take-off out the bottom of the
main, except for up-feed risers which shall have take-off out the top of the main line.
K.
Install unions in pipes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each
piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
L.
Install dielectric unions to join dissimilar metals.
M.
Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inches and larger connections.
N.
Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps (except inline pumps)
and other vibration producing equipment.
O.
Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing valve, pressure
regulating valve, solenoid valve, inline pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install nipple and ball
valve in blow down connection of strainers 2 inches and larger.
Diagonal runs are not
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 9
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 23 Section
"SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports:
B.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length.
Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or
longer.
Pipe roller complete - MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:
Nom. Pipe Size
1
1-1/2
2
3
3-1/2
4
5
6
3.4
Max. Span-Ft.
7
9
10
12
13
14
16
17
Min. Rod Size-Inches
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
5/8
5/8
3/4
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Soldering Manual."
B.
Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual."
1.
2.
3.
C.
CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts at
piping specialties before brazing.
Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas (i.e., nitrogen or carbon dioxide)
to prevent formation of scale.
Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform temperature.
Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat
or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
Align threads at point of assembly.
Apply approximate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where
dry seal threading is specified).
Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the
pipe is being threaded.
a.
D.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged.
If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not
be used.
Welded Joints: Comply with the requirement in ASME Code B31.9-"Building Services Piping."
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 10
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
E.
Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening
to make initial contract of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.
F.
CPVC Joints: Prepare surfaces to be solvent cemented by wiping with a clean cloth moistened
with acetone or methylethyl keytone. Solvent cement joints in accordance with ASTM D2846.
3.5
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
General Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used.
specific valve types are not indicated the following requirements apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Where
Shut-off duty: use ball, and butterfly valves
Throttling duty: use globe, ball, and butterfly valves
Install shut-off duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply
connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicted.
Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return
connections to each piece of equipment, elsewhere as indicated.
B.
Install balancing valve system on the outlet of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere
as required to facilitate system balancing.
C.
Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for
system drainage.
D.
Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow
direction.
E.
Install safety relief valves on boilers, hot water generators, and elsewhere as required by ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
1.
F.
3.6
Pipe discharge to floor without valves. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code Section VIII, Division 1 for installation requirements.
Install pressure reducing valves on make-up water to boilers, hot water generators, and
elsewhere as required to regulate system pressure.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install manual air vents at high points in the system, at heat transfer coils, and elsewhere as
required for system air venting. For unaccessible vent locations, the vent piping shall be piped
to a location where vent will be accessible.
B.
Install automatic air vents at air separators as required for system air venting. Vent piping shall
be piped to a floor drain.
C.
Install combination air separator/strainer in pump suction lines. Install blowdown piping with ball
valve; extend to nearest drain.
D.
Install pump suction diffusers on pump suction inlet, adjust foot support to carry weight of
suction piping. Install nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection.
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 11
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
E.
Install shot-type chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated; in upright position
with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above floor. Install feeder across pump using globe
or ball valves on each side of feeder. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain.
F.
Install bladder-type compression tanks on floor as indicated. Vent and purge air from hydronic
system, charge tank with proper air charge to suit system design requirements. Connect
compression tank off bottom of hydronic system main downstream of air separator. Run piping
from hydronic system to compression tank with 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) downward slope
towards tank.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Preparation for testing:
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the test.
Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the reactions due
to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate expansion joints from
testing.
Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. If a
valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against the
test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at which blinds are inserted to
isolate equipment need not be tested.
Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher than the test pressure, to
protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of overpressure during the
test.
Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.8
Prepare hydronic piping in accordance with ASME B 31.9 and as
Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except where there is a risk of
damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen and
compatible with the piping system components.
Use vents installed at high points in the system to release trapped air while filling the
system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of that liquid.
Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures
are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low
pressure filling lines are disconnected.
Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is
not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the
maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under
test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs
does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the
"SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code For Pressure Piping, Building Services
Piping.
After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or
replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 12
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
Clean and flush hydronic piping systems. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. After
cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove disposable fine
mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
B.
Mark calibrated name plates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has
been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
C.
Chemical Treatment: Provide a water analysis prepared by the chemical treatment supplier to
determine the type and level of chemicals required for prevention of scale and corrosion.
Perform initial treatment after completion of system testing.
3.9
COMMISSIONING
A.
Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.
B.
Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is
completely full of water.
C.
Before operating the system perform these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass valves.
Remove and clean strainers.
Check pump for proper direction of rotation and correct improper wiring.
Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type) or to bleed air completely (manual type).
Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
Check and set operating temperatures of closed circuit fluid coolers to design
requirements.
Lubricate motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
(12116)
23 21 13 - 13
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 21 23 – HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Extent of HVAC pumps work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules,
and by requirements of this section.
B.
Types of pumps specified in this section include the following:
1.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Refer to Section 23 00 00 for equipment certification requirements.
B.
Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work:
1.
C.
D.
Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pumps. Include starters,
disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or
factory- installed, by manufacturer.
Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of
Division-26 sections:
1.
Control and interlock wiring between operating controls, indicating devices, and
temperature control panels.
Refer to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Base-Mounted, Separately-Coupled, End Suction.
Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for specifications on
concrete and reinforcing materials and concrete placing requirements for equipment
pads.
Division 23 Section "Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work and Mechanical Provisions
of Electrical Work" for electrical motors, connections, and accessories.
Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages" for temperature and pressure gages and
connectors.
Division 23 Section "Electric Control Systems" for interlock wiring between pumps, and
between pumps and field-installed control devices.
Division 26 Section "General Electrical " for power supply wiring including field-installed
disconnects and required electrical devices.
Division 26 Section “Motor Starters” for field-installed motor controllers.
Division 23 Section “Variable Frequency Drives” for variable frequency drives.
Division 26 Section "Motor Control Centers" for motor controllers installed in motor
control centers.
SUBMITTALS
HYDRONIC PUMPS
(12116)
23 21 23 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 1
Specification Sections and Section 23 01 00.
B.
Product data including certified performance curves of selected models indicating selected
pump's operating point, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and
accessories.
C.
Shop drawings showing layout and connections for HVAC pumps. Include setting drawings with
templates, and directions for installation of foundation bolts and other anchorages.
D.
Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems, differentiating between
manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
E.
Maintenance data for HVAC pumps for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual
specified in Division 1 and Section 23 00 00.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Hydraulic Institute Compliance: Design, manufacture, and install HVAC pumps in accordance
with "Hydraulic Institute Standards."
B.
National Electrical Code Compliance: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 "National
Electrical Code."
C.
UL Compliance: Provide HVAC pumps which are listed and labeled by UL, and comply with UL
Standard 778 "Motor Operated Water Pumps."
D.
NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and components that are listed and labeled NEMA.
E.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain HVAC pumps from a single manufacturer.
F.
Design Criteria:
The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional
requirements of HVAC pumps, and are based on the specific manufacturer types and models
indicated. Pumps having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be
considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles and efficiencies do not change the
design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store pumps in a dry location.
B.
Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
C.
Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
D.
For storage times greater than 5 days, dry internal parts with hot air or a vacuum-producing
device to avoid rusting internal parts. Upon drying, coat internal parts with a protective liquid,
such as light oil, kerosene, or antifreeze. Dismantle bearings and couplings, dry and coat them
with an acid-free heavy oil, and then tag and store in dry location.
E.
Comply with Manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
(12116)
23 21 23 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Base-Mounted, Separately-Coupled, End-Suction Pumps:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.2
"PF2g," Amtrol, Inc.
"Series 4030," Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
"360 Series," Aurora Pumps.
"Series 1510," Bell & Gossett, ITT.
"Type CCB, CGB, or CKB," Federal Pump Corp.
Paco
"Series F," Peerless Pump.
"FM Series," Taco, Inc.
"Uni-Pumps, Type GB, GLB, KB, KHB, AND KLB," Weinman, Mueller Pump.
PUMPS, GENERAL
A.
Pumps and Circulators: Factory-assembled and factory-tested. Fabricate casings to allow
removal and replacement of impellers without necessity of disconnecting piping. Type, sizes,
and capacities shall be as indicated.
B.
Preparation for Shipping: After assembly and testing, clean flanges and exposed machined
metal surfaces and treat with an anti-corrosion compound. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and
nozzles.
C.
Motors: Conform to NEMA Standard MG-1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B,
except Design C where required for high starting torque; single, multiple, or variable speed with
type of enclosure and electrical characteristics as indicated; have built-in thermal- overload
protection, and grease-lubricated ball bearings. Select motors that are non-overloading within
the full range of the pump performance curve.
D.
Efficiency: Motors shall be premium efficiency type having a minimum efficiency as indicated in
accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency is not specified, motor shall
have a higher efficiency than the "average standard industry motors," in accordance with IEEE
Standard 112, Test Method B.
1.
E.
2.3
Motor Frame: NEMA Standard 48 or 54; use pump manufacturer's standard.
Apply factory finish paint to assembled, tested units prior to shipping.
BASE-MOUNTED, SEPARATELY-COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS
A.
General Description:
Pumps shall be base-mounted, centrifugal, separately-coupled,
end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially split case design, and rated for 175 psig
working pressure and 225 deg F continuous water temperature.
B.
Casings Construction: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, and threaded gage tappings
at inlet and outlet flange connections.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
(12116)
23 21 23 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
C.
Impeller Construction: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single-suction,
fabricated from cast bronze conforming to ASTM B 584, keyed to shaft and secured by a
locking capscrew.
D.
Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze.
E.
Pump Shaft and Sleeve Bearings: Steel shaft, with bronze sleeve.
F.
Seals: Mechanical seals consisting of carbon steel rotating ring, stainless steel spring, ceramic
seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
G.
Pump Couplings: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment;
complete with metal coupling guard.
H.
Mounting Frame: Factory-welded frame and cross members, fabricated of steel channels and
angles conforming to ASTM B 36. Fabricate for mounting pump casing, coupler guard, and
motor. Grind welds smooth prior to application of factory finish. Motor mounting holes for
field-installed motors shall be field-drilled.
I.
Motor: Secured to mounting frame with adjustable alignment on mounting frame.
motors based on the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select
The motor shall operate the driven pump under all conditions without exceeding the
motor nameplate horsepower.
Provide a motor that is suitable for its connected power source. Coordinate the power
source available with the electrical trade.
For motors 5 horsepower and larger, construct the motor frame and end brackets of cast
iron.
Use either an open drip proof (ODP) or totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) enclosure.
Provide a premium efficiency design rated for continuous duty and a service factor of
1.15. The temperature rise shall not exceed 80 degrees C with a 40 degrees C ambient.
The motor shall use at least a Class F insulation.
Select a nominal 1,150 or 1,800 RPM synchronous speed 4 pole design. Motors shall be
premium efficiency type except that where motors are to be driven by an adjustable
frequency drive, motors shall also be rated for invertor duty. Provide invertor duty motors
with shaft grounding kits.
Factory lubricate the motor using a premium grease with rust inhibitors that are suitable
for an operating range of minus 20 to 300 degrees F. Provide the motor with grease
fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
HVAC pumps.
B.
Examine rough-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to
installation.
C.
Examine equipment foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to
be installed.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
(12116)
23 21 23 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
D.
3.2
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
EQUIPMENT BASES
A.
Construct concrete equipment pads as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Form concrete pads using framing lumber with form release compounds of size and
location as indicated. Chamfer top edge and corners of pad. Anchor or key to floor slab.
Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves using
manufacturer's installation template.
Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of pumps. Use Portland Cement
conforming to ASTM C150, 4,000 psi compressive strength, and normal weight
aggregate.
Clean exposed steel form and apply 2 coats of rust-preventative metal primer and 2 coats
of exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel. Color shall be as selected by the Architect.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the manufacturer's written installation and alignment instructions.
B.
Install pumps in locations and arranged to provide access for periodic maintenance, including
removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C.
Support pumps and piping separately so that the weight of the piping system does not rest on
the pump.
D.
Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before setting.
Do not reconnect couplings until the alignment operations have been completed.
1.
2.
3.4
Support pump base plate on rectangular metal blocks and shims. or on metal wedges
having a small taper, at points near the foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2
inches between the pump base and the foundation for grouting.
Adjust the metal supports or wedges until the shafts of the pump and driver are level.
Check the coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of the pump to verify that
they are level and plumb.
ALIGNMENT
A.
Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundations, after grout
has been set and foundations bolts have been tightened, and after piping connections have
been made.
1.
B.
Adjust alignment of pump and motor shafts for angular and parallel alignment by one of
the two methods specified in the Hydraulic Institute "Centrifugal Pumps - Instructions for
Installation, Operation and Maintenance."
After alignment is correct, tighten the foundation bolts evenly, but not too firmly. Fill the base
plate completely with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
1.
Alignment tolerances shall meet manufacturers recommendations.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
(12116)
23 21 23 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
General: Install valves that are same size as the piping connecting the pump.
B.
Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than the diameter of the pump
nozzles.
C.
Install a globe style silent check valve, plug valve, and butterfly valve on the discharge side of
base-mounted, end-suction pumps. Plug valves are not required on variable speed pumps.
D.
Install a pump suction diffuser and butterfly valve on the suction side of base-mounted,
end-suction pumps.
E.
Install flexible connectors on the suction and discharge side of each base-mounted pump.
Install flexible connectors between the pump casing and the discharge valves, and upstream
from the pump suction diffuser.
F.
Install a pressure gage with tee fitting between the suction and discharge of each pump with
isolation ball valves on each side of the tee fitting. Connect pressure gage piping to the pump
at the integral suction and discharge pressure gage tappings provided.
G.
Install temperature and pressure gage connector plugs in suction and discharge piping around
pump. Temperature and pressure gage connector plugs are specified in Division 23 Section
"Meters and Gages."
H.
Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 sections.
I.
Control wiring and connections are specified in other Division 23 sections.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.7
Check suction line connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into the pump.
COMMISSIONING
A.
Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following preventative maintenance operations and
checks before start-up:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Lubricate oil-lubricated bearings.
Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers and flush the bearings with kerosene and
thoroughly clean. Fill with new lubricant in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation. Rotation shall match direction
of rotation marked on pump casing.
Check that pump is free to rotate by hand. For pumps handling hot liquids, pump shall be
free to rotate with the pump hot and cold. If the pump is bound or even drags slightly, do
not operate the pump until the cause of the trouble is determined and corrected.
Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding the safe motor power:
1.
2.
Prime the pump, opening the suction valve, closing the drains, and prepare the pump for
operation.
Open the discharge valve slowly.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
(12116)
23 21 23 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
3.
C.
Check the general mechanical operation of the pump and motor.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed requirements for
testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems.
END OF SECTION 23 21 23
HYDRONIC PUMPS
(12116)
23 21 23 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 25 00 – WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Extent of water treatment system work required by this section includes owner provided and
contractor provided systems, equipment and chemicals which are indicated on drawings and
schedules and by requirements of this section, and includes necessary equipment, chemicals
and service to inhibit development of scale, corrosion, and biological growth as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fluid cooler open loop water treatment system (also refered to in this specification as
condenser water system). (Provided and installed by Owner.)
Fluid cooler passivation. (Provided and performed by contractor.)
Glycol Feeders. (Provided and installed by the contractor.)
Heat Transfer Fluids. (Provided and installed by the contractor.)
B.
Coordinate fluid cooler passivation process with owner’s open loop chemical treatment supplier
to insure that the passivation process and chemical treatment are coordinated.
C.
Service Period: Provide chemicals and service program for period of one year from start-up
date of condensing equipment, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Initial water analysis and recommendations.
Systems start-up assistance.
Training of operating personnel.
Periodic field service and consultation, (Minimum of 4 per year).
Customer report charts and log sheets.
Laboratory technical assistance.
D.
Cooling Tower and Evaporative Condenser Passivation: The cooling towers and evaporative
condensers shall be passivated upon start-up to develop a passive oxide film to protect the
materials of construction from galvanic corrosion and therefore premature failure.
E.
Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work:
1.
F.
Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of
Division-26 sections:
1.
1.2
Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on water treatment
equipment. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where
specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.
Control and interlock wiring between operating controls, indicating devices, and unit
control panels.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Supplier: Water treatment chemical and service supplier who has been active in field of
industrial water treatment for not less than 5 years, and who has full-time service personnel
located within trading area of job site.
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
(12116)
23 25 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Codes and Standards:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of water
treatment equipment, which are UL-listed and labeled and comply with NEMA Standards.
NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to
installation, electrical connections, and ancillary electrical components of water treatment
equipment.
Chemical Standards: Provide only chemical products which are acceptable under state
and local pollution control regulations.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities; water-pressure drops; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; and furnished products listed below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Pumps.
Chemical solution tanks.
Control equipment and devices.
Test equipment.
Chemicals.
Chemical feeders.
Fluid cooler pasivation chemicals and procedures.
Glycol Feeders.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
Wiring Diagrams:
Detail power and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C.
Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at
Project site.
D.
Field Test Reports:
requirements.
E.
Maintenance Data: For pumps, agitators, filters, system controls, and accessories to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
EXTENDED MAINTENANCE SERVICES
A.
Agreement to Maintain: Prior to time of final acceptance, submit 4 copies of "Agreement for
Continued Service and Maintenance" for condenser water treatment system, for Owner's
possible acceptance. Offer terms and conditions for furnishing chemicals and providing
continued testing and servicing, and including replacement of materials and equipment, for
one-year period with option for renewal of Agreement by Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
(12116)
23 25 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by one of the following:
1.
Condenser Water-Treatment Products:
a.
2.
Cooling Tower Passivation Products:
a.
3.
Neptune Chemical Pump Co., Inc.
Pulsafeeder.
Glycol:
a.
2.2
Reaction Engineering, Inc., P.O. Box 8413, Pueblo, CO 81008, (719) 545-9757
Glycol Feeders:
a.
b.
4.
Rocky Mountain Aquatech.
Dow Chemical Company.
COOLING TOWER PASSIVATION
A.
2.3
Chemicals Required: RXN-114 which is available in a 5 gallon pail and 30 or 55 gallon drums.
PERFORMANCE OF EQUIPMENT
A.
General: Provide system sized and equipped to treat raw water available at project site to
maintain the following condenser water characteristics (tested values for condenser operation):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Hardness: 400-500.
Total Alkalinity: 200-300.
Conductivity or TDS: 1300-1500.
Sequestrant (Corrosion Scale Inhibitor): 15-20.
pH: 8.0-8.5.
CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT
A.
Positive-Displacement Diaphragm Pump: Simplex, self-priming, rated for intended chemical
with 25 percent safety factor for design pressure and temperature.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Chemical Solution Tanks: Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density opaque
polyethylene with graduated markings.
1.
2.
C.
Adjustable flow rate.
Thermoplastic construction.
Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 120-V, 60-Hz, single-phase motor.
Built-in relief valve.
Molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and liquid-level switch.
Capacity: 30 or 50 gallon.
Liquid-Level Switch: Polypropylene housing, integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles for
connection to metering pump, and low-level alarm.
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
(12116)
23 25 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
D.
Packaged Conductivity Controller: Solid-state circuitry, 5 percent accuracy, linear dial
adjustment, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control-function light, output to
control circuit, and recorder.
E.
Cold-Water Meter: Positive-displacement type with sealed, tamperproof magnetic drive;
impulse contact register; single-pole, double-throw, dry-contact switch.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rotating-disc type with bronze or cast-iron body rated for 125 psig.
Magnetic-drive or mechanical-impulse contactor matched to signal receiver.
At least six-digit totalizers.
120-V ac.
F.
Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, and general-purpose solenoid enclosure
with 120-V, continuous-duty coil.
G.
Electronic Timers: 150-second and 5-minute ranges, with infinite adjustment over full range,
and mounted in cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status lights.
H.
Chemical Tubing: Schedule 40, PVC with solvent-cement joints; or polypropylene tubing with
heat fusion.
I.
Plastic Ball Valves: Rigid PVC or CPVC body, integral union ends, and polytetrafluoroethylene
seats and seals.
J.
Plastic-Body Strainer: Rigid PVC or CPVC with cleanable stainless-steel strainer element.
K.
Condenser Water-Treatment Control Panel: Incorporate solid-state integrated circuits and
digital LED displays, in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure with gasketed and lockable door.
1.
Control dissolved solids, based on conductivity, and include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Control inhibitor feeding, based on makeup volume, and include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Digital readout display.
Temperature-compensated sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold.
High, low, and normal conductance indicator lights.
High or low conductance alarm light, trip points field adjustable; with silence
switch.
Hand-off-auto switch for solenoid bleed-off valve.
Bleed-off light to indicate valve operation.
Internal adjustable hysteresis or dead band.
Solid-state reset counter (accumulator), with selections from 1 to 15.
Solid-state timer, adjustable from 15 to 300 seconds.
Test switch.
Hand-off-auto switch for chemical pump.
Illuminated legend to indicate feed when pump is activated.
Solid-state lockout timer, adjustable from 15 to 180 minutes, with indicator light.
Lockout timer to deactivate the pump and activate alarm circuits.
Electromechanical-type, panel-mounted makeup totalizer to measure amount of
makeup water.
Control biocide with an adjustable time programmer and include the following:
a.
24-hour timer with 14-day skip feature to permit activation any hour of day.
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
(12116)
23 25 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.5
Precision, solid-state, bleed-off lockout timer (zero to nine hours) and clockcontrolled biocide pump timer (zero to two and one-half hours). Prebleed and
bleed lockout.
Solid-state alternator to enable the use of two different formulations.
24-hour digital display of time of day.
14-day LED display of day of week.
Fast and slow internal clock set controls.
Battery backup so clock is not disturbed by power outages.
Quartz timekeeping accuracy.
Hand-off-auto switches for biocide pumps.
Biocide A and Biocide B illuminated legends to indicate pump is running.
CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
A.
Test Kit: Manufacturer recommended equipment and chemicals, in a carrying case, for testing
pH, total dissolved solids, dissolved oxygen, biocount, chloride, and total alkalinity and for
calcium hardness field tests.
B.
Chemical Handling Equipment: Furnish to Owner one set of chemical resistant apron, gloves,
and polyethylene eyeshield for handling of chemicals.
C.
Corrosion Test Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosion material, complete with piping,
valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from mild steel
coupon in the test coupon assembly.
1.
2.6
Four-station rack for open condenser water systems.
GLYCOL FEEDERS
A.
General: Provide packaged system consisting of steel frame, tank with lid, pump, motor, pipe,
fittings, valves, accessories, and controls.
B.
Frame: The frame shall be constructed of steel angles, plates, and channel members, designed
to support the tank, feed pump, piping, and controls. Frame shall be finished with a powdercoat
epoxy paint finish.
C.
Tank and Lid: The tank and lid shall be polyethylene construction with a capacity of 50 gallons.
D.
Pump and Motor: The pump and motor shall be a direct driven rotary gear type. Pump shall be
constructed of bronze.
E.
Pipe and Fittings: Piping and fittings shall be constructed of schedule 80 PVC.
F.
Suction Valves and Accessories:
1.
2.
G.
PVC ball valve.
Cast Iron Y-Strainer.
Discharge Valves and Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
PVC ball valve.
PVC check valve.
Pressure gauge.
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
(12116)
23 25 00 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
4.
H.
Control Devices: Provide with the following control devices factory wired to the control panel:
1.
2.
I.
Brass relief valve with return to tank tubing.
System pressure switch.
Tank low level float switch.
Controls Panel: Provide NEMA 4X control panel with a solid state controller. Control panel shall
have the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Hand-Off-Auto switch.
Pump “On” indicator light.
Low Tank Level indicator light.
Audible alarm indication.
Alarm silence pushbutton.
Dry contacts for BAS alarm monitoring as follows:
a.
b.
2.7
Low pressure alarm.
Low tank level alarm.
HEAT TRANSFER FLUIDS
A.
Propylene Glycol: Propylene glycol shall be an industrial grade consisting of a mixture of 94%
propylene glycol and a 6% specially designed industrial package of corrosion inhibitors. The
corrosion inhibitor package shall be suitable for both steel and copper piping systems. Fluid
shall have the following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Operating Temperature Range: -50 to 325°F.
Color: Flourescent yellow.
Specific Gravity: 1.053 to1.063
Solution pH: 9.0 to 10.7
Minimum Reserve Alkalinity: 16.0ml.
Process Cooling Water System Concentration: Provide 30% concentration by weight for
freeze protection down to 10°F and burst protection down to -20°F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
General: Examine areas and conditions under which condenser water treatment systems are to
be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
manner acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION OF CONDENSER WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
A.
General: Install condenser water treatment system in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Coordinate with other work (plumbing and heating piping) as necessary to interface components
of condenser water treatment system properly with condenser cooling water system.
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
(12116)
23 25 00 - 6
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
C.
Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory-mounted.
1.
D.
3.3
Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up
until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.
Install pressure gages, valves, and controls furnished by manufacturer, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
PRECLEANING
A.
3.4
General: Flush condensers using precleaning chemicals designed to remove construction
deposits such as pipe dope, oils, loose mill scale, and other extraneous materials. Add
recommended dosages and recirculate for 6 to 8 hours. Drain and flush until total alkalinity of
rinse water is equal to make-up water. Refill with treated clean water.
COOLING TOWER AND EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER PASSIVATION PROCEDURES
A.
General: The cooling towers and evaporative condensers shall be passivated as early as
possible upon start-up. The following are general guidelines to follow during the passivation
process, consult with passivation contractor and follow his recommendations during start-up:
1.
Without Heat Load on Cooling Towers and evaporative condensers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
With Heat Load on Cooling Towers and evaporative condensers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.5
Disable condenser water treatment system.
Drain condenser water system and fill with fresh water.
Add RXN-114 at a dosage of 600ppm or 1 gallon per 2,000gallons of water in the
system. If microbiocides are needed, use non-oxidizing biocides.
Circulate continuously at ambient temperature and design flow rate for 3-4 days.
Dump and refill the system with fresh water.
Initiate “on-line” water treatment program and put system back on-line.
START-UP
A.
3.6
Disable condenser water treatment system.
Drain condenser water system and fill with fresh water.
Add RXN-114 at a dosage of 1,200ppm or 1 gallon per 1,000gallons of water in the
system. If microbiocides are needed, use non-oxidizing biocides.
Circulate continuously at ambient temperature and design flow rate for 4-5 days.
Dump and refill the system with fresh water.
Initiate “on-line” water treatment program and put system back on-line.
Start-up Procedures: During condenser cooling water system start-up, operate condenser
water treatment system (after charging with specified chemicals) to maintain required
steady-state characteristics of cooling water.
TESTING
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
(12116)
23 25 00 - 7
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
Sample condenser cooling water at one-week intervals after condenser start-up for period of 4
weeks and prepare certified test report for each required water performance characteristic.
Comply with the following standards, where applicable:
1.
2.
3.
3.7
ASTM D 1067 - Test Methods of Acidity or Alkalinity of Water.
ASTM D 1126 - Test Methods for Hardness in Water.
ASTM D 3370 - Practices for Sampling Water.
TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A.
Provide services of supplier's representative for one-half day to instruct Owner's personnel in
operation, maintenance, and testing procedures of condenser water treatment system.
END OF SECTION 23 25 00
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
(12116)
23 25 00 - 8
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 31 13 – METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this
section.
B.
Refer to other Division-23 sections for exterior insulation of metal ductwork, and locations of
duct liner specified in this section.
C.
Refer to other Division-23 sections for ductwork accessories.
D.
Refer to other Division-23 sections for fans and air handling units.
E.
Refer to other Division-23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of metal ductwork
systems.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork
products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on
projects with metal ductwork systems similar to that required for project.
C.
Codes and Standards:
1.
2.
3.
D.
1.3
SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal
and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1
"Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of
Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems".
Field Reference Manual: Have available at project field office, copy of "SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
metal ductwork materials and products.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings including, but not
limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor
penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductwork and
proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local
METAL DUCTS
(12116)
23 31 13 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not
reduced.
C.
Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed ductwork, duct
accessories, and outlets and inlets; in accordance with requirements of Section 23 00 00.
D.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials and
products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in maintenance
manual; in accordance with requirements of Section 23 00 00.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and products
from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and
moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B.
Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to
store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factory-fabricated ductwork of
one of the following:
1.
2.
2.2
Semco Mfg., Inc.
United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp.
PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION
A.
Ducts shall be constructed to meet the highest pressure classification as specified below except
where specifically indicated.
1.
2.3
Duct systems shall be constructed for the specific duct pressure class indicated. Where
no specific duct pressure class is indicated, the 2” water gage pressure class is the basis
of compliance.
DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A.
Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied
spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including
those which would impair painting.
B.
Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel
complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with
ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations.
METAL DUCTS
(12116)
23 31 13 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and,
where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system
requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.
B.
Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 deg
change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 deg laterals and
45 deg elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 deg branches are indicated, provide
conical type tees.
C.
Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for
fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically
for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.
D.
Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement, type
applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer
specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork.
E.
Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized
steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Except where space is indicated as "High Humidity" area, interior support materials of not
less than 1/4" diameter or 3/16" thickness may be plain (not galvanized).
For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support materials.
For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials except where materials are
electrolytically separated from ductwork.
FABRICATION
A.
Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10, or 12-foot lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to
complete runs. Pre-assemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field
assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and
handling. Match-mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
C.
Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with ASHRAE Handbook,
Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 "Duct Construction".
D.
Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as
applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius
equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter
radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 degrees for contracting tapers and 20 degrees
for expanding tapers.
E.
Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible.
refer to Division-23 section "Ductwork Accessories" for accessory requirements.
F.
Duct sizes 18” wide and larger which have more than 10 square feet of unbraced panel shall be
beaded or cross broken if constructed of 20 gage or lighter and constructed for 3” W.G. or less.
If beaded, first and last bead shall be 6” in from each end and spaced at 12”.
METAL DUCTS
(12116)
23 31 13 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
2.6
FACTORY-FABRICATED LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
A.
General:
At installer's option, provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of
shop-fabricated duct and fittings.
B.
Material: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with ASTM A
525, G 90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
C.
Gage: 28-gage minimum for round and oval ducts and fittings, 4" through 24" diameter, 28gage minimum for rectangular ducts.
D.
Round Elbows: One piece stamped and welded construction for 90 deg and 45 deg elbows 14"
and smaller. Provide multiple gore construction for larger diameters with standing seam
circumferential joint.
E.
Divided Flow Fittings: 90 deg tees, constructed with saddle tap spot welded and bonded to duct
fitting body.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK
A.
General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which
will achieve air tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated over 3")
and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service.
Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections,
within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with
suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to
prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor.
B.
Field Fabrication:
Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match
shop-fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.
C.
Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and
avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and
notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct
usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to
walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent- enclosure elements
of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of
ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1"
clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal
ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above
suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically
shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
METAL DUCTS
(12116)
23 31 13 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
D.
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and their
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
E.
Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space
between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same
gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten duct and substrate.
1.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide firestopping
between duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of Division 23, Section
“Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”.
F.
Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil
frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.
G.
Installation:
Standards.
H.
Ductmate Joints: Ductmate system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instruction and installation manuals.
3.3
Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.4
Leakage Tests: After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes over 3" is
completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage is less than 1% of system design air
flow.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
3.5
General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for
each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment
containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Clean Ductwork internally, unit-by-unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external
surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where
ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.
B.
Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution
devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other
covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be
completed.
C.
Balancing: Refer to Division-23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air distribution
balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become
apparent in balancing process.
END OF SECTION 23 31 13
METAL DUCTS
(12116)
23 31 13 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 33 00 – DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Extent of duct accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements
of this section.
B.
Types of duct accessories work required for project include the following:
1.
Dampers.
a.
2.
3.
C.
1.2
Control dampers.
Duct access doors.
Flexible connections.
Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of duct accessories, or
types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 3 years.
B.
Codes and Standards:
1.
2.
1.3
SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction
of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of duct accessory,
including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of duct
accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and
methods of assembly of components.
C.
Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type
of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual;
in accordance with requirements of Section 23 00 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
DUCT ACCESSORIES
(12116)
23 33 00 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer:
following:
1.
Dampers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Air Balance Inc.
Duro Dyne Corp.
Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.
Ruskin Mfg. Co.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Zurn Industries, Inc., Air Systems Div.
Flexible Connections:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Air Balance Inc.
American Warming & Ventilating, Inc.
Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
Greenheck.
Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
Penn Ventilator Co.
Ruskin Mfg. Co.
Duct Access Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the
American/Elgen Co.; Energy Div.
Puro Dyne Corp.
Flexaust (The) Co.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
DAMPERS
A.
2.3
Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type,
constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards".
CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
Control Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades for 2-position control, or opposed
blades for modulating control. Construct blades of 16-ga steel, provide heavy-duty molded
self-lubricating nylon bearings, 1/2" diameter steel axles spaced on 9" centers. Construct frame
of 2" x 1/2" x 1/8" steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft. and under; 4" x 1-1/4" x 16-ga channel
for face areas over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish with aluminum touch-up.
B.
Control Dampers: Provide automatic control dampers as indicated, with damper frames not
less than formed 13 ga galvanized steel. Maximum damper section size shall be 48"x72" with
larger damper installed in sections with appropriate jack shafting. Provide mounting holes for
enclosed duct mounting. Provide damper blades not less than formed 16 ga galvanized steel,
with maximum blade width of 8". Equip dampers with motors, with proper rating for each
application.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
(12116)
23 33 00 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
1.
2.
3.
C.
Dampers Motors: Size each motor to operate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power
to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Secure blades to 1/2" diameter zinc-plated axles using zinc- plated hardware. Seal off
against spring stainless steel blade bearings. Provide blade bearings of nylon and
provide thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Construct blade linkage hardware of
zinc-plated steel and brass. Submit leakage and flow characteristic, plus size schedule
for controlled dampers.
o
o
Operating Temperature Range: From -20 F to 200 F.
For standard applications, provide parallel or opposed blade design. For proportional or
modulating control applications, provide opposed blade design. For mixing applications,
provide parallel blade design. Dampers shall be designed to operate in systems having
velocities up to 3,000 FPM and shall have stainless steel seals along top, bottom and
sides of frame and butyl rubber seals along each blade. Dampers shall be rated for
leakage at less than 10 cfm/sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4" w.g. when
damper is being held by a torque of 50.0 inch-pounds.
Provide permanent split-capacitor or shaded pole type motors with gear trains completely
oil-immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors, where indicated on drawings or in
operational sequence, with integral spiralspring mechanism. Furnish entire spring
mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit
switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
Motors for outdoor locations shall be completely weatherproof, and capable of normal
o
operation at -20 F.
Actuators may be of the push-pull or rotating type for either modulating or two-positioning
control. Actuators shall stroke by a rotating motion of an overload-proof synchronous
motor. Control voltage shall be either 24V AC or 0-20V DC as required by the
application.
DUCT HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for
the following:
1.
2.5
Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct
test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests.
DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A.
General: Provide where indicated and at each fire damper, smoke damper or control damper,
duct access doors, of minimum size of 18" x 12".
B.
Construction: Construct of same or greater gage as ductwork served, provide insulated doors
for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for
externally insulated duct. Provide one size hinged, other wise with one handle-type latch for
doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for larger doors.
2.6
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A.
General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated
equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into
duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint
DUCT ACCESSORIES
(12116)
23 33 00 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of
absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A.
Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with
applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.
B.
Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side,
except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.
C.
Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of
ductwork accessories properly with other work.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.4
Operate installed duct accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air
leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain
proper operation and leakproof performance.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers
and adjust for proper action.
1.
2.
B.
Label access doors in accordance with Division-23 section "Mechanical Identification".
Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division-23 section "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing".
Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces.
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
END OF SECTION 23 33 00
DUCT ACCESSORIES
(12116)
23 33 00 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
SECTION 23 65 50 – CLOSED CIRCUIT FLUID COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Extent of factory-fabricated closed circuit fluid cooler work required by this section is indicated
on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section.
B.
Types of factory-fabricated closed circuit fluid coolers specified in this section include the
following:
1.
1.2
Forced-draft, centrifugal fan, counter-flow closed circuit fluid cooler.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Refer to other Division-23 sections for automatic temperature controls required in conjunction
with factory-fabricated closed circuit fluid coolers.
B.
Refer to Division-23 section "Water Treatment System" for water treatment system.
C.
Refer to Division-23 section “Hydronic Piping” for water piping to factory-fabricated closed circuit
fluid coolers.
D.
Refer to Division-15 section “Variable Frequency Drives” for variable frequency drives for
cooling tower fans.
E.
Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work:
1.
2.
F.
Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of
Division-26 sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on closed circuit fluid cooler.
Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as
furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.
Installation of variable frequency drives furnished under Division-15.
Control and interlock wiring between operating controls, indicating devices, and closed
circuit fluid cooler temperature control panels.
Provide variable frequency drives for closed circuit fluid cooler motors in accordance with
Division 23 “Variable Frequency Drives.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of factory-fabricated
closed circuit fluid colers, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
CLOSED CIRCUIT FLUID COOLERS
(12116)
23 65 50 - 1
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
B.
Provide manufacturer's certification of closed circuit fluid cooler cooling capacity, based on
factory performance tests, and provide performance curve plotting Leaving-Water Temperature
(LWT) against Wet-Bulb Temperature (WBT).
C.
Certify earthquake resistance against loading as indicated.
D.
Codes and Standards:
1.
2.
1.4
UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required
as part of factory-fabricated closed circuit fluid cooler, which have been listed and labeled
by UL and comply with NEMA Standards.
NEC Compliance: Install closed circuit fluid coolers in accordance with NFPA 70
"National Electrical Code".
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities,
pressure drop, fan performance data, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), installation
and start-up instructions, and rating curves with selected points clearly indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings,
required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components.
C.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to
closed circuit fluid coolers. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and
control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory- installed and
portions to be field-installed.
D.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each closed circuit fluid cooler,
control, and accessory; including "trouble- shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data,
product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams, in maintenance manual; in accordance with
requirements of Section 23 00 00.
E.
Certifications: Submit required certifications and written tests results for required testing.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handle closed circuit fluid coolers and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking,
denting and scoring. Do not install damaged closed circuit fluid cooler or components; replace
with new.
B.
Store closed circuit fluid coolers and components in clean place. Protect from dirt, fumes,
construction debris, and physical damage.
C.
Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading closed circuit fluid
coolers, and moving them to final location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FACTORY-FABRICATED CLOSED CIRCUIT FLUID COOLER CONSTRUCTION
CLOSED CIRCUIT FLUID COOLERS
(12116)
23 65 50 - 2
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
A.
General: Fabricate closed circuit fluid coolers using manufacturer's standard design, materials,
and construction in accordance with published product information, except as otherwise
indicated.
B.
Design structural system for the following live loading in addition to closed circuit fluid cooler
dead-loads and operating-loads:
1.
C.
Earthquake Resistance: Acceleration of 1.0 G horizontally through center of gravity.
Fabricate structural system including assembly of collecting basin and steel casings by the
following methods:
1.
2.
3.
Bolt connections with fasteners having equal or better corrosion-resistance than materials
fastened; seal joints to make watertight enclosure.
Weld connections and weld metal seams continuously to make watertight.
Provide rigging supports on structure for final rigging.
D.
Casings: Provide G-235 hot dipped galvanized steel with polymer coating fabricated and
installed by manufacturer to make cooler watertight.
E.
Collecting Basin and Sump: Provide type 304 stainless steel designed and installed to support
water and to ensure water tightness. Provide integral type collecting basin and sump with
lift-out stainless steel strainer with openings smaller than nozzle orifices, circular access doors,
and with connections for drain, overflow and water make-up.
F.
Drift Eliminators: Provide inert polyvinyl chloride plastic, having flame spread rating of 5 per
ASTM E 84 and resistant to ultraviolet light. Drift eliminators shall fabricated by manufacturer
into three-pass configuration to limit drift-loss to 0.001% of the of circulating-water flow-rate.
G.
Water Distribution System: The internal header and branches shall be constructed of schedule
40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe with a steel connection to the external piping. The spray
nozzles shall be ABS with large 3/8” by 1” orifice openings and integral sludge ring to eliminate
clogging.
The internal system shall be completely removable and shall be designed and
installed by manufacturer to ensure even distribution of water over the coil. System shall
provide a water flow rate of 6 GPM over each square foot of unit face area to ensure proper
flooding of the coil.
H.
Heat Transfer Coil: The coil shall be all prime surface steel, encased in a steel framework and
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication as a complete assembly. The tubes shall be arranged in a
self-spacing, staggered pattern in the direction of air-flow for maximum heat transfer efficiency
and minimum pressure drop, without the use of additional spacers between the coil tubes. The
coil shall be designed with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid and shall be pneumatically
tested at 400 P.S.I.G., under water.
I.
Water Recirculation Pump: The pump shall be a close - coupled, centrifugal type with
mechanical seals, installed vertically at the factory to allow free drainage on shut down. Pump
motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (T.E.F.C.) suitable for outdoor service. Pump shall be
selected by the manufacturer to provide the required flow based on the system pressure drop.
J.
Discharge Hoods: Provide G-235 hot dipped galvanized steel discharge hood, including access
doors, fabricated and installed by manufacturer to prevent recirculation of discharge air:
K.
Discharge Dampers: Provide airfoil control dampers and linkage as indicated, formed of
galvanized steel sheets, designed and installed by manufacturer.
CLOSED CIRCUIT FLUID COOLERS
(12116)
23 65 50 - 3
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
L.
Ducted Inlet Connection: Provide G-235 hot dipped galvanized steel flanged inlet connection
for connection to ductwork and solid bottom panels to prevent recirculation of room air.
M.
Basin Heaters: Provide electric immersion heaters including disconnect switch, contactor,
transformer, thermostat and low-water cutout, in weatherproof enclosure, for field wiring.
o
Provide basin heaters sized by manufacturer to maintain basin water at 40 F at an ambient
o
temperature of -20 F and wind velocity of 15 mph.
N.
Water Level Control: Provide electric 4-probe capacitance type level controller for low level
alarm, fill on and high level alarm indication to the BAS. Provide normally closed solenoid
make-up water valve for control by the BAS.
O.
Flow Control Valves: Provide one of the following flow control valves for balancing flow to the
distribution system, and for shut-off during servicing:
1.
2.2
Provide butterfly valves.
FACTORY FABRICATED CLOSED CIRCUIT FLUID COOLER FANS, MOTORS, AND DRIVES
A.
Fans and Drives: Provide forward curved centrifugal fans with hot dipped galvanized steel
construction and multi-groove power band V-belt drive with taper lock sheave designed for
150% of the motor nameplate rating. Belts shall be neoprene reinforced with polyester cord and
specifically designed for closed circuit fluid cooler service. The fans shall be factory installed
into the fan/pan section and statically and dynamically balanced. Provide access panel for belt
adjustment and motor replacement from the exterior of the unit.
B.
Fan Shaft and Bearings: Provide solid steel shaft with forged steel bearing journals. Provide
self-aligning ball bearings mounted in cast iron housings. Include external extended grease
lines, and fittings.
C.
Motor Type: Provide premium efficiency invertor duty, totally enclosed, fan cooled, (TEFC)
motor mounted on an adjustable base. Motors shall be suitable for outdoor service and shall
have a 1.15 service factor. Motors shall have shaft grounding kits.
D.
Motor Speed: Provide single-speed motor rated at 1800 rpm.
2.3
FACTORY FABRICATED COOLING TOWER ACCESSORIES
A.
Vibration Cutout Switch: Provide switch to de-energize fan motors if excessive vibration occurs
due to fan imbalance.
B.
Discharge Damper Controls: Provide modulating electric damper operator, with analog position
feedback.
C.
Assemble Components by one of the following methods:
1.
D.
Use galvanized or stainless fasteners and accessories to assemble components.
Apply phosphatized pretreatment on zinc coated surfaces which have not been
mill-phosphatized or polymer-coated. Apply gasoline- soluble rust preventative compound on
ferrous parts which cannot be galvanized, including shafts and machined parts.
1.
Finish components with zinc-coated metal surfaces by one of the following methods:
CLOSED CIRCUIT FLUID COOLERS
(12116)
23 65 50 - 4
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
a.
E.
Maximum Permissable Sound Pressure Level: Use 0.0002 microbar as reference. Measure at
50’ in several directions, uniformly covering 360 deg. Do not exceed maximum permissible dB
level in each of the following octave bands:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
F.
Coat abraded areas and welded areas with 95% pure zinc rich compound.
63 HZ 125 HZ 250 HZ 500 HZ 1000 HZ 2000 HZ 4000 HZ 8000 HZ -
55dB
57dB
55dB
53dB
53dB
50dB
48dB
45dB
Vibration Control: Provide vibration isolation rails as scheduled, with number and size of
isolators selected by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine areas and conditions under which factory-fabricated closed circuit fluid coolers are to
be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
manner acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install closed circuit fluid coolers where indicated, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that closed
circuit fluid coolers comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B.
Access: Provide access and service space around and over closed circuit fluid cooler as
indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Support: Install floor-mounted units on 4" high reinforced concrete pad, 4" larger on each side
than closed circuit fluid cooler base. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.
D.
Placement: Mount unit on vibration isolation rails. Level units to tolerance of 1/8" in 10'-0", in
both directions.
E.
Water Piping: Refer to Division-23 section "Hydronic Piping". Provide flanged or union
connections to closed circuit fluid cooler, with flexible pipe connections if equipment is mounted
on vibration isolators. Pitch lines so water will drain into sump. Connect inlets to closed circuit
fluid cooler with shutoff valve, and balancing valve. Connect outlets with shutoff valves. Install
crossover piping in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Install manual air vents at
high points and drains at low points in piping system.
F.
Make-up and Water Piping: Provide flanged or union connections to closed circuit fluid coolers,
with flexible pipe connections if cooler is mounted on vibration isolators. Pitch lines so water will
drain into sump. Connect to automatic fill valve with 3-valve bypass, and backflow preventer.
CLOSED CIRCUIT FLUID COOLERS
(12116)
23 65 50 - 5
University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
Engineering Center Process Fluid Cooler Replacement
G.
Drain Piping: Connect drain, overflow, and bleed lines to closed circuit fluid cooler as indicated,
full size of connection on cooler.
H.
Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.
1.
3.3
Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up
until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Cleaning: Clean inside of closed circuit fluid cooler thoroughly before filling for start-up. Clean
factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's
touch-up paint.
B.
Start-up: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for filling and start-up of operation, but not
less than the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Verify lubrication of rotating parts; lubricate as needed.
Verify fan rotation direction.
Verify that motor amperage is in accordance with manufacturer's data.
Adjust water level control for proper operating level.
Adjust bleed valve for indicated percentage of circulated water volume.
Adjust temperature controls and verify operation.
C.
Chemical Treatment: Passivate closed circuit fluid cooler in accordance with Division 23
section “Water Treatment Systems”. Coordinate installation of chemical treatment equipment
and initial chemical treatment with owners chemical treatment supplier to insure proper
chemical treatment prior to operation of closed circuit fluid cooler.
D.
Operation Test: Test each closed circuit fluid cooler to show that it will operate in accordance
with indicated requirements.
3.4
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 4-hour day to instruct
Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of factory-fabricated closed circuit fluid
coolers.
1.
3.5
Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and Engineer of
training date.
SPARE PARTS
A.
General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts:
1.
2.
One spare set of matched fan belts for each belt driven fan.
One spare gasket for each gasketed access and inspection opening.
END OF SECTION 23 65 50
CLOSED CIRCUIT FLUID COOLERS
(12116)
23 65 50 - 6
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
SECTION 26 05 00 – ELECTRICAL – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A. Provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General
Requirements, and applicable provisions elsewhere in the Contract Documents apply to the work
of Division 16 - Electrical.
B. Articles contained in this section apply to all Division 16 Sections.
1.02
SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Work Included: Unless specified otherwise, provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary
for completely finished and operational systems. Provide all minor incidental items such as
offsets, fittings, etc. Required as part of the work even though not specified or indicated.
B. Description of Systems: The work of Division 16 includes but is not limited to:
1. Branch Circuit Power Distribution
C. Related Requirements:
1. General Requirements: Division 1 - All Sections
2. Division 16: All Sections
3.
Mechanical and Electrical Coordination: Division 15
D. Work Under Other Divisions:
1. Work Under Division 15
E. Examination: Examine work preceding or interfacing with the work of Division 16 Sections and
report any known or observed defects that affect the work to the General Contractor. Do not
proceed with the work until the defects are corrected. No waiver of responsibility for defective
work will be allowed due to failure to report unfavorable conditions affecting the work.
F. Existing Utilities: Existing Utilities are indicated as accurately as possible on the Drawings. Work
on utilities encountered and not indicated on the Drawings will be directed by change order after
being brought to the attention of the Architect. Close openings and repair damage in an acceptable
manner to utilities encountered.
1.03
COORDINATION
A. General: Coordinate and order the progress of Electrical work to conform to the progress of the
work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building
will permit.
ELECTRICAL – BASIC REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 1
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
B. Installation Procedures: Confer and cooperate with other trades and coordinate the work in proper
relation with theirs. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with other trades.
C. Coordination with Mechanical Work: Division 15
D. Cutting and Patching: Section 16050.
E. Drawings and Specifications: The Drawings and Specifications are complementary; what is called
for in either of these is binding as though called for by both. The Electrical Drawings indicate the
general design and arrangement of lines, equipment, systems, etc. Information shown is
diagrammatic in character and does not necessarily indicate every required offset, fitting, etc. Do
not scale Drawings for dimensions. Take dimensions, locations, levels, etc. from Architectural
Drawings and equipment to be furnished. No extra compensation will be allowed on account of
differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the Drawings.
F. Discrepancies:
1. Examine Drawings and Specifications for other parts of the work, and if any discrepancies
occur between the plans for the work of this Division and the plans for the work of others,
report such discrepancies to the General Contractor and obtain written instructions for any
changes necessary.
2. Make changes, at no additional cost to the Owner, to the work of Division 16 made necessary
by the failure or neglect to report such discrepancies. However, it is not the intent of the
Specifications that the Contractor be responsible for the correct design of the electrical
system.
G. Order of Precedence: The precedence of electrical construction documents is as follows:
1. Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the
original Drawings and Specifications.
2. Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or with Drawings of the same scale, the
more stringent or higher quality requirement shall apply.
3. In the Drawings, the precedence shall be Drawings of larger scale over those of smaller scale,
figured dimensions over scaled dimensions and noted material over graphic indications.
4. Should a conflict arise between the Drawings and the Specifications, the Specifications shall
have precedence.
5. Should there be a conflict in the dimensions or locations between Electrical Drawings and
Architectural Drawings, the Architectural Drawings shall have precedence.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples, shop drawings and product data as required by various sections of Division 16 in
accordance with Section 01300. Make submittals to Architect. Do not make submittals directly to
Engineer. Include one additional copy above the requirements of Section 01330.
ELECTRICAL – BASIC REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 2
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation: Base final installation of materials and equipment on actual dimensions and
conditions at the project site. Field measure for materials or equipment requiring exact fit.
B. Workmanship: Perform work in accordance with good commercial practice. The good appearance
of finished work shall be of equal importance with its mechanical efficiency.
C. Supervision: Be responsible for and coordinate the work of all sub-contractors working under
Division 16.
D. Properly locate anchors chases, recesses and openings required for the proper installation of the
work. Arrange with the proper contractors for the building of anchors, etc. and for the leaving of
the required chases, recesses and openings.
E. Install equipment and material in accordance with manufacturer=s instructions unless specifically
indicated otherwise, or where local codes or regulations take precedence.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Pay for permit and inspection fee costs applicable to work of Division 16.
B. Comply with State and local requirements and ordinances. Comply with requirements of the
Utility Companies. Call for inspections required by local building inspection authority. Submit
certificate of occupancy or final acceptance by inspection authority.
C. Applicable Building Codes and Ordinances: Including but not limited to the following:
1. Governing Fire Department Requirements
2. State of Colorado Energy Standards
3. State Department of Labor Requirements
4. State Department of Health Requirements
5. National Fire Protection Association Standards
6. State and Federal Safety and Health Laws
7. NFPA 70 2011 Edition - National Electrical Code
D. Discrepancies: If discrepancies occur between these Specifications, local codes, local Utility
requirements, etc., the most stringent requirements shall apply.
ELECTRICAL – BASIC REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 3
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
1.06
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. References:
1. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade or Federal Standards, comply
with the requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or
are required by applicable codes.
2. The date of the standard is that in effect at the bid date, or date of Owner/Architect
Agreement when there are no bids, except when a specific date is specified.
3. When required by individual Specification Section, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy
at job site during work until Substantial Completion.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Deliver and store materials and equipment in
manufacturer=s unopened containers fully identified with manufacturer=s name, trade name, type,
class, grade, size, and color.
B. Protection: Store materials and equipment off the ground and under cover, protected from damage.
C. Acceptance: Check and sign for materials to be furnished by others for installations under Division
16 upon delivery. Assume responsibility for the storage and safekeeping of such material from
time of delivery until final acceptance.
1.08
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Job Site Documents: Maintain at job site, one record copy of the following:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Reviewed Shop Drawings
5. Change Orders
B. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible
condition, apart from documents used for construction.
C. Record Information: Label each document ARecord Document@. Mark information with
contrasting color using ink. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until
required information is recorded.
D. Record the following Information on the Specifications:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product or item of equipment
actually installed.
2. Changes by change order or field order.
3. Other matters not originally specified.
ELECTRICAL – BASIC REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 4
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
E. Record the following information on the Drawings:
1. Field changes of dimension and detail.
2. Changes by change order or field order.
3. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
F. Shop Drawings: Maintain Shop Drawings as record documents recording changes made after
review as specified for Drawings above.
G. Submittal: At completion of project, deliver Project Record Documents to General Contractor.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL – BASIC REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 5
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
SECTION 26 05 26 – ELECTRICAL - GROUNDING
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to this Section.
B. Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions applies to work of this Section.
1.02
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Raceways and Enclosures.
1.03
REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
1. ANSI/IEEE 142, 1982, ARecommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems@ (copyrighted by IEEE, ANSI approved).
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. UL 467, 1984 (Revised 1986), AGrounding and Bonding Equipment@.
2. UL 486 A, 1908 (Revised 1989), AWired Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use
with Copper Conductors, Seventh Edition@.
D. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM B-3, 1981, AStandard Specification for Individual Conductors@.
2. ASTM B-33, 1981 (Revised 1985), AStandard Specification for Tinned Soft or
Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes@.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
CONDUCTORS
A. General: Grounding conductors shall be stranded, medium drawn copper or as shown on
the drawings or required by this specification.
ELECTRICAL – GROUNDING
16060 - 1
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
B. Conductivity: Copper conductors shall have a conductivity of not less than 98 percent at
20 degrees C. Conductor resistance values shall be in accordance with the value in
IPECEA S-68-516.
C. Stranded Conductors: Stranded conductors shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Individual Conductors: ASTM B-3.
2. Stranded Assembly: ASTM B-8.
D. Insulation: Provide insulation same as specified in section 16050.
2.02
BONDING JUMPERS
A. Flexible Bonding Cable: Provide flexible flat cable constructed of 480 strands of 30
gauge copper wires, 3/4 inch wide by 1/8 inch thick.
B. Flexible Bonding Strips: Provide flexible flat conductor, constructed of 480 strands of 30
gauge bare copper wires with bolt hole ends. Strap size shall be 3/4 inch wide by 10
inches long.
2.03
CONNECTORS
A. Ground Bushings:
1. Bushings shall be malleable iron, cadmium plated, insulated throat with screw type
wire connector.
2. Acceptable Manufacturer: OZ Gedney - Type IGB.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the
Owner’s Representative in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.02
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other work to ensure that installation is not vulnerable to physical
damage.
ELECTRICAL – GROUNDING
16060 - 2
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
3.03
SAFETY GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. Provide for a complete grounding system. Route grounding conductors to provide the
shortest and most direct path. Install grounding conductors in conduit.
B. Provide a separate grounding conductor, securely grounded, on each run of metallic
conduit and flexible conduits.
C. Provide a green or bare grounding jumper from the ground screw of outlet boxes to the
ground screw of wiring devices. Wiring devices UL tested and approved for use without
the jumper may be used in lieu of the jumper.
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Comply with applicable requirements of UL 467, ANSI/IEEE 80, and applicable NEMA
standards, to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
B. Bonding Jumpers: Bonding jumper shall be installed where continuity of piping of metal
must be maintained or as required by the NEC.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL – GROUNDING
16060 - 3
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
SECTION 26 05 29 – ELECTRICAL – HANGARS/SUPPORTS FOR ELEC. SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit Supports.
B. Anchors.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Single Runs: Galvanized one hole or two straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers,
or bolted split stamped galvanized steel hangers.
B. Multiple Runs: Rack on channel supports.
C. Vertical Runs: Channel support.
2.03
ANCHORS
A. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors.
B. Solid Masonry: Lead expansion anchors or preset inserts.
C. Metal Surfaces: Machine screws, bolts or welded studs.
D. Concrete Surfaces: Self-drilling anchors or powder driven studs.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A. Obtain permission from the Architect before using powder actuated anchors or drilling
structural members.
ELECTRICAL – SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 1
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
B. Lay out to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance, and to support equipment
loads required.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Support exposed metallic conduits and metallic conduits installed above accessible
ceilings not more than 7 feet on center. Support conduits from building roof or floor
structure. Do not support from ceiling suspension support systems, refer to Art. 300-11
of the NEC for exceptions that may apply.
B. Support boxes independent of conduit unless a cast box is connected to galvanized rigid
conduits where conduit is supported within 12 inches of box.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL – SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 2
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
SECTION 26 05 53 – ELECTRICAL – IDENTIFICATION of ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tape Labels.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Adhesive Tape Labels: Black imprinted letters on a clear tape as made by a tape
imprinting machine such as the Brother AP-Touch@ or approved equivalent. Install on
each junction box to clearly indicated circuit or circuits within.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A. No temporary markings which are visible on equipment are permitted.
B. Thoroughly clean surface to which pressure sensitive type tape labels are applied to
assure adherence of label.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Do not use abbreviations in labeling without specific permission.
3.03
SCHEDULE OF LABELS
A. Provide 1/8 inch minimum height letters for equipment, disconnect and junction box
circuit identification.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL – ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195 - 1
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
SECTION 26 05 03 – ELECTRICAL – EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS
PART I
1.01
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit
B. Wires and Cables
C. Boxes
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Install wiring in complete raceway systems unless specifically indicated otherwise.
B. Provide galvanized rigid conduit throughout except as allowed below:
1. Electrical metallic tubing Athinwall@ may be installed concealed in furred ceilings
and walls or exposed at least 5 feet above the floor, provided such areas are dry.
C. Circuits #6 and smaller are classified as branch circuits.
D. Conductors installed in high ambient conditions such as near boiler breeching, directly
under roofing, exposed on roof, etc., shall be rated 90 degrees C minimum.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1.
C-80.3
Electrical Metallic Tubing
B. Federal Specifications
1.
2.
W-S 896E
WW-C 563
Switch, Toggle, and Locks
Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing
C. National Electrical Manufacturer=s Association (NEMA)
ELECTRICAL – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 1
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
1.
PART 2
2.01
UL 514-79
Outlet Boxes and Fittings
PRODUCTS
CONDUIT
A. Galvanized Rigid Conduit: Fed. Spec. WW-C581-d and ANSI c-80.1.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Fed. Spec. WW-C563 and ANSI C-80.3.
C. Conduit Fittings: Raintight Compression Type.
D. Liquid-tight Flexible Conduit: Constructed of a galvanized steel core with PVC cover;
Anaconda Sealtite or equivalent. Use fittings of same manufacturer as conduit.
2.02
WIRE AND CABLE
A. Branch Circuit Conductors: Copper, #12 minimum, THWN or THHN insulated only.
Pilot control (Class 2 Circuits) may be #14 AWG. Other class 1 control circuits may be
#16.
2.03
OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULLBOXES
A. Boxes Up to 150 Cubic Inches: Standard, one piece, zinc-coated, or cadmium plated
steel.
2.01
DEVICE PLATES
A. Surface Plates: Galvanized steel, 1.25 oz/sq.ft. minimum coating, pressure formed with
round corners for smooth edge and fit to box.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A. Supports:
1. Support raceways, boxes etc., in accordance with Section 16190, Supporting
Devices.
ELECTRICAL – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 2
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Conduits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Cross expansion joints with expansion fittings and bonding conductor.
Space supports for exposed raceways not more than 7 feet on center.
Route exposed conduit parallel or perpendicular to walls and structural members,
with neat right angle bends or change direction with conduit fitting.
Install conduits at least 6 inches from parallel runs of flues, steam lines, or other
heated lines.
Effectively seal conduit penetrations through fire walls and floors through the use of
rated fittings such as OZ ACFSF@ series fittings or equivalent.
Provide double locknuts and bushings on all rigid conduit terminations.
Provide short extensions of flexible liquid-tight metallic conduit for makeup of
motor, transformer, or equipment connections.
Wire and Cable:
1.
2.
3.
Do not install wire in incomplete conduit runs.
Make branch circuit conductor terminations with insulated pressure type connectors
such as Ideal Industries AWing Nut@, 3M Company AScotchlok@, or Buchanan ABCap@.
Color code power and signal conductors Factory colored. Sized larger than #6 may
be color coded color taping of exposed ends.
277/480v : Ph A (Yellow), Ph B (Orange), Ph C (Brown), Neut (White), Gnd (Grey)
277/480V
Phase A – Yellow
Phase B - Orange
Phase C - Brown
Neutral - White
Ground – Green
4. Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor in all power circuits. Size
conductor per the NEC unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings.
B. Outlets and Boxes:
1.
Install flush boxes plumb, within 1/8 inch of finished surface. Install exposed boxes
plumb, securely anchored to ceiling or wall.
ELECTRICAL – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 3
University of Colorado – Colorado Springs – Engineering Center
Cooling Tower Replacement
2.
H.
Coordinate locations of junction boxes and pull boxes with other trades so that boxes
as accessible remain so.
Systems Identification:
1.
Identify junction and pull boxes with labels of embossed metal or plastic tape affixed
to their cover and side. Identify the electrical system it serves, i.e., Emergency
Power, etc.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 4